JP2023010863A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of providing novel game contents.

SOLUTION: With entry of a game ball B1 into a first through gate 35 as an opportunity, an ordinary electric open lottery is executed. In a game board 24, an adjustment mechanism 180 for discharging the game ball B1 toward and into the first through gate 35 is provided at an upper portion of the first through gate 35. In a Pachinko game machine 10, a low-frequency support mode, and a high-frequency support mode for more easily causing ordinary electric open winning than the low-frequency support mode are set. A main-side ROM stores a winning determination value table for the low-frequency support mode and a winning determination value table for the high-frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, a winning continuous period occurs. During the winning continuous period, ball entry timing of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and entering the first through gate 35 corresponds to a target period of the ordinary electric open winning.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray reservoir are discharged to the lower tray reservoir by being guided by the device (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably playing a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is electrically connected to a predetermined detection means and performs a process for giving a game value to a game;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means for executing a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine comprising
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the processing for imparting the game value and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detection means to the processing execution means;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably play a game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a front view of the game board showing the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in an enlarged manner. (a) is a front view and a right side view of a rotating body separated from an adjusting mechanism; (b) is a front view and a plan view of the rotating body; It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board in the case of cutting just above the inlet on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board. (a), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the movement of the game ball taken into the adjustment mechanism. (a), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for explaining the motion of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and entering the first through gate. It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism showing the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and out of the first through gate. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board in the case of cutting directly above the inlet on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (b) in the case of cutting along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first blade portion, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board in the case of cutting directly above the inlet on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) Low-frequency winning judgment value table showing winning judgment values for ordinary electric open lottery in low-frequency support mode; (b) High-frequency showing winning judgment values for electric open lottery in high-frequency support mode 10 is a winning determination value table for use. (a) to (c) are time charts showing timings at which general electric open winning can occur in the pachinko machine for comparison. (a) to (d) are time charts showing timings at which general electric open winning can occur. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the open counter update process performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the general figure general electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process by the side of a normal figure performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric open lottery process performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure determination performed by main side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting a detection result of a ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various devices which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by payout side CPU. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. 9 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged periphery of an adjustment mechanism in the second embodiment. (a) is a plan view of the housing cut just above the adjustment mechanism, and (b) is a front view of the housing showing an enlarged view of the rotation shaft. FIG. 4 is a front view of the rotating body separated from the adjustment mechanism; (a) It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when cutting just above the sorting nail on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, (b) Ejected from the adjustment mechanism and winning the first through gate (c) A cross section of the window panel and the game board when cut just above the distribution nail on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the motion of the game ball discharged|emitted from an adjustment mechanism and out of a 1st through gate. (a) ~ (d) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for explaining the movement of the game ball that is taken into the adjustment mechanism and transported. (a) ~ (c) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for explaining the movement of the game ball near the inlet. It is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged periphery of an adjustment mechanism in the third embodiment. (a) It is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged periphery of the electric nail in the permission position, and (b) a front view of the game board showing an enlarged periphery of the electric nail in the prohibited position. (a) ~ (c) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for explaining the movement of the game ball around the adjustment mechanism. (a) to (c) are front views of the adjusting mechanism for explaining how the pinching of the game ball is eliminated at the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism. It is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged periphery of an adjustment mechanism in the fourth embodiment. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the rotating body is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (a) ~ (d) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for explaining the movement of the game ball that is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and enters the first through gate. (a), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown in order to demonstrate the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and removed from the first through gate. It is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged periphery of an adjustment mechanism in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a front view of the adjustment device in a closed state; (b) is a front view of the adjustment device in an open state; (a) ~ (d) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for explaining the movement of the game ball around the adjustment mechanism. It is a front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. (a), (b) It is the schematic which shows the structure of a 2nd operation|movement opening. (a) A longitudinal sectional view of the distribution winning device as seen from the side, and (b) a longitudinal sectional view of the distribution winning device as seen from the rear side. FIG. 21 is a front view of a game board showing an enlarged periphery of an adjustment mechanism in a seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F in the eighth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by management side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing power failure handling processing executed by a management CPU in the tenth embodiment; FIG. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specific processing performed by main side CPU in 11th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by management side CPU. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing trigger identification processing executed by the main CPU in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by a management CPU in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of an MPU of a main control device in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 22 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting detection results of each entering ball detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in the eighteenth embodiment;

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration inside the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general prize winning port 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a first through gate 35, a second through gate 39, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37 and a normal A drawing unit 38 and the like are provided respectively. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one each.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of patterns. The symbol display device 41 has a display surface 41a for displaying effects, and is arranged in an opening 24c provided in the game board 24 so that the display surface 41a can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. there is A center frame 57 is arranged in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the pattern display device 41 . The upper portion of the center frame 57 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and the configuration is such that the visibility of the display screen is not lowered due to the game ball B1 falling. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the center frame 57 includes a roof unit 58 provided to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 24c. The game board 24 has game areas PA on both the left and right sides of the center frame 57 .

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail is constructed to guide B1. A game ball B1 shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 includes a shooting rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, and a game ball B1 stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, is supplied onto the shooting rail 27a. It is provided with a feeding device 27b and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator for shooting the game ball B1 supplied on the shooting rail 27a toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball B1 is shot. The player can shoot the game ball B1 aiming at the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57 and aim at the game area PA on the right side of the center frame 57 by adjusting the amount of rotation in the rotation operation. A game ball B1 can be shot.

As shown in FIG. 3, even if a ball enters the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39, the game ball B1 is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or when one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34 In this case, one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball B1 enters the general prize winning port 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and a special electric prize is won. When one game ball B1 enters the device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls B1 that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls B1, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball B1 passes through a predetermined opening. Also included is a mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged from. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the entry of the game ball B1 into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the first The entry of the game ball B1 into the through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 is also expressed as winning.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The game ball B1 cannot enter the second operating port 34 in the closed state of the universal electrical role 34a, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57, a first through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation opening 34 in the flow direction of the game ball B1. The first through gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has entered the first through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has won the first through gate 35 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, and the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 It is possible to win either one.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA on the right side of the center frame 57, a second through gate 39 is provided upstream of the second operation opening 34 in the flow direction of the game ball B1. . The second through gate 39 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has entered the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after winning. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has won the second through gate 39 reaches the area where the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are provided, and the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 It is possible to win either one.

Based on the winning of the through gates 35 and 39, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, a general electric open lottery, which is a lottery triggered by the winning of the through gates 35 and 39, is performed, and a general electric open lottery is provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball B1 does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the normal figure display section 38a of the figure unit 38. FIG. Then, when the result of the general electric open lottery is the general electric open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general electric diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the general electric open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the through gates 35 and 39 are won, the general electric role 34a is intermittently opened to support the winning of the second operation opening 34 Low frequency support mode And, a high-frequency support mode is set in which the general electric accessory 34a is in an open state in a manner that makes it easier for the game ball B1 to enter the second operation port 34 than in the low-frequency support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the low-frequency support mode in which the transition to the high-frequency support mode is not performed, the player is directed to the left side game area PA where the first through gate 35 is provided. done. Then, when the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, an effect is performed in which the player aims at the game area PA on the right side where the second through gate 39 is provided. Details of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode will be described later.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of game balls B1 winning through gates 35 and 39 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls B1 winning the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display section 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the design display device 41, when the fluctuation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the pattern is displayed according to it A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. The symbols are scroll-displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scroll display is first started in all symbol rows, then the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of upper symbol row→lower symbol row→middle symbol row. The game ends with the design still displayed. Then, for example, in a game cycle in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. will be In addition, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined result is displayed and the end is one of the game rounds. times. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

When a big win is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball B1 can win a prize when a lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It's like Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 3, above the first through gate 35, an adjustment mechanism 180 is provided for adjusting the timing at which the game balls B1 are supplied toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The adjustment mechanism 180 supplies game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 by ejecting the game balls B1 toward the first through gate 35 below. The interval between the adjusting mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is such that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. . The adjustment mechanism 180 is described below.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 4, the adjusting mechanism 180 includes a rotating body 183 that takes in the game ball B1 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 and conveys it to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, and an adjusting drive that rotates the rotating body 183 clockwise. and a housing portion 181 that houses the rotating body 183 and prevents the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 183 by the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation from being thrown out before the discharge position.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rotating body 183 is provided in the center of the adjusting mechanism 180. As shown in FIG. The rotating body 183 is formed by providing four concave portions 183b to 183e capable of taking in the game ball B1 in a substantially disk-shaped transparent resin member whose diameter is reduced toward the rear. ing. 5A is a front view and a right side view of the rotating body 183, and FIG. 5B is a front view and a plan view of the rotating body 183. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are formed so as to be recessed from the outer edge portion of the rotating body 183 toward the axis line. The recessed portions 183b to 183e are arranged such that the centers of the recessed portions 183b to 183e are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and the order in the rotational direction is first recessed portion 183b→second recessed portion 183c→third recessed portion 183d→fourth recessed portion 183e. is formed to be

As shown in FIG. 5A, none of the recesses 183b to 183e reach the position of the axis of the rotor 183 and are discontinuous. Each recessed portion 183b-183e has a shape and size that allows the entirety of one game ball B1 to enter. In each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the inner wall near the outer edge of the rotating body 183 has an inclination that widens toward the outer edge of the recessed portions 183b to 183e. It is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the rotating body 183 includes a first blade portion 188 sandwiched between a fourth recessed portion 183e and a first recessed portion 183b, and a first recessed portion 183b and a second recessed portion 183c. The second blade portion 189 sandwiched between, the third blade portion 190 sandwiched between the second recess portion 183c and the third recess portion 183d, and the third recess portion 183d and the fourth recess portion 183e. A fourth blade portion 191 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the adjustment mechanism 180, the accommodation portion 181 that accommodates the rotating body 183 is arranged such that the game ball B1 captured in each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 moves from the front of the game board 24 while being transported. It also has a base body 181a that prevents it from moving backward. The base body 181a has a fixing flange 181b that protrudes radially from the outer circumference of the base body 181a.

FIG. 6 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 taken just above the inlet 185 on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. In order to explain the configuration of the accommodating portion 181, FIG. 6 shows a state in which the rotating body 183 is removed. As shown in FIG. 6, the front surface of the game board 24 is formed with a fixing recess 24d capable of accommodating the base body 181a and the fixing flange 181b. As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating portion 181 is configured such that the base member 181a and the fixing flange 181b are accommodated in the fixing concave portion 24d (FIG. 6), and the game board 24 is secured by screwing the fixing flange 181b. is fixed to The base body 181a is positioned behind the rotating body 183, and the front surface of the base body 181a is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, a housing space for housing the rotating body 183 is formed in front of the base body 181a, and the rotating body 183 is housed in the housing space. An adjustment drive unit 184 is arranged behind the rotor 183 . The adjustment drive section 184 has an output shaft 184 a extending forward from the front surface of the adjustment drive section 184 in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 24 . The rotating body 183 is connected to the output shaft 184a such that the axis of the rotating body 183 is aligned with the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive section 184. As shown in FIG.

The adjustment driving section 184 is connected to an output port of an MPU 62 (see FIG. 12) which will be described later. By supplying the drive signal and driving the adjustment drive unit 184, the rotor 183 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° per second. A stepping motor is used as the adjustment drive unit 184, and specifically, a 1-2 phase excitation drive that alternately performs 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation is employed. The phase excitation method is not limited to this, and other phase excitation methods may be adopted. The adjustment driving unit 184 is configured such that the output shaft rotates once when 500 pulses of the excitation signal are transmitted from the main controller 60, and the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step is 0.72°.

As shown in FIG. 4, the housing portion 181 has upright walls 181c and 181d for partitioning the housing space. The housing space is defined by standing walls 181c and 181d to be slightly larger than the rotating body 183. As shown in FIG. The distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the upright walls 181c and 181d of the housing portion 181 is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191, and the two distances are equal to each other. The difference is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 enters between the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191 and the standing walls 181c and 181d is eliminated.

The standing walls 181c and 181d project forward from the front surface of the base body 181a, and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a. Among the plurality of standing walls 181c and 181d, the left standing wall 181c existing on the left side and the right standing wall 181d existing on the right side are separated in the lateral direction, so that the upper part of the housing portion 181 An intake 185 is present.

As shown in FIG. 4, the shape and size of the intake port 185 are such that one game ball B1 can pass through the intake port 185, and a plurality of game balls B1 can pass through the intake port 185 at the same time. It is set so that it is impossible to pass through the mouth 185 . Therefore, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game balls B1 one by one from the intake port 185 .

The left upright wall 181c prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left of the inlet 185 from entering the adjustment mechanism 180. As shown in FIG. For this reason, the game ball B1 is taken into the concave portions 183b to 183e that are open toward the left, and the game ball B1 is ejected after being conveyed for a long time in the order of the upper part → right part → lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. never In addition, the right side upright wall 181d moves toward the outside of the adjusting mechanism 180 due to the centrifugal force of the rotating body 183 before the game ball B1 after being taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 is transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 and reaches the discharge timing. prevent being thrown into the

As shown in FIG. 4, the left upright wall 181c and the right upright wall 181d are laterally separated from each other, so that the accommodating portion 181 is opened downward. For this reason, the game ball B1 that has been taken into one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 is discharged toward the first through gate 35 positioned below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the housing portion 181 has a discharge protrusion 181e for discharging the game ball B1 taken into the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at a predetermined discharge position. The ejecting protrusion 181e is provided near the bottom of the center of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 6, the ejecting protrusion 181e protrudes forward from the front surface of the base body 181a to a position in the middle of the game area PA so that the protrusion dimension is 9 mm.

As already explained, the length of the game area PA (FIG. 3) sandwiched between the front surface of the game board 24 and the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is 18 mm in the front-rear direction, and the game ball B1 is 11 mm in diameter. For this reason, the ejecting protrusion 181e includes a game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA (game board 24 side), a game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA (window panel 52 side), It has a front-to-rear length dimension that allows contact with both Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the ejecting projecting portion 181e is formed to extend downward from near the center of the base body 181a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the lower end of the discharge projection 181e is from the center of the rotating body 183 to the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191 (FIG. 5(a)). less than the distance of Further, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the first blade portion 188 and the third blade portion 190 of the rotating body 183 are provided with collision avoidance grooves 192 for avoiding collision with the discharge projection portion 181e. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the second blade portion 189 and the fourth blade portion 191 are also provided with collision avoidance grooves 192 for avoiding collision with the discharge protrusion 181e.

The collision avoidance groove 192 is provided to be larger than the ejection protrusion 181e, and does not come into contact with the rotating body 183 regardless of the rotation state of the ejection protrusion 181e. Therefore, the discharge protrusion 181e does not hinder the rotation of the rotating body 183. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the ejecting protrusion 181e has a right ejecting side surface 181g that is inclined downward and leftward as the right side surface. The ejection right side surface 181g contacts the game ball B1 present in the concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the ejection position of the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180. As shown in FIG. After the game ball B1 is transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, it is ejected toward the first through gate 35 downward upon contact with the ejecting right side surface 181g.

When the game ball B1 is ejected directly downward from the adjustment mechanism 180, it enters the first through gate 35 located below without colliding with an obstacle on the way. As already explained, the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the distance from the ejection position to the first thru gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, the ejected game ball B1 may be ejected from the first thru gate 35 depending on the ejection direction and ejection speed of the game ball B1 at the ejection position. There is a possibility that it will come off. The discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 is fixed by the discharge projection 181e, and the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is short. Therefore, when the discharged game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35, after the game ball B1 is discharged in the adjustment mechanism 180, until the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 The time falls within a given range.

Since the discharge timing of the game ball B1 is generated in the adjustment mechanism 180 at a cycle of 1 sec, the winning of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is also generated at a cycle of approximately 1 sec. The details of the flow of discharge of the game ball B1 from the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described later.

The rotating body 183 rotates clockwise while the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 185 is present in the recesses 183b to 183e, thereby directing the game ball B1 toward the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. transport.

The adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 flowing down from above when any one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is open upward. By configuring the inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e near the outer edge of the rotating body 183 to have a shape that widens toward the outer edge, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 at the inlet 185. period can be extended. As a result, the number of game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 can be increased, and the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 can be increased.

In addition, by configuring the rotating body 183 with a plurality of recessed portions 183b to 183e, the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 necessary for discharging the game ball B1 from the adjusting mechanism 180 in a cycle of 1 sec can be reduced. can be done. By slowly rotating the rotating body 183 in this way, the probability that the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 will be caught in the concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 can be increased.

Here, the configuration around the adjustment mechanism 180 on the game board 24 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, above the inlet 185, there are a plurality of nails 24b for gathering the game balls B1 flowing down the game area PA upstream of the inlet 185 toward the inlet 185. arrayed. In the upper left area of the inlet 185, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged for changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the right side and directing the game ball B1 toward the inlet 185. A plurality of nails 24b are arranged in the upper right region of the intake port 185 for changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the region to the left side and directing the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 4, the plurality of nails 24b arranged near the upper part of the inlet 185 have a distance from the nail 24b to the left standing wall 181c and a distance from the nail 24b to the right standing wall 181d. It is provided so as to be one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. In addition, on the left and right sides of the adjustment mechanism 180, spaces are provided for releasing game balls B1 that have flowed down toward the intake port 185 and have not been taken into the intake port 185 downstream. No nail 24b is arranged in the space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down near the intake port 185 and has not been taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 is adjusted from between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181c or from between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d. It can be discharged to the left and right spaces of the mechanism 180 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying around the inlet 185. - 特許庁

Next, a detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described. First, the configuration for taking in the game ball B1 will be described.

As already explained, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm, and the longitudinal dimension of the game area PA (FIG. 3) is 18 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Thus, in the game area PA, there is a gap that allows the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA to move in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 5, each recessed portion 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is inclined forward toward the axial center. Therefore, each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is tilted forward and downward when the recessed portions 183b to 183e are opened upward. Become. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when the first recessed portion 183b is open upward, the first recessed portion 183b is inclined forward and downward.

The game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 is accommodated in one of the concave portions 183b to 183e opened upward at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180. As described above, the concave portions 183b to 183e that are open upward at the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 are inclined downward toward the front. Therefore, while the game ball B1 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, the game ball B1 is positioned on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA having a thickness in the front-rear direction. do.

Next, the timing at which the adjustment mechanism 180 takes in the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the inlet 185 is open upward. Assuming that a state in which any one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is positioned below the intake port 185 is the intake-permitted state, in the intake-permitted state, the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 The game ball B1 that has entered can be accommodated in the recessed portions 183b to 183e.

On the other hand, when the rotating body 183 rotates from the state shown in FIG. In the prohibited state, the game ball B1 trying to enter the adjustment mechanism 180 through the inlet 185 collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a-191a of the blades 188-191. In this case, the game ball B1 is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180.

At the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180, as the rotating body 183 rotates, both states of an intake permitted state in which the game ball B1 can be captured and an intake prohibited state in which the game ball B1 cannot be captured are established. alternately repeated.

First, the case where the intake port 185 is in the intake permitting state will be described. 7A and 7B are front views of the game board 24 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 180 and its vicinity. The rotating body 183 in FIG. 7(a) is in a rotating state in which the first recessed portion 183b is positioned upward, and the rotating body 183 in FIG. It is in a rotating state rotated clockwise by 90°.

The game ball B1 that has entered the intake port 185 in the intake-permitted state is taken into the concave portions 183b to 183e positioned above. For example, as shown in FIG. 7(a), a game ball B1 that has entered the inlet 185 with the first recess 183b positioned upward is taken into the first recess 183b.

A game ball B1 captured in one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 as the rotating body 183 rotates. At this time, the right upright wall 181d prevents the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from being released to the outside of the adjustment mechanism 180 before the ejection timing is reached.

For example, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b is first pushed forward in the rotational direction (rightward in FIG. 7(a)) from the first blade portion 188. is added. Next, the game ball B1, which is about to drop due to its own weight, is supported by the second blade portion 189. As shown in FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 7(b), a resistance force is applied from the right upright wall 181d to the game ball B1 which is about to fall toward the lower right due to its own weight and the force applied from the second blade portion 189. , the game ball B1 is prevented from falling to the lower right. In this state, the rotating body 183 rotates, so that the game ball B1 captured at the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed toward the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180. FIG.

The game ball B1 captured in one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 is ejected from the ejection right side surface 181g (FIG. 4) of the ejection protrusion 181e (FIG. 4). It is ejected in a certain direction by contact.

Here, as shown in FIG. 5B, the side surface of the first blade portion 188 located on the front side in the rotation direction is defined as a first front surface 188b, and the side surface of the first blade portion 188 located on the front side in the rotation direction is the second front surface 188b. A side surface of the blade portion 189 is referred to as a second front surface 189b. Further, the side surface of the third blade portion 190 located on the front side in the rotation direction is defined as a third front surface 190b, and the side surface of the fourth blade portion 191 located on the front side in the rotation direction is defined as a fourth front surface 191b. and Front surfaces 188b to 191b of blades 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of rotating body 183. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B1 caught in one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e (FIG. 5(b)) of the rotating body 183 comes into contact with the discharge right side surface 181g and reaches the discharge timing, the game ball B1 is the game ball. In the recessed portions 183b to 183e where B1 exists, the front surfaces 188b to 191b on the rear side in the rotational direction are in contact with the ejection right side surface 181g.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d have the same shape and size. For this reason, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the second recessed portion 183c and transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180, and the game ball B1 taken into the third recessed portion 183d and transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 is the same as the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b and transported to the lower portion of the adjustment mechanism 180. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the fourth recessed portion 183e has the same shape as the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d, and is slightly smaller than the three recessed portions 183b to 183d. have a size. Therefore, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 that has been taken into the fourth recessed portion 183e and transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 is taken into the first recessed portion 183b to the third recessed portion 183d and is transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180. It may be different from the discharge mode of the conveyed game ball B1. When the discharge mode of the game ball B1 discharged from all the recessed portions 183b to 183e is the same, the movement of the game ball B1 after discharge becomes monotonous. On the other hand, by varying the ejection mode of the game ball B1 ejected from the fourth recess 183e, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the movement of the game ball B1 after ejection.

First, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into any one of the first recessed portion 183b to the third recessed portion 183d and transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 will be described by taking the case of the first recessed portion 183b as an example.

8A and 8B are front views of the game board 24 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 180 and its vicinity. FIG. 8(a) shows the state immediately before the ejection timing of the game ball B1 taken into the first recess 183b, and FIG. 8(b) shows the ejection timing of the game ball B1. Illustrate the state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the contact state between the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b and the right upright wall 181d is canceled just before the discharge timing. As a result, the game ball B1, which has lost its support, is put in a state in which it can drop toward the lower right side. However, since the rotating body 183 rotates at an angular velocity of 90° per second, the game ball B1 is pushed in the rotating direction (leftward in FIG. 8) by the first blade portion 188 and is rotated in the rotating direction (leftward in FIG. 8). continue to move to

As shown in FIG. 8(b), at the discharge timing, the game ball B1 is in contact with the discharge right side surface 181g and the first front surface 188b. The interval between the two surfaces 181g and 188b sandwiching the game ball B1 is gradually widened from the upper side to the lower side.

As the rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, in the area sandwiched between the two surfaces 181g and 188b, the area having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 gradually disappears from above. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the ejection right side surface 181g and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b both have a component that pushes the game ball B1 downward. . Therefore, the game ball B1 that has been taken into the first recessed portion 183b is pushed downward as the rotating body 183 rotates. Then, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the game ball B1 is ejected downward from the first recessed portion 183b and enters the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

At the ejection timing shown in FIG. 8(b), the ejection right side surface 181g and the first front surface 188b are directed downward to the game ball B1 which is about to drop downward due to its own weight. apply a force to make it fall. At this time, the leftward movement of the game ball B1 is restricted by the ejection right side surface 181g. Therefore, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is limited to one direction, and the probability of winning the first through gate 35 increases.

As already explained, in the outer edge of the rotating body 183, the width of the recesses 183b to 183e is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, immediately before the ejection timing, the position of the game ball B1 in the recesses 183b to 183e is not the same each time. The ejection direction of the game ball B1 differs depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the recesses 183b to 183e immediately before the ejection timing.

At the design stage, most of the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b, the game ball B1 taken into the second recessed portion 183c, and the game ball B1 taken into the third recessed portion 183d are the first through holes. The position of the ejecting projecting portion 181e and the inclination of the ejecting right side surface 181g are adjusted so as to enter the gate 35. As shown in FIG. However, as already explained, the distance between the discharge position in the adjusting mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the first recessed portion 183b is caught on the first front surface 188b and pushed to the left, the game ball B1 discharged from the second recessed portion 183c hits the second front surface 189b. When caught and pushed to the left, and when the game ball B1 ejected from the third recessed portion 183d is caught on the third front surface 190b and pushed to the left, the ejected game ball B1 is the first through It may deviate to the left of gate 35 .

Here, the ejection mode of the game ball B1 that has been taken into the fourth recessed portion 183e and transported to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 will be described. FIG. 9 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged adjustment mechanism 180 for explaining the case where the game ball B1 ejected from the fourth recess 183e is disengaged from the first through gate 35. FIG.

As already explained, the fourth recessed portion 183e is slightly smaller than the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the game ball B1 ejected from the fourth recessed portion 183e is likely to be caught by the fourth front surface 191b and pushed to the left, and is likely to come off the first through gate 35 to the left. .

In the design stage, the winning probability of the game ball B1 ejected from the fourth recessed portion 183e to the first through gate 35 is increased to the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 ejected from the other three recessed portions 183b to 183d. The position of the ejecting protrusion 181e and the inclination of the ejecting right side surface 181g are adjusted so as to be lower than the winning probability of .

A part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 is configured to be detached from the first through gate 35, thereby avoiding the player's interest from concentrating only on taking in the game ball B1 in the adjusting mechanism 180, thereby Players are also interested in the discharge of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180.

As already explained, the discharge projection 181e is positioned below the center of the rotating body 183 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the center of the game ball B1, which is in contact with the ejecting protrusion 181e at the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180, is positioned to the right of the center of the rotating body 183. positioned. The game ball B1 captured by the rotating body 183 at the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 comes into contact with the ejecting projecting portion 181e at an earlier timing than when the rotating body 183 rotates around the center of the rotating body 183 by 180° and is ejected.

The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 rotates 180° or more around the center of the rotating body 183 and is ejected before it starts to rise, so that the game ball at the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is discharged. A rise in B1 can be prevented. In addition, by setting a short time from when the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 to when it is ejected, the time required for the sequence of taking in, transporting, and ejecting the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180 is shortened. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest will shift to something else during the series of flows.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, when the game ball B1 is in contact with both the ejecting protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183, the left side of the game ball B1 is in contact. The area sandwiched between the discharge right side 181g and the front side 188b to 191b with which the right side of the game ball B1 is in contact has a shape that gradually widens from top to bottom. Then, as the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise, the width of the area sandwiched between the ejection right side surface 181g and the front side surfaces 188b to 191b becomes narrower as a whole. Therefore, in the area sandwiched between the ejection right side surface 181g and the front side surfaces 188b to 191b, the portion having a width in which the game ball B1 can exist is limited to the lower portion.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the ejection right side surface 181g is inclined downward and leftward. Therefore, when a leftward force is applied from the rotating rotating body 183 to the game ball B1 in contact with the ejection right side surface 181g, the game ball B1 moves along the inclination of the ejection right side surface 181g. to move left and move down. In the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, the game ball B1, which is in contact with both the ejecting protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183, is pushed downward and ejected as the rotating body 183 rotates. Since the discharge right side surface 181g is inclined downward and leftward, the game ball B1 is prevented from rising and staying without being discharged at the lower portion of the adjustment mechanism 180.

Next, a configuration for releasing the game ball B1 that is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 while trying to enter the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, behind the game board 24, an escape passage 172 is provided as a passage for escaping the game ball B1 that has not been taken in by the intake port 185. As shown in FIG. A passage entrance 171 that is the entrance of the escape passage 172 is provided on the front surface of the game board 24 . Passageway inlet 171 is located behind inlet 185 . By letting the game ball B1 not taken in at the intake port 185 escape to the passage entrance 171, the game ball B1 not taken in can be prevented from staying around the intake port 185.例文帳に追加

First, the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state and has not been taken into the intake port 185 will be described.

FIG. 10(a) is a lateral cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when the plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24 is cut just above the inlet 185, and FIG. 10(b) is the game board. 24 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first blade portion 188 when cut along a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the blade 24. FIG. 10(a) and 10(b), the rotating body 183 is in a rotating state in which the first blade portion 188 is positioned upward.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the game ball B1 flows down into the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state, the game ball B1 is moved to any of the rotating bodies 183 located below the intake port 185. It comes into contact with the peripheral surfaces 188a-191a (FIG. 5(b)) of the blades 188-191.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of blades 188 to 191 of rotor 183 are inclined rearward toward the axial center. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the first blade portion 188 faces upward, the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is inclined downward toward the rear. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is guided backward.

In the take-in prohibition state in which the second blade portion 189 faces upward, the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189 is inclined downward toward the rear, and the third blade portion 190 is directed upward. In the take-in prohibition state facing, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190 is inclined downward toward the rear. In addition, in the take-in prohibited state in which the fourth blade portion 191 faces upward, the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191 is inclined downward toward the rear.

Although not shown, it comes into contact with any one of the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190, and the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191, which are facing upward in the take-in prohibited state. The game ball B1 is guided backward in the same manner as the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 shown in FIG. 10(a).

As shown in FIG. 4 , the passage entrance 171 is an opening provided on the front surface of the game board 24 and is positioned behind the inlet 185 . The passage entrance 171 is formed from the left end of the inlet 185 to the right end of the inlet 185 on the front surface of the game board 24 .

The upper end of the passage entrance 171 is located higher than the upper end of the game ball B1 that contacts the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191 in a state in which one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 faces upward. It is set high by approximately half the game ball B1. For this reason, the game ball B1 that flows down from above the game area PA, collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 that are inclined downward toward the rear, and bounces back diagonally to the passage entrance 171. You can enter the ball.

On the other hand, the upper area of the passage entrance 171 is taken into the intake port 185 so that the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA does not enter the passage entrance 171 before reaching the intake port 185. It is set to the minimum area that allows the missing game ball B1 to stagnate and prevent it from stagnation.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lower end of the left side of the passage inlet 171 is below the upper end of the rear surface of one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 when one of the blades 188 to 191 is facing upward. located in In addition, the lower end on the right side of the passage entrance 171 is located below the lower end on the left side. Details of the lower end on the right side of the passage entrance 171 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, at the upper part of the base body 181a in the housing part 181, one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 is guided to the passage entrance 171 by the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a (FIG. 5(a)). A recessed portion 181f for passage is formed so as not to interfere with the movement of the game ball B1 to be played.

The passage recess 181f is formed from the left end to the right end of the passage entrance 171 . On the left side of the passage recess 181f, the upper end of the base body 181a is lower than the upper end of the rear surface of the blades 188 to 191 when any one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 faces upward. formed to be located.

The upper end of the base body 181a is located at the same position as the lower end of the passage inlet 171 or above the lower end of the passage inlet 171 on the left side of the passage recess 181f. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the game ball B1, which is about to enter the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state and contacts the blades 188 to 191, has a peripheral surface 188a of the blades 188 to 191. 191a, the ball enters the passage entrance 171 without being obstructed by the base body 181a of the accommodating portion 181.

As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is formed in the front surface of the game board 24 as a concave portion that is concave toward the rear. The escape passage 172 is formed as a concave portion having a depth dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction and a width dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the lateral direction. there is For this reason, the escape passage 172 has a passage cross-section that can pass through when the game balls B1 form one row.

The upstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed downward to the left from the passage entrance 171, and the downstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed vertically downward. The escape passage 172 guides the game ball B1 entered from the passage entrance 171 to the lower left of the first through gate 35. - 特許庁

On the front surface of the game board 24, a step is provided on the edge of the recess formed as the escape passage 172. - 特許庁The escape passage 172 is covered from the front by a transparent acrylic plate 172a molded in the same shape as the portion of the housing portion 181 that does not overlap the base body 181a in the outer shape of the escape passage 172 when viewed from the front. The acrylic plate 172a is fixed to a step formed at the edge of the escape passage 172 with an adhesive.

The step formed at the edge of the escape passage 172 has the same depth in the front-rear direction as the thickness of the acrylic plate 172a. ing. The escape passage 172 is closed by the acrylic plate 172a and the base body 181a of the accommodation portion 181, and the place where the game ball B1 can enter and exit is limited to the passage entrance 171 and the passage exit 173.

Since the acrylic plate 172a fixed in front of the escape passage 172 and the adjustment mechanism 180 are transparent, the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 can be visually recognized from the outside. When the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 cannot be grasped from the outside, the player cannot follow the movement process of the game ball B1 after the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance 171, and the game ball cannot be followed. The flow of B1 is interrupted on the way. On the other hand, by making the game balls B1 passing through the escape passage 172 visible from the outside, the flow of the game balls B1 that can be grasped by the player can be kept continuous.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the game board 24, a passage exit 173, which is the exit of the escape passage 172, is provided at the lower left of the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The passage exit 173 is formed as an opening directed forward on the front surface of the game board 24 . The passage exit 173 has a shape and size capable of ejecting the game balls B1 guided by the escape passage 172 forward one by one.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the upper vicinity of the passage exit 173, there is an exit for preventing the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173 from colliding with the game ball B1 flowing forward from the front surface of the game board 24. A roof 174 is provided. The exit roof 174 is provided as a projecting portion projecting from the front surface of the game board 24 toward the window panel 52 (FIG. 1), and extends from the front surface of the game board 24 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. ing. Since the upper surface of the exit roof 174 is inclined downward to the right, the game ball B1 flowing down from above and contacting the exit roof 174 does not collide with the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173. It is guided to the right in a manner.

The game ball B1 passed through the escape passage 172 and ejected from the passage outlet 173 to the front side of the game board 24 flows down the game area PA. As shown in FIG. 3, the passage outlet 173 is located upstream of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 . Therefore, the game ball B1 ejected from the passage outlet 173 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, It is possible to win prizes.

As already explained, it is possible for the game ball B1 that has entered the first through gate 35 to flow down the game area PA and enter either the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . The game ball B1 guided to the first through gate 35 by the adjusting mechanism 180 and the game ball B1 guided to the escape passage 172 by the adjusting mechanism 180 and discharged from the passage exit 173 are both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port. It can flow down to the area where 34 is provided. Therefore, since the adjusting mechanism 180 is provided, the number of game balls B1 reaching the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided does not decrease.

Returning to the description of the intake of the game ball B1 in the intake port 185, as shown in FIG. When the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 at the timing when the diameter of the game ball B1 transitions from a state wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state narrower, the game ball B1 moves to the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the right standing wall 181d. You may get caught. In the following description, an intermediate state is defined as a transition state from a capture-enabled state to a capture-disabled state. In addition, the end face which defines the right end of the intake port 185 and which is located above the right standing wall 181d sandwiching the game ball B1 together with the blades 188 to 191 in the intermediate state is defined as the standing wall side end face 182. .

Here, the configuration for releasing the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the upright wall side end face 182 in the intake port 185 in the intermediate state to the escape passage 172 will be described. First, the inclination of the front surfaces 188b to 191b, which are side surfaces of the blades 188 to 191 and which are located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotor 183, will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b).

As shown in FIG. 5B, front surfaces 188b to 191b of blades 188 to 191 of rotating body 183 are inclined rearward in the direction of rotation. Therefore, when the blades 188 to 191 are directed upward, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blades 188 to 191 are inclined leftward toward the rear.

The front surfaces 188b to 191b of the upper blades 188 to 191 are inclined leftward toward the rear regardless of the rotating state of the rotating body 183. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the second front surface 189b of the second blade portion 189 and the upright wall side end surface 182, the third front surface 190b of the third blade portion 190 and the upright wall. The game ball B1 sandwiched between the wall-side end surfaces 182 and the game ball B1 sandwiched between the fourth front surface 191b of the fourth blade portion 191 and the upright wall-side end surface 182 are the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188 and the It moves in the same direction as the game ball B1 sandwiched between the upright wall side end face 182. - 特許庁Below, the movement of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the upright wall side end surface 182 will be described as an example of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the inlet 185 in the intermediate state.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188 facing upward is inclined leftward toward the rear. FIG. 10(c) is a transverse cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when the plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24 is cut just above the inlet 185. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10(c), the upright wall side end surface 182 is inclined rearward and rightward. Therefore, when the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 in the intermediate state and is sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the upright wall side end surface 182, the two surfaces 182, 188b sandwiching the game ball B1, The rear side (game board 24 side) is wider than the front side (window panel 52 side).

When the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise while the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the two surfaces 182 and 188b, the distance between the two surfaces 182 and 188b gradually decreases from the front side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the upright wall side end surface 182 are both components that move the game ball B1 backward. have. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the game ball B1 sandwiched between the two surfaces 182 and 188b is moved to the passage provided behind the inlet 185 by the rotation of the rotating body 183. It is pushed out towards the inlet 171 . Then, the pushed game ball B1 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171 and is guided to the passage exit 173. - 特許庁

As already explained with reference to FIG. 5B, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blades 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of the rotating body 183. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the game ball B1 comes into contact with both of the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the right standing wall 181d (FIG. 10(c)) at the inlet 185, the game ball Front surfaces 188b-191b in contact with B1 are angled downward and leftward. Therefore, the force applied from the front surfaces 188b to 191b to the game ball B1 by rotating the rotating body 183 clockwise includes a downward component. Thereby, when the game ball B1 is pushed toward the passage entrance 171, the game ball B1 is suppressed from moving upward.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), the inclination of the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the wall-side end surface 182 and the rotation of the rotating body 183 are used to push out the pinched game ball B1 to the passage entrance 171. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is caught while avoiding the game ball B1 from staying or rising.

As shown in FIG. 4, the right side of the passage entrance 171 and the right side of the passage recess portion 181f allow the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state to pass through the passage entrance. 171 is formed so that the ball can be entered.

The game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d is below the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of any of the blades 188 to 191 in the take-in prohibited state. Located in Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower end of the right side of the passage inlet 171 is positioned lower than the lower end of the left side of the passage inlet 171, and the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is , is located below the upper end of the base body 181a on the left side of the passage recess 181f.

The upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is located below the lower end of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. The right lower end of the passage inlet 171 is formed at the same position as the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f or below the upper end of the base body 181a.

However, the game ball B1 captured in one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 in the capture permission state passes through the passage recess 181f formed behind and enters the passage entrance 171. In order to prevent this, the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the passage recess 181f is positioned slightly below the lower end of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blades 188 to 191 and the right upright wall 181d in the intermediate state. is set.

In addition, as already explained, since the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are inclined forward toward the axial center, the game balls B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e are located in the game area PA. kept in front. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 captured in each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e passes through the recessed passage portion 181f (especially the right side of the recessed passage portion 181f) and enters the passage entrance 171. has been reduced.

In the state in which one game ball B1 has already been taken into the concave portions 183b to 183e located above the intake port 185 (FIG. 7(a)), another game ball B1 enters the intake port. 185 is reached. In this case, the recesses 183b to 183e are already held on the window panel 52 side. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the center of the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later is located behind the center of the game ball B1 that has already been taken into the recesses 183b to 183e. In this case, the game ball B1 arriving at the intake port 185 later comes into contact with the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e, rebounds backward, and enters the passage entrance 171.

In addition, when the center of the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later is shifted to the left or right from the center of the game ball B1 that is taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the intake port 185 is later The game ball B1 that has reached , contacts the game ball B1 captured in the recesses 183b to 183e and rebounds to either the left or right, and the game area PA on the side of the adjustment mechanism 180 without being captured by the adjustment mechanism 180. It will flow downstream. Thus, when a plurality of game balls B1 reach the intake port 185 in the one-time intake permitted state at the intake port 185, one game ball B1 is placed in one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e. , and the rest of the game balls B1 can flow downstream of the game area PA without remaining near the intake port 185.例文帳に追加

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of the game ball B1 that has flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball B1 entering any one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, the second operating hole 34 and the out hole 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowed into the game area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a. It will be discharged from the game area PA by entering the crab. A game ball B1 entering any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game ball B1 flowing into the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 is guided to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharged discharge passage portions 42 to 48, and discharged ball collecting portion (not shown). collected at Then, the game balls B1 collected by the discharged ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting the game ball B1 are provided in the discharge passage portions 42 to 48, respectively. These discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general prize winning openings 31 are provided as already explained, there are discharge passage portions 42 to 44 corresponding to each of these four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general prize winning port 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning hole detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball B1 entering the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage part 42, and enters the general winning hole 31 on the right side thereof. The game ball B1 is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. As shown in FIG. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is formed so as to join the two general prize winning openings 31 on the right side at a midway position. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one exit side area by joining the entrance side areas in the middle. are doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44 . A game ball B1 entering one of the two right-side general winning holes 31 is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44. - 特許庁

A fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball B1 entering the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball B1 entering the first operation opening 33 is detected by the fifth discharge passage portion 46. is detected by the first operating opening detection sensor 46a on the way of passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operating hole detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball B1 entering the second operating hole 34 is detected by the sixth discharge passage portion 47. is detected by the second operating opening detection sensor 47a on the way of passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is present corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so as to have a detection range in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball B1 entering the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

It should be noted that the game ball B1 that has been detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A first gate detection sensor 49 a is provided for the first through gate 35 and a second gate detection sensor 50 a is provided for the second through gate 39 . Therefore, the game ball B1 passing through the first through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the game ball B1 passing through the second through gate 39 is detected by the second gate detection sensor 49a. It is detected by the gate detection sensor 50a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 50a, but any sensor can be used as long as the game ball B1 can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a-50a are electrically connected to a main controller 60 which will be described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-50a are output to the main controller 60. FIG. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 50a output LOW level signals when the game ball B1 is not detected, and output HI level signals when the game ball B1 is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 2 , a display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 bulging forward and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls B1 paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing the surplus game balls B1 in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. It should be noted that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the means for traces, there is a configuration of a connecting portion that inseparably connects a plurality of case bodies that constitute the board box 60a and that requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon separation, and an adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is affixed so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 60a is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which the game balls B1 supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls B1 stored in the tank 75. there is The game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 78 for controlling the launching of the game ball B1 is provided. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the elements described above, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used exclusively for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data. As shown in FIG. 12, the main-side ROM 64 stores a low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 and a high-frequency winning judgment value table T1 used in a general electric open lottery for determining whether or not to open and close the general electric accessory 34a. A judgment value table T2 is stored. In the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determination value table T2, determination values to be winning targets in the general electric power open lottery are recorded. The details of the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determination value table T2 will be described later.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to retain data, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64 .

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA based on information supplied from the main side CPU 63 . Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball B1 to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. , the frequency of ball entry into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is grasped according to the grasped ball entering history.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 . A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67 , and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67 .

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to various sensors such as various entering ball detection sensors 42a to 50a. As already explained, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, a second working opening detection sensor 47a, an outlet opening detection sensor 48a, a first gate detection sensor 49a, and a second gate detection sensor 50a. Based on the detection results of these ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 50a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball is entering each ball-entering section. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power failure monitor board 67, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 81. For example, the payout control device 77 issues a prize ball command based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the prize ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball B1 among the ball entry portions. output. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the open/close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34, The figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the adjustment driving section 184 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, but all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the driving control of the special electric driving unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the main side CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 37a is performed in main side CPU63 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to set the general electric accessory 34a to the open state is specified, the main side CPU 63 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a. Also, when the winning prize to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure reservation display unit 37b in the main side CPU63 is executed, and when winning to the through gates 35 and 39 occurs, or when variable display is started in the normal pattern display unit 38a, the display control of the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b is executed in the main side CPU 63 .

The blackout monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power/launch control device 78 and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 .

The power/emission control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the adjustment drive unit 184 etc. is generated, and the generated operating power supply. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Electric power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60 . The power/shooting control device 78 is responsible for controlling the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and controls the display control device 82. is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery Draws by Main Side CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the special figure display section 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the display setting of the normal figure display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning generation, the big winning type counter C2 used when judging the big winning type, and the pattern display device 41 fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 are determined. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the general electric role opening counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electric role 34a of the second operation port 34 is to be in the general electric open state, and the initial value setting of the general electric role opening counter C4 and an initial value counter for opening C5 to be used. The above counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4 and C5 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The pending storage area 65a comprises a pending area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In addition, a combination of each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of reservation area RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. there is

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and the start of one game round. At that time, the success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

In addition, information corresponding to the general electric utility item open counter C4 is stored in the general electric reservation storage area 65c provided in the main side RAM 65 when the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 is won. be done.

The general electricity holding storage area 65c includes a general electricity holding area HA and a general electricity execution area HB. The electric power reserve area HA includes a first electric power reserve area HA1, a second electric power reserve area HA2, a third electric power reserve area HA3, and a fourth electric power reserve area HA4. In accordance with the winning history to the second through gate 39, the numerical information of the general electric utility item open counter C4 is stored as the general electric reservation information in one of the general electric reservation areas HA1 to HA4.

In this case, in the first general electricity reservation area HA1 to the fourth general electricity reservation area HA4, when winning to the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 occurs multiple times in succession, the first general electricity Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the holding area HA1→the second ordinary power holding area HA2→the third ordinary power holding area HA3→the fourth ordinary power holding area HA4. By providing the four electric power holding areas HA1 to HA4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 are reserved and stored. It's becoming

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The general electric execution area HB is an area in which the general electric reservation information for which the general electric open lottery is performed is stored when the variable display is started in the general electric map display section 38a (FIG. 3). Specifically, when the variable display of the general/universal diagram display portion 38a is started, the general/universal electric reservation information stored in the first general/universal electric reservation area HA1 is shifted to the general/universal electric execution area HB.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electrical role item release counter C4 and the initial value counter for release C5 will be described. The general electric utility item opening counter C4 and the opening initial value counter C5 are loop counters that are sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. When the general electrical role release counter C4 makes one round, the value of the opening initial value counter C5 at that time is read as the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4.

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10, the general electric open lottery is executed when the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39 as a trigger. Numerical information updated by the general electrical accessory release counter C4 is used for the general electrical open lottery. Specifically, when the game ball B1 wins the through gates 35 and 39, the numerical information updated by the general electrical role item opening counter C4 is obtained as the random number for opening. In the following, the numerical information that is updated by the general electric utility item opening counter C4, is acquired when the through gates 35 and 39 are won, and is used for the general electric open lottery is referred to as the random number for opening. In the electric power open lottery, it is determined whether or not the random number for opening the lottery is the winning determination value for the electric power open winning, and if the determination is affirmative, the electric power open winning is made. , the result is an outlier when a negative determination is made.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the general electric role item 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which the game ball B1 continues to be launched in the same manner in the game area PA, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 A high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high and low.

First, the general electric open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode will be described. The main-side ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 in which winning judgment values for general electric open winning in the general electric open lottery executed in the low-frequent support mode are recorded. ing. FIG. 14(a) is a winning determination value table T1 for low frequency.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the winning judgment value of the common electric open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode is set to (250×n−5) to (250×n). Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 262. The probability of winning the general electric open lottery in the low frequency support mode is approximately 1/42.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the winning determination values to be selected for the general electric open winning are serial numbers in units of six. In addition, the update period of the random number for opening in the general electric role item opening counter C4 is 4 msec. Therefore, in the general electric accessory opening counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for opening becomes the winning determination value of the general electric open winning target in the general electric open lottery in the low frequency support mode continues over 24 msec.

Assuming that the period of 24 msec during which the winning determination value for the general electric open winning continues is the winning target period, as shown in FIG. Here, if the timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4) wins the first through gate 35 is the winning timing, as described above, the period at which the winning timing occurs is low. It is 1 sec, which is the same period as the winning target period in the frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period in which the winning timing overlaps with the winning target period is the continuous winning period in which the general electric open winning occurs continuously. The winning continuation period continues until the timing of occurrence of the winning target period is shifted due to the update of the initial value of the universal electronic accessory release counter C4. When the timing of occurrence of the winning target period is shifted, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the losing result continues in the general electric open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode until the winning target period and the winning timing overlap again.

As described above, the game ball B1 is ejected from the adjusting mechanism 180 and the prize-winning timing to the first through gate 35 can occur at a cycle of 1 sec. For this reason, in the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period in the low frequency support mode, the normal pattern fluctuation time during which the normal pattern display section 38a (FIG. 3) fluctuates is set to 0.5 sec, which is shorter than 1 sec. Therefore, even if the discharge of the game ball B1 from the adjusting mechanism 180 continues at a cycle of 1 sec, when the winning occurs, the change of the general pattern display section 38a corresponding to the previous winning is finished. Thereby, it is possible to prevent normalization of the state in which the general pattern reservation information exceeds the upper limit number (four pieces).

Next, the general electric open lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode will be described. The main-side ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a high-frequency winning judgment value table T2 in which winning judgment values for general electric open winning in the general electric open lottery executed in the high-frequent support mode are recorded. ing. FIG. 14(b) is a high-frequency winning determination value table T2.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the win determination value of the common electric open lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode is set to (m to m+2). Here, the variable m is a natural number from 1 to 65,501. The probability of winning the general electric open lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode is approximately 3/5. In addition, the general pattern fluctuation time in the high-frequency support mode is set to 0.5 sec in order to expedite the digestion of the general pattern reservation information.

The opening mode of the general electrical accessory 34a when the general electrical open winning is achieved in the low frequency support mode is the same as the opening mode of the general electrical accessory 34a when the general electrical open winning is achieved in the high frequency support mode. . Specifically, with one general electric open winning as a trigger, the general electric accessory 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec, and a series of opening and closing operations are repeated five times. Also, in the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next general electric open lottery after one general electric open lottery is performed (i.e., one time in the general diagram display unit 38a display duration) is set to the same length as the reserved time in the high-frequency support mode.

In the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, the general electric open winning basically does not occur in the general electric open lottery that is triggered by the winning of the first through gate 35 . On the other hand, even during the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, a winning to the second through gate 39 without the adjustment mechanism 180 above can occur. In this case, in the general electric open lottery that is triggered by winning the second through gate 39, the general electric open winning is achieved with a low probability (approximately 1/42). In the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode, both the winning of the game ball B1 into the first operating port 33 and the winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. In the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, the probability that the general electric open winning occurs and the opening and closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is executed is low. is higher than the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 34.

In the case of the high frequency support mode, in the public power open lottery that is triggered by winning the through gates 35 and 39, the public power open winning lottery has a high probability (approximately 3/5). Here, the interval at which the game ball B1 is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 sec at the shortest. On the other hand, the interval at which the game ball B1 is released from the adjusting mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec at the shortest. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the second through gate 39 than to aim at the first through gate 35 .

In the high-frequency support mode, both the winning of the game ball B1 into the first operating port 33 and the winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. In the high-frequency support mode, the frequency of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a due to the occurrence of general electric open winning is high, so the possibility of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than that of the second operation opening It is more likely that a prize for 34 will occur. Since a predetermined number of game balls B1 are put out when a prize is won in the second operation port 34, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls in the high-frequency support mode.

If it is the winning continuation period in the low-frequency support mode, in the general electric open lottery that is triggered by the winning of the first through gate 35, the general electric open winning will occur continuously with a high probability. For this reason, the frequency of opening and closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is increased, and in the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the winning of the game ball B1 to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 Winning and both can happen.

In the case of the winning continuation period in the low frequency support mode, the shortest interval at which the general electric open winning occurs continuously is 1 sec, and it is better to aim at the first through gate 35 and shoot the game ball B1. There is a higher possibility of winning the electric power open winning than shooting the game ball B1 aiming at the through gate 39. - 特許庁Therefore, aiming at the first through gate 35 is more advantageous to the player than aiming at the second through gate 39 during the winning continuation period in the low-frequency support mode.

In the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the game ball B1 is shot aiming at the first through gate 35, and the possibility of winning the general electrical open lottery by performing the general electrical open lottery is the second in the high frequency support mode. It is higher than the possibility that the game ball B1 is shot aiming at the 2-thru gate 39, the general electric open lottery is performed, and the general electric open lottery is won. In addition, as already explained, the release mode of the general electric role 34a when the general electric open winning is won in the low frequency support mode is is the same as the open mode of For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, when the continuous winning period comes, the winning to the second operation port 34 is temporarily more likely to occur than in the high-frequency support mode.

The winning continuation period is set in the low frequency support mode in which the player's expectation for winning the second operation port 34 is low, and the timing of transition from the non-winning continuation period to the winning continuation period in the low frequency support mode is the game. It is a configuration that does not notify the person. Therefore, in the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, the player aims at the first through gate 35 and shoots the game ball B1 while expecting to shift to the continuous winning period.

In the case of a pachinko machine that does not generate a consecutive winning period, the possibility of winning a general electric open win in the low frequency support mode is lower than the possibility of winning a general electric open win in the high frequency support mode. For this reason, the degree of expectation of the player for the general electric open winning is lower in the case of the low frequency support mode than in the case of the high frequency support mode.

On the other hand, as in the pachinko machine 10, in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, by changing the initial value of the general electric role release counter C4, it is possible to shift to the winning continuous period. As a result, the player can have an expectation that the low-frequency support mode may shift to the winning continuation period in which the probability of winning the electric power open winning is higher than in the high-frequency support mode. By not notifying the player of the transition timing from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period, the player can always have an expectation that the transition to the continuous winning period may occur. can.

For this reason, while maintaining a state in which the possibility of being elected to the public power open winning in the low frequency support mode combining the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period is lower than the possibility of being elected to the public power open win in the high frequency support mode , it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of the player for the electric power open winning in the low frequency support mode.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to be in the mains open state per unit time is not limited to the above configuration. Here, the low-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support mode that combines the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period. For example, after one general electric open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next electric open lottery In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time are prepared, high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter secured time is more likely to be selected than low-frequency support mode, or the average secured time is shorter. may In addition, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, shortening the secured time after one electric power open lottery is held and the next electric power open lottery is held, such secured time The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or an arbitrary combination of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

Here, the winning continuation period and the non-winning continuation period that occur during the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 15(a) to (c) and FIGS. First, in a comparative pachinko machine in which no consecutive winning period or continuous non-winning period occurs, the timing at which the electric power open winning will be explained based on the time charts of FIGS. 15(a) to (c). FIG. 15(a) shows the timing at which a winning to the through gates 35 and 39 can occur in the pachinko machine for comparison, and FIG. The information (random number for opening) indicates a winning target period in which the winning determination value is the object of the general electric open winning, and FIG.

Here, the pachinko machine for comparison refers to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the game board 24 is not provided with the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4), and which is updated by the general electric accessory release counter C4. This pachinko machine has a configuration in which the initial value of the random number is not updated. At the timings t1 to t6 shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the pachinko machine for comparison is in the low frequency support mode. The timing shown in FIG. 15(a) is just an example because the timing at which the through gates 35 and 39 win prizes in the pachinko machine for comparison is random.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39 at the timing of t1. However, as shown in FIG. 15(b), the timing t1 is outside the winning target period. The winning target period starts at the timing t2 after the timing t1. For this reason, the random number for opening is acquired with the winning of a prize occurring at the timing of t1 as a trigger, and even if the general electric power opening lottery is performed using the random number for opening, the result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when the next winning period starts at the timing t3 after the timing t2, the winning period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 15(a), when the winning of the game ball B1 to the through gates 35 and 39 occurs at the timing of t4 within the winning target period, the winning of the game ball B1 at the timing of t4 is used as an opportunity to open the door. A random number is obtained. Then, as shown in FIG. 15(c), in the general electric open lottery performed using the open random number acquired at the timing of t4, the general electric open lottery is won.

As shown in FIG. 15B, at timing t5 one second after timing t3, the next winning target period that continues for 24 msec starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 15(a), at the timing t6 after the end of the target winning period, the game ball B1 enters the through gates 35 and 39, and the random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 15(c), the electric power opening lottery performed using the opening random number acquired at the timing of t6 results in a loss.

As described above, in the comparative pachinko machine having a configuration in which the game board 24 is not provided with the adjustment mechanism 180 and the initial value of the random number for opening is not updated, the winning of the game ball B1 to the through gates 35 and 39 is prevented. The timing of occurrence is random, and only when the timing of the winning coincides with the winning target period that starts at a 1-sec cycle, the electric power open winning is possible. For this reason, the comparative pachinko machine does not generate a winning continuation period and a non-winning continuation period.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the general electric open winning occurs will be described based on the time charts of FIGS. 16(a) to (d). FIG. 16(a) shows the timing at which the game ball B1 can enter the first through gate 35, and FIG. 16(b) shows numerical information (random number for opening) updated in the general electrical role opening counter C4. indicates the winning target period, which is the winning judgment value for the general electric open winning, and FIG. , and FIG. 16(d) shows the timing at which the general electric open election may occur. At the timings t1 to t12 shown in FIGS. 16(a) to 16(d), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning target period starts at the timing t1, and the winning target period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the timing t2 at which the winning to the first through gate 35 occurs is the winning target period that starts at the timing t1 and the timing t3 that is one second after the timing t1. It is positioned between the next winning target period and the timing outside the winning target period. For this reason, even if a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t2, it will not be a general electric open winning.

As already explained, the interval at which the game ball B1 can be ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the timing t4 at which the winning to the first through gate 35 can occur next to the timing t2 is the timing 1 sec after the timing t2. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the timing t4 is outside the winning target period. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 16(d), even if a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t4, it will not be a general electric open winning.

The cycle in which winning to the first through gate 35 is possible and the cycle in which the winning target period occurs are the same cycle. Therefore, if the timing at which the first through gate 35 can win a prize does not coincide with the winning target period, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the losing result is continuous in the general electric open lottery.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), at the timing of t5, the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4 is updated. When the initial value of the general electronic role release counter C4 is updated, the winning timing to the first through gate 35 may be shifted and may overlap with the winning target period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning target period starts at timing t6, which is later than timing t5. Then, as shown in FIG. 16(a), a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs at timing t7 within the winning target period, and a random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(d), when the general electric open lottery is executed using the open random number obtained at the timing of t7, the general electric open lottery wins.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the winning target period starts again at timing t8, which is one second after timing t6. Also, as shown in FIG. 16(a), at timing t9, which is one second after timing t7, the winning of the first through gate 35 occurs and the random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(d), a general electric open winning occurs in the general electric open lottery performed using the random number for opening acquired at the timing of t9. In this way, once the winning timing to the first through gate 35 coincides with the winning target period, it becomes a winning continuous period in which the general electric open winning occurs continuously in the general electric open lottery.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16(c), at the timing of t10, the initial value of the universal electrical role release counter C4 is updated again. As a result, the winning timing to the first through gate 35 is shifted from the winning target period. As shown in FIG. 16(a), at timing t11, which is later than timing t10, the winning of the first through gate 35 occurs and a random number for opening is obtained. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the timing t11 is a timing outside the winning target period, and the next winning target period starts at a timing t12 after the timing t11. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16(d), if the general/commercial electric opener lottery is executed using the opener random number acquired at the timing of t11, the result is a loss. In this way, if the winning timing to the first through gate 35 is shifted from the winning target period due to the update of the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4, the non-winning results are consecutive in the general electric open lottery. Return to the continuous period.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the main RAM 65, a send-off flag is set to "1" at the start timing of the winning continuation period, thereby enabling execution of skipping the update of the initial value of the general electrical role item open counter C4. 65d, and a postponement completion flag 65e that is set to "1" when it is during the winning continuation period and the renewal of the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 has already been postponed during the winning continuation period. and is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the winning continuous period comes, the initial value update of the general electrical role release counter C4 is postponed once at the initial value update timing of the general electrical role release counter C4 which is reached first thereafter. It is configured. By frequently updating the initial value of the general electronic role release counter C4, the possibility of becoming a winning continuous period in the non-winning continuous period is increased, and when the winning continuous period comes, the general electrical role release counter C4 is reset. By skipping the update of the initial value, the continuous winning period is extended. As a result, the occurrence of consecutive winning periods can be made attractive to the player. By making the occurrence of the continuous winning period an event that the player expects, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserve storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the main ROM 64 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is twenty. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are (1) the aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first prize after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

As a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times.

Here, the round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls B1 win a special electric prize winning device 32 until either condition is satisfied It is a continuous game. In addition, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of the result of the big win triggered by the shift. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from opening to closing of the special electric prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode, in which the open duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. It is

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball B1 is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. controlled. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game, more specifically, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball B1. there is Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and one time in the short-time mode. When the opening is performed for the first time, it is expected that no prize will be won to the special electric prize winning device 32, or if there will be a prize, it will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric winning device 32, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, and is not limited to the above value, and is arbitrary is.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. And, as such a distribution destination, a low probability jackpot result, a low prize winning high probability jackpot result, and a maximum profit jackpot result are set.

A low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The result of the low winning high probability jackpot is that the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big win state winning, and the game shifts to a big win state accordingly.

The maximum profit jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big win state winning, and the game shifts to a big win state accordingly.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state is not the open/close execution mode, but the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as the game result, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the low winning high probability jackpot result is not set. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be less than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the maximum profit jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the low prize winning high probability jackpot result. , and "15 to 29" corresponds to the maximum winning jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying symbols in a variable manner, and in a game cycle that results in a predetermined big win, the final stop result is the award corresponding result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed for the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a ready-to-win effect. , the combination of the ready-to-win pattern is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform the ready-to-win effect.

In the advance notice display, after the pattern display is started on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the patterns are displayed in a variable manner in all the pattern rows, or in a part of the pattern rows and a plurality of patterns are displayed. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. It also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern row in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in a game cycle corresponding to a big hit result in which the same combination of symbols is not stop-displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 is executed when the reach display corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 81 . In this case, the sound emission control device 81 determines that the game round corresponding to one of the jackpot results is more likely to cause the notice display than the game round corresponding to the result of losing, and that the notice display with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. Lottery processing for advance notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main side CPU 63 determines the display continuation time in the special figure display unit 37a and the display continuation time of the design in the design display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main side CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and further whether or not the power failure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Determine (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Further, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output process for outputting various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). The details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 does not start the process for advancing the game until the relevant situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S112 to S115. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S112 to S115 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the opening initial value counter C5 is performed, and in step S114, variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is performed. do. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed and then an infinite loop is performed. Become. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, the read source counter Execute the overwriting process. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

After step S202, in step S203, an open counter update process is executed to update the general electric role item open counter C4 (FIG. 13). The details of the open counter update process will be described later. After that, in step S204, as in step S113, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) is executed. Execute fluctuation counter update processing.

The general electric role release counter C4 is a loop counter, and the open counter update process for updating the general electric role release counter C4 is periodically executed. For this reason, the initial value update timing of the universal electric role release counter C4 generated by one round of the universal electric role release counter C4 occurs periodically.

Here, when the initial value counter for opening C5 for updating the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is a loop counter and the update of the initial value counter for opening C5 is periodically executed, Numerical information acquired as an initial value from the opening initial value counter C5 at the timing of updating the initial value of the electrical object opening counter C4 is limited to part of the numerical information updated by the opening initial value counter C5. .

In this case, the timing of occurrence of winning continuation periods in the low-frequency support mode described above is not random. A situation in which the winning target period and the winning timing do not overlap, and a winning streak period does not occur; A situation can occur in which the player can easily guess the timing of occurrence of the continuous winning period.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 performs the random number initial value update process for updating the opening initial value counter C5 both in the regular timer interrupt process and in the irregular residual process of the main process. It is a configuration to run with. Therefore, the winning target period and the winning timing overlap at an appropriate frequency. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode in which the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period are combined, the possibility of the electric open winning occurring is lower than the possibility of the electric open winning occurring in the high-frequency support mode. , it is possible to generate a winning continuation period.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, after executing the variation counter update process in step S205, in step S206, the rotation control process for rotating the rotating body 183 once every 4 seconds is executed. In the rotation control process, it is determined whether or not it is time to rotate the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 communicating with the rotating body 183, and if it is time to rotate the output shaft 184a, adjustment is performed. A pulse signal is sent to the drive unit 184 to rotate the output shaft 184a. In this rotation control process, a pulse signal for rotating the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 by 0.72° is transmitted once every 8 msec. That is, in the timer interrupt processing executed at a cycle of 4 msec, the pulse signal is transmitted once every two times to drive the adjustment drive unit 184 .

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S207). In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred. In the following step S208, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S208, the processes after step S209 are executed.

In step S209, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S210). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S211). In the ball entry detection process, signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 , the second operating port 34, the first through gate 35, and the second through gate 39. The details of the ball-entering detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S212). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball B1 is executed (step S213). In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, one game ball B1 is shot at 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined shooting cycle. In the following step S214, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S210, disconnection of each ball detection sensor 42a to 50a is checked, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is checked. I do.

After that, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed (step S215). In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs in a situation where the number of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, The numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point is stored in the pending storage area 65a in chronological order as pending information.

Here, assuming that the period during which the opening and closing operation of the universal electrical accessory 34a is performed is the support execution period, if a prize to the second operation port 34 occurs during the support execution period, the prize counter during support A process of adding "1" is performed. Then, when the value of the win-win counter during support reaches the upper limit number of wins set during the support execution period, the support end flag is set to "1". Here, the winning counter during support is a counter that the main CPU 63 refers to in order to grasp the total number of winnings to the second operation opening 34 that occurred during the support execution period, and is provided in the main RAM 65. there is The winning prize counter during support is cleared to "0" at the start timing of the support execution period. In addition, the support end flag is referred to by the main CPU 63 in order to grasp that the number of wins to the second operation port 34 during the support execution period has reached the upper limit and that the end timing of the support execution period has come. It is a flag and is provided in the main RAM 65 .

In the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the reservation information is not during the game rotation and the opening and closing execution mode, and the reservation information is stored. And when it corresponds to the jackpot winning, a distribution determination process is executed to determine which jackpot result the reservation information corresponds to.

Here, in the success/failure determination process, when a jackpot is won, the high frequency flag is set to "1". The high frequency flag is a flag to which "1" is set when the support mode for winning a prize to the second operation port 34 is the high frequency support mode. The main CPU 63 refers to the high frequency flag to specify which of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode the winning support mode for the second operation opening 34 is. As already explained, when a jackpot result is obtained, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the jackpot result.

In the special figure special electric control process, in addition to the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process, if the pending information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, it is determined whether the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Along with executing the reach determination process, the process of selecting the duration of the game cycle is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variation command containing information on the duration corresponding to the result of each process, and a type command containing information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a Start variable display. Upon receiving the variation command and the type command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 to start the game play effect corresponding to the contents of these commands. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to start the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, by determining whether or not the continuation period of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the game round. judge. When it is the end timing, a process for ending the game round is executed in a state in which the display corresponding to the game result is performed. In this case, when the current game cycle corresponds to the occurrence of any one of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the special figure display part 37a, and the current game round is displayed. When the game round corresponds to the result of losing, the pattern corresponding to the result of losing is stopped and displayed in the special figure display part 37a. Also, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Upon receiving the final stop command, the sound emission control device 81 terminates the presentation for the current game round in the display emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 . Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command, the pattern display device 41 terminates the effect for the current game cycle.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of starting, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Moreover, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and when the round game is finished, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command that indicates that the round game is terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening/closing execution mode to the display control device 82 . The display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to execute the effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated, the success/failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is terminated correspond to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Execute the process to become the mode.

Specifically, when the type of jackpot result is a low-probability jackpot, the number-of-games counter is set to "100" as a criterion for ending the high-frequency support mode. The number-of-games counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to determine whether or not the number of games of the end reference number of times has been completed while the high-frequency support mode is set. Numerical information set in the number-of-games counter is updated so that "1" is subtracted based on the end of the number-of-games. Further, when the type of the jackpot result is a low prize winning/high probability jackpot result or when the jackpot result is a maximum advantage jackpot result, the indefinite flag is set to "1". The indefinite flag is a flag for continuing the high-frequency support mode until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery becomes a jackpot state win after the opening/closing execution mode ends and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly. In the high-frequency support mode in which the indefinite flag is set to "1", when the generated jackpot result is a low-probability jackpot, the indefinite flag is cleared to "0" and the number-of-games counter is set to "100". is set, and when the result of the generated jackpot is a low winning/high probability jackpot or a maximum advantage jackpot, the indefinite flag is set to "1" again.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process, the general figure general electric control process is performed (step S216). In the general electric power control process, when winning to the through gates 35 and 39 has occurred, the electric power open lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the opening and closing of the general electric role 34a , and the processing of executing the display of the universal diagram display unit 38a and the opening and closing of the universal electric accessory 34a in a manner according to the result of the general electric open lottery. The details of the normal/universal electric power control process will be described later.

In subsequent step S217, based on the processing results of step S215 and step S216 immediately before, while setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b , Set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information related to the normal map display unit 38a to the normal map reservation display unit 38b. Further, in step S217, based on the processing results of step S215 and step S216 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S218). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S219). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S220). Thereafter, a management output process is executed for outputting information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball B1 in the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S221). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, the open counter update process executed in step S203 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing open counter update processing executed by the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the current numerical value information in the general electric role item opening counter C4 is read, and in step S302, whether the current numerical value information read in step S301 is a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value. or not. Here, the current initial value is numerical value information that is newly stored each time the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4 is updated.

If the current numerical information is a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value (step S302: YES), it means that this time is the initial value update timing of the general electrical role release counter C4. In this case, it is determined whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1" in step S303. If the high frequency flag is not set to "1" in step S303, it means that the low frequency support mode is set. In this case, it is determined in step S304 whether or not the send-off completion flag 65e (FIG. 12) is set to "1".

As already explained, the main RAM 65 (FIG. 12) has a send-off flag 65d (FIG. 12) and a send-off completion flag 65e (FIG. 12). The send-off flag 65d is a flag that is set to "1" when the general electric open lottery performed in the low-frequency support mode is in the winning continuation period and the electric open winning occurs three times in succession.

In the low-frequency support mode, the general electric open winning can occur when the winning to the second through gate 39 occurs during the continuous non-winning period, and the winning to the first through gate 35 occurs during the continuous winning period. In some cases, there are cases in which a winning to the second through gate 39 occurs during the continuous winning period. Of these, the probability of being elected by the electric power open when the second through gate 39 is won is approximately 1/42 in both the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning three times in a row is low (approximately 1/74000), and 3 The electoral open elections for the second time in a row rarely occur. Also, even if it happens by chance, the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0" if the result is a loss in the next electric power open election.

On the other hand, during the winning continuation period, if the winning of the first through gate 35 triggers the general electric open lottery, the general electric open winning is won. Therefore, if the continuous winning period comes while the player is operating the game ball shooting device aiming at the first through gate 35, winning to the first through gate 35 will not be possible after the continuous winning period. "1" is set to the send-off flag 65d at the stage of three occurrences. In the winning continuation period, at the initial value update timing when the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", the update of the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4 is postponed.

In addition, the send-off completion flag 65e is set to "1" when the initial value update timing is reached while the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", and the initial value update of the general electric utility item open counter C4 is postponed. is a flag that Here, the send-off flag 65d is a flag to which "1" is set with one condition being the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the send-off flag 65d is never set to "1" in the high-frequency support mode. Since "1" is not set to the send-off flag 65d in the high frequency support mode, "1" is not set to the send-off completion flag 65e. The process of setting the send-off flag 65d to "1" will be described later.

If "1" is set in the send-off completion flag 65e in step S304 of the open counter update process (FIG. 19), the initial value update of the general electric role-playing product open counter C4 has already been postponed during the current winning continuation period. It means that the

If the send-off completion flag 65e is not set to "1" in step S304, it is determined whether or not the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" in step S305. If the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" (step S305: YES), it means that the current initial value update timing is the initial value update timing of the send-off target. In this case, the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0" in step S306, and the send-off completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S307.

After determining that it is not the initial value update timing in step S302, or after clearing the send-off completion flag 65e to "0" in step S307, in step S308, the current numerical information is the maximum value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4. ("65505") is determined.

If the current numerical information is not the maximum value in step S308, "1" is added to the current numerical information in step S309 to update the numerical information. If the current numerical information is the maximum value in step S308, the current numerical information is cleared to "0" in step S310 to update the numerical information.

When "1" is set in the send-off completion flag 65e in step S304, after the initial value update is postponed, the general electric utility item open counter C4 makes one round and the initial value update timing comes again. means that In this case, the send-off completion flag 65e is cleared to "0" in step S311.

After determining that the high-frequency support mode is set in step S303, after determining that the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1" in step S305, or clearing the send-off completion flag 65e to "0" in step S311. After that, it updates the initial value of the general electric accessory open counter C4. Specifically, in step S312, the current numerical value information of the opening initial value counter C5 is acquired. Then, in step S313, the current initial value is overwritten with the numerical information acquired in step S312 as a new initial value to update the initial value. In this way, the winning target period is shifted by changing the initial value of the universal electrical role item release counter C4. As a result, the transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period can occur at a timing that is not notified to the player. The initial value updated in step S313 is used in step S302 to determine whether or not it is time to update the initial value.

In the following step S314, by overwriting the initial value updated in step S313 to the general electrical role release counter C4, the numerical information of the general electrical role release counter C4 is updated, and this open counter update process ends. do.

In this way, the renewal of the initial value is postponed at the timing of updating the initial value of the general electrical accessory opening counter C4 which is first reached after the continuous winning period, thereby extending the duration of the continuous winning period and the winning. The continuous period can be made more attractive to the player. On the other hand, when the initial value update timing is reached in the high-frequency support mode (step S303: YES), the initial value update of the universal electrical role release counter C4 is always executed.

Next, the normal figure normal electric control process performed in step S216 of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is demonstrated, referring the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

In the general map general electric control process, when winning to the through gates 35 and 39 occurs, processing for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side is executed, and the reservation information on the general map side is stored. When there is, a general electric open lottery is performed using the holding information, and furthermore, the general electric open lottery is used as a trigger to execute a process for performing a production for the general map. Further, based on the result of the general electric open lottery, the processing of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34 is executed.

In the general map general electric control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. get. Here, the reservation information acquisition processing on the normal map side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21 . FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the reservation information acquisition process on the normal side, which is executed by the main side CPU 63 .

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35 by determining whether or not the first gate winning flag is set to "1". Here, the first gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35 . Then, when the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the first gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S502.

If the first gate winning flag is not set to "1" in step S501, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39 by determining whether or not the second gate winning flag is set to "1". Here, the second gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39 .

If "1" is not set to the second gate winning flag in step S503, this reservation information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if "1" is set to the second gate winning flag, In step S504, the second gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

After the first gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S502, or after the second gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S504, in step S505, the current power supply in the power reserve area HA It is determined whether or not the number of pieces of pending information is less than the upper limit (4 pieces). Then, if the general electricity reservation information is the upper limit number (step S505: NO), the present reservation information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if the general electricity reservation information is less than the upper limit number (step S505: YES), step Move to S506. In step S506, the numerical information of the general electric utility item open counter C4 is stored in the general electric holding areas HA1 to HA4 with the highest priority among the empty general electric holding areas HA1 to H4, and this holding information acquisition processing is performed. exit.

Acquisition of pending information corresponding to "1" set to the first gate winning flag and acquisition of pending information corresponding to "1" set to the second gate winning flag in one processing time , the two pieces of pending information acquired in the processing round will be the same pending information.

On the other hand, in the reservation information acquisition process on the general map side, when "1" is set to both the first gate winning flag and the second gate winning flag in this processing time, the first gate Only acquisition of the pending information corresponding to the fact that the winning flag is set to "1" is executed. Acquisition of the pending information corresponding to the fact that the second gate winning flag is set to "1" will be executed in the next processing.

Therefore, when the period during which the second gate winning flag is set to "1" overlaps with the period during which the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the second through gate 39 of the game ball B1 The random number for opening obtained upon winning the first through gate 35 can be different from the random number for opening obtained upon winning the first through gate 35 .

Returning to the description of the normal map general electric control process (FIG. 20), after executing the reservation information acquisition process on the general map side in step S401, in step S402, the information of the general map general electric counter provided in the main side RAM65 , and in step S403, a process of reading the general/universal/universal electrical address table from the main ROM 64 is executed. Then, in step S404, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose electric counter from the general-purpose electric address table is executed.

Here, the processing contents of steps S402 to S404 will be described. As already explained, the normal map general electric control processing includes the processing related to the production for the general map and the processing related to the opening and closing of the general electric accessory 34a. In this case, normal pattern fluctuation start processing, normal pattern fluctuation processing, and normal pattern determination processing are set as the processing related to the production for the normal pattern. In addition, as processing related to the opening and closing of the general electric accessory 34a, a general electric open process and a general electric closed process are set.

In such a processing configuration, the general map general electric counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed, and the general map general electric address table , the start address in the program for executing the above multiple types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general/universal electric counter.

Numerical information of "0" to "4" can be set for the general public electricity counter, and the general public electricity address table corresponds to each numerical information of the general public electricity counter on a one-to-one basis. Address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal pattern fluctuation process, and the start address NSA2 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal pattern determination, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during normal power open, and the start address NSA4 is during normal power closing It is the starting address of the program for executing the process.

When the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed, the general map general electric counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the general map general counter in the next processing time 1 is added, 1 is subtracted, or "0" is cleared in correspondence with the processing executed in the electrical control processing. Therefore, in the normal map general electric control process in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the general map general electric counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which process should be executed as the normal map normal electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. Therefore, simplification of processing is achieved.

Below, normal map fluctuation start processing, normal map fluctuation processing, general map confirmation processing, general electric open processing, and general electric close processing are performed using the general map general electric counter and general electric general electric address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

Returning to the description of FIG. 20, after executing the processing of step S404, the setting processing of the zero flag on the normal map side is executed in step S405. In the process of setting the zero flag on the general map side, the numerical information of the general general electric timer counter is read, and when the numerical information of the general general electric timer counter is "0", the general provided in the register of the main side CPU 63 A process of setting "1" to the zero flag on the side of the figure is executed. The normal/universal electric power timer counter is a counter used by the main side CPU 63 to specify the update timing of the universal/universal electric power counter according to the passage of time. It is set in each process of step S411, and updating of numerical information is executed in timer update process of step S212 in timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

In the subsequent step S406, a process of jumping (transitioning) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, jump to normal pattern fluctuation start processing of step S407, and when the acquired start address is NSA1, jump to normal pattern fluctuation process of step S408. , When the acquired start address is NSA2, jumps to the normal figure determination process of step S409, and when the acquired start address is NSA3, jumps to the normal electric open process of step S410, and the acquired start If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to step S411 during power supply shutdown. Then, after executing any of the processing of step S407 to step S411, the present general map general electrical control processing is terminated. The processing of steps S407 to S411 will be individually described below.

First, the normal pattern fluctuation start processing (step S407) in the normal pattern general electric control processing (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing normal pattern variation start processing executed by the main side CPU 63 .

In the general pattern fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, by referring to the high frequency flag provided in the main side RAM 65, it is determined whether or not it is the high frequency support mode. If the high frequency flag is set to "1" in step S601 and the high frequency support mode is set, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the indefinite flag is set to "1". As already explained, when the indefinite flag is set to "1", it becomes a low winning high probability jackpot winning or a maximum winning jackpot winning, and the high frequency support mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends. means.

If the indefinite flag is not set to "1" in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter is "0". If the value of the number-of-games counter is "0" in step S603, it means that the reference number of times for ending the high-frequency support mode has been reached. In this case, the high frequency flag is cleared to "0" in step S604. As a result, the support mode of the general electric accessory 34a shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the general pattern fluctuation start processing is the situation in which the numerical information of the general pattern general electric counter corresponds to the general electric open processing and the general electric closed processing, that is, the general electric role when the general electric open winning It is not executed while the object 34a is being opened or closed. Therefore, the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode even if the game round of the end reference number of times ends during the opening/closing operation based on the fact that the electric power is opened before the end of the game round of the end reference number of times ends. , after the completion of the opening/closing execution operation of the general electrical accessory 34a, it is switched to the low frequency support mode.

In the subsequent step S605, an external output setting process for high frequency release is executed. In the external output setting process, the data setting of the main side RAM 65 is performed so that the output of the high frequency signal from the external terminal board 97 (FIG. 2) to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. The output of the high-frequency signal is started when the high-frequency support mode is entered. Incidentally, output stop of the high-frequency signal is executed in the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

After performing the negative determination in step S601, after performing the affirmative determination in step S602, after performing the negative determination in step S603, or after performing the process of step S605, in step S606, the normal map side is 1 or more. Then, when the total number NS of the reservation information on the normal map side is "0" (step S606: NO), the normal normal map fluctuation start process is terminated as it is, and when it is 1 or more (step S606: YES) goes to step S607.

In step S607, a general electric open lottery process for determining whether or not a general electric open winning operation for executing the opening and closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is executed, and the general electric open drawing process ends. Here, the general electric open lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23 . FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing normal pattern open lottery processing executed by the main side CPU 63 .

In the electric power release lottery process, first, in step S701, shift processing of the electric power holding area HA (FIG. 13) is executed. In the shift processing, the random number for opening stored in the first power reserve area HA1 (FIG. 13) of the power reserve area HA is shifted to the power execution area HB (FIG. 13), and after the shift, the 1. Clear the electricity reserve area HA1. In addition, the second ordinary electricity reservation area HA2 (Fig. 13) → the first ordinary electricity reservation area HA1, the third ordinary electricity reservation area HA3 (Fig. 13) → the second ordinary electricity reservation area HA2, the fourth ordinary electricity reservation area HA4 ( Fig. 13) → 3rd electric power reservation area HA3 shifts the random number for opening in each area.

In the subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1". Determine whether or not it is in run mode. If a negative determination is made in step S702, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the winning determination value table for low frequency T1 (FIG. 14(a)) is read from the main ROM 64, and in step S705, the general/universal pattern success/failure determination process (general/universal electric open lottery) is performed. In the general electricity open lottery, when the random number for opening stored in the general electricity execution area HB matches any of the winning judgment values stored in the low frequency winning judgment value table T1, the general electricity open lottery is won. In addition, if it does not match any of the winning determination values, it will result in a failure.

In the following step S706, it is determined whether or not the result of the general/universal pattern suitability determination process in step S705 was general/universal electric open winning. If the result of the general/universal pattern suitability determination process is general/universal electric open winning (step S706: YES), it is determined whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1" in step S707. If the high frequency flag is not set to "1" and the low frequency support mode is set (step S707: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning consecutive flag is set to "1" in step S708. do. Here, the winning streak flag is a flag for grasping the winning streak period in the low frequency support mode, and is provided in the main side RAM 65 (FIG. 12).

The main-side RAM 65 is equipped with a winning continuation counter for grasping the number of consecutive occurrences of electric power open winning during the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode. The main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) recognizes that the continuous winning period has come when the value of the continuous winning counter reaches "3", and sets the continuous winning flag to "1".

If the consecutive winning flag is not set to "1" in step S708, "1" is added to the consecutive winning counter in step S709, and the value of the consecutive winning counter is "3" in step S710. or not. Then, when the winning consecutive counter value is "3" (step S710: YES), it is grasped that the winning consecutive period has come.

In this case, the consecutive win counter is cleared to "0" in step S711, and the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" in step S712. As a result, the update of the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4 is postponed at the initial value update timing of the general electrical role release counter C4 that is first reached after the occurrence of the current winning continuation period. Then, in step S713, the continuous winning flag is set to "1" to store that it is the continuous winning period.

If the result is a loss in the general/universal figure correctness determination process (general/universal electric open lottery) in step S705 (step S706: NO), the winning consecutive counter is cleared to "0" in step S714, and the winning succession is continued in step S715. Clear the flag to "0". For this reason, in the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, when the winning of the game ball B1 to the second through gate 39 triggers the winning of the electric power open only once, or when it happens twice in a row. Also, it is not determined that the continuous winning period has started.

If a negative determination is made in step S703, the high frequency support mode is in effect and the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress. ) is read out, and in step S717, the normal figure propriety determination process is performed in the same manner as in step S705. In the general pattern right/wrong determination process, when the random number for opening stored in the general electricity execution area HB matches any of the winning judgment values stored in the high frequency winning judgment value table T2, the general electricity is opened. It is won, and if it does not match with any of the winning judgment values, it will be a loss result.

After determining in step S707 that the mode is the high-frequency support mode, after determining in step S708 that the continuous winning period has already been reached, in step S710, after determining that the value of the continuous winning counter is "2" or less. , After setting the winning continuation flag to "1" in step S713, after clearing the winning continuation flag to "0" in step S715, or after executing the general figure propriety determination process in step S717, in step S718 , Reads the normal pattern fluctuation time stored in the main side ROM 64. The main-side ROM 64 stores in advance information that sets the normal pattern fluctuation time to 0.5 sec.

In the following step S719, the information of the normal pattern fluctuation time read in step S718 is set to the normal pattern general electric timer counter, and the process for starting the fluctuation display of the normal pattern display unit 38a (FIG. 3) in step S720 to run. Then, in step S721, by adding "1" to the numerical information of the normal pattern general electric counter, the numerical information of the general pattern general electric counter is updated from "0" to "1", and this normal pattern fluctuation start process exit.

As already explained, even if the general electric open winning occurs three times in a row in the high-frequency support mode, the send-off flag 65d may be set to "1" in the wake of the three consecutive electric open winning. If it is determined in step S707 that the high-frequency support mode is selected, the processes of steps S708 to S713 are not executed.

Next, the process (step S408) during the normal pattern fluctuation in the normal pattern general electric control process (FIG. 20) will be described. In the normal pattern fluctuation process, first, by referring to the zero flag, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the display in the normal pattern display section 38a. Then, if it is not the end timing of the variable display, on the condition that it is the timing to update the display contents of the general pattern display unit 38a, the pattern displayed on the general pattern display unit 38a is updated to the pattern of the next order. do. On the other hand, when it is time to end the variable display in the normal pattern display section 38a, the normal pattern display section 38a executes pattern stop processing for displaying the current last stop pattern. In the pattern stop processing, the information of the final stop time is set to the general/universal electric timer counter. After the pattern stop processing is executed, the general figure general electric counter is updated from "1" to "2".

Next, it demonstrates, referring the flowchart of FIG. 24 for the process (step S409) during the normal pattern determination in the normal pattern normal electric control process (FIG. 20). In the process during normal pattern determination, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the final stop time set in the normal pattern normal electric timer counter in the normal pattern fluctuation process has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is set to "1".

If the final stop time has not elapsed (step S801: NO), the process during the final normal figure determination is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time has elapsed (step S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the general electric open lottery that triggered the variable display this time is a general electric open winning. Then, if the electric power open winning is selected (step S802: YES), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, the general/universal power open counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "5", and in step S804, the general/universal power winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "10". The general electrical opening counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times the general electrical accessory 34a is opened in the current opening/closing operation of the general electrical accessory 34a by the main side CPU 63, and the general electrical award counter is the general electrical award counter for the current general electrical accessory. It is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not the upper limit number of winnings to the second operation opening 34 have occurred during the opening/closing operation of the opening 34a. After that, in step S805, the winning prize counter during support is cleared to "0", and in step S806, numerical information of the open duration (specifically 1 sec) is set to the general/universal electric timer counter.

In the following step S807, by adding "1" to the normal pattern general electric counter, the numerical information of the general pattern general electric counter is updated from "2" to "3", and this normal pattern fluctuation start process is completed. .

Also, in step S802, if the result of the general electric open lottery that triggered the current fluctuation display is not the general electric open lottery, in step S808, the numerical information of the general electric electric counter is set to "0". After clearing, the process during finalization of the normal map is terminated.

Next, the process (step S410) during normal/universal power opening in the normal/universal/universal power control process (FIG. 20) will be described. In the general electric open process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the general electric accessory 34a, and if it is not the closing timing, the open state of the general electric accessory 34a is maintained. On the other hand, when it is the closing timing of the general electric utility 34a, a process for closing the general electric utility 34a is executed. In this case, the value of the general electric open counter is updated by subtracting "1", and when the value of the general electric open counter is "0", the numerical information of the general electric electric counter is cleared to "0". Then, the opening/closing operation of the universal electrical accessory 34a is completed. Further, when the support end flag is set to "1", it means that the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 has already reached the upper limit. In this case, the universal electric opening counter and the support end flag are cleared to "0", the numerical information of the universal electric counter is cleared to "0", and the opening/closing operation of the universal electric accessory 34a is completed. In addition, when the numerical value information of the general electric utility open counter is "1" or more and "1" is not set in the support end counter, the information of the closing time of the general electric utility 34a is Set the electric timer counter and update the general electric counter from "3" to "4".

When the opening and closing operation of the universal electrical accessory 34a reaches the reference number of times, or when the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 that occurred during this support execution period reaches the upper limit number of times, this support execution period is finish.

Next, the process (step S411) during normal electric power closing in the normal electric power control process (FIG. 20) is demonstrated. In the general electricity closing process, when the closed state of the general electricity accessory 34a is maintained and the closing time elapses, processing for opening the general electricity accessory 34a again is executed. Specifically, while setting the information of the open duration time for high frequency to the normal/universal electric timer counter, the general/universal electric counter is updated from "4" to "3".

Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 50a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the third A configuration for specifying whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 will be described. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 50a to the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

The main side CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as a 9-bit parallel interface so as to be able to handle nine types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing information of "0" or "1" according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 8th bit D8. In addition, although more than 10 types of signals are input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to 9 types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the entering ball detection process (step S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 50a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special train detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working opening detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working opening detection sensor 47a, The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the 8th bit D8 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the first gate detection sensor 49a. Information corresponding to the detection signal from the second gate detection sensor 50a is stored.

When the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a do not detect the passage of the game ball B1, they output a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal to detect the passage of the game ball B1. If it is, it outputs a HI level signal indicating that it is being detected as a detection signal. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, stores "1" in the corresponding bit. store the information of In other words, in a situation where the passage of the game ball B1 is not detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 50a, the information "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the game ball B1 is detected. When passage is detected, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the entering ball detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that game ball B1 has been detected (step S901: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S902), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S903). . The first output flag specifies that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a to the management IC 66. flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls B1 should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and the 10 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10-ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that game ball B1 has been detected (step S904: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S905), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S906). . The second output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a to the management IC 66. flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the second bit D2 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that game ball B1 has been detected (step S907: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S908), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S909). . The third output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a to the management IC 66. flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the third bit D3 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball B1 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. is detected (step S910: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S911), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S912), and further 1 is added to the value of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S913). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game in the open/close execution mode. By confirming that the special electric prize flag is set to "1" in the special electric prize control processing (step S215) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), one game ball B1 to the special electric prize winning device 32 The occurrence of a ball entry is specified, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of possible ball entries to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the possible number of winning balls is executed, the special electric winning prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. be. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls B1 should be executed. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and the 15 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that game ball B1 has been detected (step S914: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S915), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S916). Furthermore, 1 is added to the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S917). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B 1 has entered the first operation opening 33 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S215) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. In the special electric control process (step S215), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". . The fifth output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a to the management IC 66. flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times that one game ball B1 should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and a one prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball B1 is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state where information "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 has changed to the state where information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that game ball B1 has been detected (step S918: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S919), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S920). Furthermore, 1 is added to the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S921). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second operation opening 34 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S215) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. In the special electric control process (step S215), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". . The sixth output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a to the management IC 66. flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the outlet detecting sensor 48a. It is determined that B1 has been detected (step S922: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S923). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. is.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that the ball B1 has been detected (step S924: YES). In this case, the first gate win flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S925). The first gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B 1 has entered the first through gate 35 . In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) in the general pattern general electrical control processing (step S216), as already described in FIG. , on the condition that the number of pending information on the general-purpose side stored in the general-purpose power holding storage area 65c is less than the upper limit number of 4, the numerical information of the current general-purpose utility release counter C4 is A process of storing it in the general electric power holding storage area 65c as the holding information on the side is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the first gate prize flag in the general map general electric control processing (step S216), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first gate prize flag is set to "0" "clear.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the eighth bit D8 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game is detected by the second gate detection sensor 50a. It is determined that the ball B1 has been detected (step S926: YES). In this case, the second gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S927). The second gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B 1 has entered the second through gate 39 . In the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) in the general pattern general electrical control processing (step S216), as already described in FIG. , on the condition that the number of pending information on the general power map side stored in the general power reserve storage area 65c is less than the upper limit number of 4, the numerical information of the current general power utility release counter C4 is A process of storing it in the general electric power holding storage area 65c as the holding information on the side is executed. It is confirmed that the second gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general electric power control processing (step S216), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second gate winning flag is set to "0" "clear.

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as already explained, when the detection of one gaming ball B1 is started by one entering ball detection sensor 42a to 50a, the entering The main side is to specify that one game ball B1 is detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 50a in a situation where the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a continue to detect the one game ball B1. It is performed by the CPU 63 . Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices communicating with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 has an MPU 91 . The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92 .

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for memory retention (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout-side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and takes a shorter time to read than the payout-side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93 .

The payout side CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main side CPU 63 . When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls B1 corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball B1 can be paid out normally, and when it is specified that it is not possible to pay out the game ball B1 normally, the payout side RAM 94 To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where information on the number of prize balls not paid out is stored in . Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be performed normally. When the main side CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 notify that the game ball B1 cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 so as to be executed. The state in which the game balls B1 cannot be normally paid out includes a full state in which the lower tray 56a is filled with the game balls B1, and a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with the game balls B1. There are an abnormal payout state in which the payout device 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. are doing.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 path leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the tank is full when the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor, and cancels the state in which the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor. It specifies that the full tank state has been canceled when the

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 path leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The pay-out side CPU 92 identifies the state of no ball when the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and the state of non-continuous detection of the game ball B1 by the ball non-detection sensor is cancelled. Specify that the ballless state is canceled when the

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball B1 has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball B1 is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 determines that there is a payout abnormal state when the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor in spite of driving and controlling the payout device 76 so that the game ball B1 is put out. It specifies that the abnormal payout state is canceled when the state where the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. , the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The dispensing side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. Identify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to have changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door open command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door close command is received.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. Identify that the main body 12 is in the open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full-tank process is executed (step S1001). In the full-tank processing, as already explained, it is specified whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full-tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, a process for stopping the payout of the game balls B1 is performed. While executing the process, it transmits a command indicating that the tank is full to the main side CPU 63 . In addition, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

After that, a ball useless process is executed (step S1002). In the no-ball processing, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor. is executed, and a command indicating that there is no ball is sent to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S1003). In the abnormal payout monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the abnormal payout state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the abnormal payout state exists, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball B1 is executed. At the same time, it transmits to the main side CPU 63 a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state. In addition, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S1004). In the front door open monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95. If the front door frame 14 is open, A front door opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 while executing a process of stopping the payout of the game ball B1. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU63.

After that, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S1005). In the main body opening monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, a game ball is detected. While executing the process of stopping the payout of B1, the body opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S1006). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main side CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. - 特許庁Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the undistributed prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S1007), the game balls B1 by the payout device 76 A payout control process for controlling the execution of payout is executed (step S1008). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one game ball B1 is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it is detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the driving control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, external information setting processing is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing (step S1009).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97 . The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of which are A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92 . Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output

One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95 and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96 . More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92 . The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97 . As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without going through the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

More specifically, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 extending from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 . The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the main body. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the body on the external terminal plate 97 . This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S220) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that one game cycle has ended. Information indicating that and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls B1 through either the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 through the game area PA Information indicating that the game ball B1 was discharged from, information indicating that the game ball B1 entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball B1 entered the second operating port 34. is

The payout side CPU 92 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S1009) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28). Information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls B1 have been paid out.

The hall computer HC can grasp the manner in which the game balls B1 are put out in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97 . for example,
・Ball payout ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls B1 that have been ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 until 100 game balls B1 are ejected ・Normal game state other than opening/closing execution mode and high-frequency support mode (hereinafter referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in open/close execution mode ・Ball output rate in high frequency support mode is "S")
・ BS x “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34”
・The number of game balls B1 entering the first operation opening 33 until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls B1 entering the second operation opening 34 generated until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1דNumber of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33”+S2דNumber of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34”)
etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. Incidentally, the number of prize balls means the number of game balls B1 paid out when one game ball B1 enters the corresponding entering ball portion.

<Structure for managing winning mode of game ball B1>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65 and a management IC 66. FIG. The MPU 62 also has an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from equipment outside the MPU 62 . The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 via the internal bus 103 . Through the input port of the I/F 101, detection results from sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 50a, commands from the payout side CPU 92, etc. are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and command contents. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as already described. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for a special electric as a result of execution of various processes by the main side CPU 63, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of execution of various processes by the CPU 63 , when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 , the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101 .

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided on the surface of the MPU 62 so that the terminal portion for connection is exposed. . However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminals 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. FIG. This makes it possible to prevent illegal electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 . However, the invention is not limited to this, and an opening is formed in the substrate box 60a for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60. The configuration may be such that a reading device can be electrically connected to the terminal 102 .

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111 , a management side CPU 112 , a management side ROM 113 , a management side RAM 114 , an RTC 115 , a correspondence memory 116 , and a history memory 117 . These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be bidirectionally communicable.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main side CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the terminal 102 for reading. Various signals from the main side CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111 , and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111 . The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62 .

The management-side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management-side CPU 112 . The management-side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside for storage (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 .

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is capable of constantly measuring date information and time information and outputting the measured date information and time information according to instructions from the management side CPU 112 . In addition, the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. Correspondence memory 116 stores information about correspondence between buffers 122a to 122p provided in input port 121 of management side I/F 111 and types of signals input to buffers 122a to 122p. used for The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of the game ball B1 received from the main side CPU 63 through the management side I/F 111 . The details of the contents of history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. As shown in FIG.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p. is at LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at HI level. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the LOW level first signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the first winning hole detecting sensor 42a, and the first winning hole detecting sensor 42a detects one ball. When game ball B1 is detected, a first signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the second signal of LOW level when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the second winning hole detecting sensor 43a, and the second winning hole detecting sensor 43a detects one ball. When game ball B1 is detected, a second signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the third signal of LOW level when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one ball. When game ball B1 is detected, a third signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level fourth signal in a situation where the new game ball B1 is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and one game ball B1 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. In this case, the fourth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of LOW level in the situation where the new game ball B1 is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects one. When game ball B1 is detected, a fifth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball B1 is not detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, and the second operation opening detection sensor 47a detects one When game ball B1 is detected, a sixth signal of HI level is output over a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth buffer 122f is receiving the HI level sixth signal.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level seventh signal in a situation where the new game ball B1 is not detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and one game ball B1 is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. When detected, a HI level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth buffer 122h receives an eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in the non-opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the opening/closing execution mode.

The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is set.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues to output the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. and output.

An output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p to make the management side CPU 112 recognize the timing of outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. FIG. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW-level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI-level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is being input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o are capable of inputting signals from the main side CPU 63, but normal signals are not input in this pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p larger than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It becomes possible to divert the management IC 66 to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 . Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the signal paths 118k to 118o are not formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked may be employed.

It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the management side CPU 112 can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . Details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of the various signals in a state where operating power is being supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. As shown in FIG. Correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence with first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111. is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general prize winning port 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the game ball B1 is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning hole 31 (10 ) are also stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning hole 31 (10 ) are also stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the game ball B1 is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning hole 31 (10 ) are also stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the special electric prize winning device 32 (15 pieces) ) are also stored. Information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 ( 1) is also stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34 ( 1) is also stored. The seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the output port 24a as information for specifying the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g by the management CPU 112. FIG.

Information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h by the management CPU 112. FIG. Information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the eleventh buffer 122k, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112 . The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112. FIG. The fifteenth correspondence relationship area 123o stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. , the management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. It is a configuration that As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the signal is output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is output at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management side CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting for inputting the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. FIG. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal to be reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other types of pachinko machines using the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the structure of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set with serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing correspondence relationship information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10), First, the date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written. After that, the correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relation memory 116, and the read correspondence relation information is stored in the area for storing correspondence relation information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written at present.

More specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of ball entry corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning opening 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the mouth detection sensors 42a to 44a is the general winning mouth 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball-entering part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the It is read out from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information of the type of ball entering portion is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 as it is.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in a situation in the opening/closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. When the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level ninth signal in a situation other than the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal in a situation in the high frequency support mode. , the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and ends the high-frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that When the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. When the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 . Further, when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 .

The history information storage area 125 stores all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days in which the game balls B1 are continuously shot from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. Allow a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, the history information storage area 125 for 600,000 or more pieces is provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124 . The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117 . Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information of the last order is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information of the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the use area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of pieces of history information that can be stored exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, and a trigger to store history information occurs, the history information storage area 125 in which the old piece of history information is stored is overwritten with new piece of history information in order. Become.

Also, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to "0" and the pointer information of "0" is written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has been read once from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1101). The recognition output counter counts the remaining required number of times of information output for making the management side CPU 112 recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63 . Since fifteen buffers 122a to 122o of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to signal type recognition as already described, "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S1102). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which kind of signals the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for this command output. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management side CPU 112 recognize which kind of signal 122o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. becomes possible and the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. Also, the period during which the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S1103). In this case, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are corresponded so that the first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer. Recognition setting of the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read. read a type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls; if the output counter for recognition is "11", read out a type identification command indicating that it is the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls; If the output counter for recognition is "10", it is the second operating port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is "9", it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "8", the type identification command indicating that the open/close execution mode is read. If the output counter for recognition is "7", it is the high-frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "6", read the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14. If the output counter for recognition is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read out the type identification command indicating that the

After that, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S1104). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification type command output processing, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification type command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the period during which the identification type command output state and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 stores the corresponding identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Stores information about

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1105), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S1106). When the value of the output counter for recognition is 1 or more (step S1106: NO), processing for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the output counter for recognition after subtracting 1 is executed (steps S1103 and step S1104).

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1106: YES), output processing of an identification end command is executed (step S1107). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification end command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period during which the identification end command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is performed. is started, the combination of the processes after step S1206 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the type of signal is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer.

Thereafter, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1204). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 stores the type identification received this time. Stores the signal type information set in the command. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S1205).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the identification end command has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and under the condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), steps S1204 and S1205 Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), the processes of steps S1207 and S1208 are repeatedly executed. In step S1207, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, details of which will be described later. In step S1208, although the details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

FIG. 35 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. FIG. 35(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level, and FIG. FIG. 35D shows the timing of execution of the correspondence setting process (step S1204) by the management side CPU 112. FIG.

When the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 is started, an identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started to be output at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 35(a). be. At the timing t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). After that, at timing t2 when the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of . In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management processing (FIG. 34) to enter the identification state. After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

After that, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 35(a). At the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). After that, at timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 35(d). In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls is stored in the first correspondence area 123 a of the correspondence memory 116 . After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

After that, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, similarly to timing t4 to timing t6, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed between timing t16 and timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 35(a), the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. At the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 35(b). After that, at timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 35(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 35(c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35(a).

As described above, the ninth signal is used to allow the management side CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output. Clearly to the management side CPU 112 that the command is being output even in a configuration in which the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used. It is possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main side CPU 63 . Note that the management output process is executed at step S221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1301). The managed object counter specifies whether or not there is a managed object that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process, by the main CPU 63. In addition, it is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed for any of the managed objects. In one management output process, the management targets for which the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to change the signal output state to the management CPU 112 are the seven ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items including whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened/closed. Therefore, the managed counter is first set to "10".

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S1302). If it is not HI level (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed object counter is equal to or greater than 4, so that there are seven entering ball detection sensors 42a that are managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed object counter. to 48a (step S1303).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1304). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is determined. is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "7". If it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a , it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". If the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " 1” is set. As already described, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 26).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1304: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S1305). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1306).

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether or not a trigger has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to HI level (step S1307). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S1308).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, it is determined whether or not a trigger has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to LOW level (step S1309). Specifically, when the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more and the current managed object is any of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the managed object counter among the first to seventh signals It is determined whether or not a HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed after switching the output state of the corresponding signal from LOW level to HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S1007) of the management process (FIG. 34) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This period allows the management CPU 112 to reliably identify the state. If the value of the managed object counter is "3" and the current managed object is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed object counter is "2". When the current management object is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management object counter is "1", and the current management object is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is closed. If there is an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S1309: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to LOW level ( step S1310).

If a negative determination is made in step S1304, if the processing of step S1306 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1307, if the processing of step S1308 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1309, or step When the process of S1310 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the managed counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1311). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1312). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S1312: NO), the process after step S1302 is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new value of the managed object counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1401). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1402). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1403). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1404). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S1403 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. FIG. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, if the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

When the value of the check target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 by executing the writing process as described above , in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the combination of the relationship information indicating that it is any of the above is stored as history information. Also, if the value of the check target counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Then, the combination of the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1405). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, or if the process of step S1405 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is checked in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value. It is determined whether or not correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1406). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding relationship areas 123h to 123j are filled with information indicating the open/close execution mode, Since either the information indicating that there is one or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S1407). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, the RTC information is read (step S1408) as in step S1403, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1409). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S1408 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, and end information is stored as history information. state. After that, similar to step S1405, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S1410).

When a negative determination is made in step S1406, when a negative determination is made in step S1407, or when the process of step S1410 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1411). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1412). When the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S1412: NO), the process after step S1402 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 38(a) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 38(b) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 38(c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 38(d) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 38(e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117. FIG.

At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 38(a). Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 38(e). After that, at the timing of t2, the signal that was switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 38(a). However, since this signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the LOW level switching is not a target for storing the history information, at the timing t2 in FIG. As shown in e), no history information is written.

After that, at each of timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14, as shown in FIG. 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 38(e).

As shown in FIG. 38(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), the timing t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a hole is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 38(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), the timing t8 at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is included in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a ball during the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 38(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(e), the timing t12 at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Accordingly, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 indicates that the front door frame 14 is open. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into one is during the opening of the front door frame 14 .

Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to reading terminal 102 of MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 17).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S1501). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the data output processing ends. In this case, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be restarted in order to execute the data output process. Therefore, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the rear surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 must be held in order to perform these stopping and starting operations. It is necessary to open the game machine main body 12 by pressing to expose the rear surface of the back pack unit 15.例文帳に追加Under these circumstances, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the game hall to read the history information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102. (step S1502). The reading device is configured to be able to check both control information and history information, and if the control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device will send the control information confirmation A signal is transmitted, and when the confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history are separate may be employed. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming the control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for history confirmation is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1503). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64 and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether or not the control information is legitimate or normal. It is possible to do

If a negative determination is made in step S1502, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S1504). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is being input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. The processing will be described later in detail.

When the process of step S1503 or the process of step S1504 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S1505). If it is continued (step S1505: YES), it stands by at step S1505. As a result, until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S1505: NO), this data output processing ends.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 is switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1601: YES), the process for outputting the history information after step S1602 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1602). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball entering the general winning opening 31 is counted. The number is calculated (step S1603). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the winning ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 is counted. The number is calculated (step S1604). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1605). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1606).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out exit that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 was open 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1607). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information, which is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1602 to S1607 (step S1608). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1607 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1602 to S1606. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1602 and the number of entering balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1607 is defined as the number of entering balls K1, and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of entering balls calculated in step S1603. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2. The difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1607 and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1605 is defined as the number of entering balls K4. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is defined as the number K5 of entering balls.
・ First parameter: Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio is "D1")
・Second parameter: ratio of total number K2 of game balls B1 entering general winning hole 31/total number of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering K3/total number of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Fourth parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entering first operation port 33 K4/ Ratio of total number (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2")
· Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of game balls B1 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls B1 ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3" do)
・Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x " Number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34”) Eighth parameter: K3 x “Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32” / Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x “Total number of winning balls to general winning port 31 "Number of prize balls for winning" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Prize for winning to second operation opening 34" After that, by using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is necessary to extract all the history information to be calculated this time. The total time taken is calculated (step S1609). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1610). In the first output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . Also, the various parameters calculated in step S1608 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1609 is output to the reading terminal 102. FIG. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the first output process.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the start information are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the end information, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 that occurred in the open/close execution mode , the number of balls entering each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1611). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 stores the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the open/close execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is not stored. If the history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode are stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 that stores the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is treated as in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1611, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating holes 34 is calculated (step S1612). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in step S1607, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1611 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1611 and S1612 (step S1613). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1612 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1611. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1612 is defined as the number of balls entering K11. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1612 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1611. 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1612 and the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1611 is defined as the number of entering balls K14.
・ Eleventh parameter: total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) ratio (hereinafter referred to as this ratio is "D11")
12th parameter: ratio of total number K12 of game balls B1 entering general winning hole 31/total number of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering K13/total number of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) 14th parameter: total number of game balls B1 entering first operation port 33 K14/ Ratio of total number (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
15th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operation port 34 K15 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13" do)
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x " Number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Second operation opening 34”) 18th parameter: K13 x “Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32” / Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x “General winning port 31 "Number of prize balls for winning" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Prize for winning to second operation opening 34" number of spheres") After that, the second output process is executed (step S1614). In the second output process, various parameters calculated in step S1613 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and end information are stored, the out exit 24a that occurred in the high-frequency support mode, general The number of balls entering each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1615). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the entirety of the consecutively numbered pointer information. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence relationship information indicating that the high-frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-frequency support mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 that stores RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 that is set is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1615, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 generated in the state where the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered into each of the second working openings 34 (step S1616). The method of calculating the number of hits is the same as in step S1607, except that the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1615 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1615 and S1616 (step S1617). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1616 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1615. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1616 is defined as the number of balls entering K21. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1616 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1615. 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference between the number of entering balls into the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1616 and the number of entering balls into the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1615 is defined as the number of entering balls K23. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1616 and the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1615 is defined as the number of entering balls K24.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls B1 (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operation opening 33" + K25 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio is "D11")
22nd parameter: ratio of total number K22 of game balls B1 entering general winning hole 31/total number of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) Ratio of total number of game balls B1 entering K23/total number of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 24th parameter: total number of game balls B1 entering first operation port 33 K24/ Ratio of total number (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) of game balls B1 ejected from game area PA (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operation port 34 K25 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23" do)
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1618). In the third output process, various parameters calculated in step S1617 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . After that, clear processing is executed (step S1619). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the general electric open lottery, the winning target period in which the general electric open lottery is won is set to occur at intervals of 1 sec. In addition, the random number for opening used in the electric power opening lottery is numerical information that is cleared to "0" when "1" is added at each update timing and reaches the maximum value, and the initial value is the numerical information to be updated. Further, the game board 24 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 180 for ejecting the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at intervals of 1 sec. Therefore, when the winning timing to the first through gate 35 is deviated from the winning target period, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the losing result is continuous in the general electric open lottery. Also, when the winning timing to the first through gate 35 and the winning target period overlap, it becomes a winning continuous period in which the general electric open winning is continuous in the general electric open lottery. The transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period is performed without notifying the player in advance. In this way, by making the player always expect the winning continuation period that does not know when it will occur, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and perform a novel presentation.

The initial value counter for opening C5 for updating the initial value of the general electric role item opening counter C4 has its numerical information updated by adding "1" each time the update timing comes, and the numerical information reaches the maximum value. This is a loop counter that is cleared to "0" when Random number initial value update processing for updating the numerical information in the initial value counter C5 for release is executed in the remaining processing of the main processing that is executed non-periodically, and is also executed in the timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically. It is a configuration that is For this reason, it is possible to avoid bias in the numerical information acquired from the initial value counter C5 for opening in the initial value update of the universal electrical role item opening counter C4 which is performed periodically. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to cause the transition from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period at a timing that is difficult for the player to guess and at an appropriate frequency.

When the transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period is performed, the update of the initial value of the general electric role release counter C4 is postponed once during the winning continuous period. For this reason, the initial value update interval in the continuous winning period is longer than the initial value updating interval in the continuous non-winning period. By lengthening the duration of the winning continuation period without reducing the frequency of occurrence of the winning continuation period, the winning continuation period can be made advantageous and attractive to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the continuous winning period and improve the interest in the game.

In the low-frequency support mode in which the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period are combined, the possibility of the public power open winning occurring is lower than the possibility of the public power open winning occurring in the high frequency support mode. However, if there is a transition from a non-winning consecutive period to a winning consecutive period in the low-frequency support mode, the possibility of a public power open winning occurrence is higher than the possibility of a public power open winning occurrence in the high-frequency support mode. get higher In the low frequency support mode, by not notifying the player of the timing of shifting from the continuous non-winning period to the continuous winning period, the electric power is released in the low frequency support mode combining the continuous non-winning period and the continuous winning period. To play a game by increasing a player's expectation for a general electric open winning in a low frequency support mode while maintaining a state in which the possibility of winning is lower than the possibility of the electric open winning in a high frequency support mode. It is possible to improve the interest of

Rotating body 183 of adjusting mechanism 180 is configured to generate a plurality of timings at which captured game ball B1 can be discharged toward first through gate 35 while rotating body 183 rotates once. By reducing the angle by which the rotating body 183 must rotate until the game ball B1 is discharged, the state in which the rotating body 183 can take in the game ball B1 can be continued for a long time. Thereby, the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down to the vicinity of the upstream of the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is taken into the concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 can be increased. It is possible to suppress the shortage of the game balls B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35, and avoid the situation of missing the timing of the electric open winning in the continuous winning period.

The concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 have a shape that widens toward the outer edge. Also, only the fourth recessed portion 183e has a size slightly smaller than that of the other recessed portions 183b to 183d. The distance from the ejection position of the adjustment mechanism 180 to the first through gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, there is a possibility that the ejection start position and the ejection direction of the game ball B1 ejected from the recessed portions 183b to 183e deviate to the left and come off the first through gate 35. When all the game balls B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 win the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player pays attention only to the taking in of the game balls B1 in the adjusting mechanism 180 and not to the ejection. On the other hand, a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 is configured to be detached from the first through gate 35, thereby attracting the interest of the player until the first through gate 35 wins the game. It is possible to improve the interest of

By setting the ejection start position of the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 180 to a position shifted to the right from directly below the center of the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and then ejected. It is a configuration that shortens the time until By shortening the time required for a series of processes of taking in, transporting, and discharging the game ball B1 by the adjustment mechanism 180, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest will shift to something else during the series of processes. .

The game ball B1 captured in one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and transported from the upper portion to the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 contacts the ejection right side surface 181g of the ejection projection portion 181e. Since the ejecting protrusion 181e is fixed to the housing portion 181, the game ball B1 captured in any one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e in the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 and transported is located on the left side of the ejecting right side surface 181g. cannot move to The game ball B1 is ejected downward from a fixed ejection position. In this way, the game ball B1 fails to be ejected from the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180, and the game ball B1 that has not been ejected is not transported to the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 again. Therefore, the discharge failure of the game ball B1 continues in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the same game ball B1 continues to rotate in the adjustment mechanism 180, and the intake and discharge of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 are not delayed.

A game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 and winning the first through gate 35, a game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 and out of the first through gate 35, and a game ball B1 not being taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 from the inlet 185 A game ball B1 entering the escape passage 172 afterward can enter either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, the number of game balls B1 heading for the second operation port 34 is insufficient when the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode comes. never.

Peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of blades 188 to 191 located on the upper side of rotating body 183 are configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not been taken in around the inlet 185 of the adjusting mechanism 180 is guided by the inclination of the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191, and is provided behind the inlet 185. It moves to the passage entrance 171 of the escape passage 172 where it is. As a result, game balls B1 that have not been taken in remain near the intake port 185, or the flow of game balls B1 upstream of the intake port 185 is disturbed, and the number of game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 increases. decrease can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 due to a decrease in the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180.例文帳に追加

The acrylic plate 172a fixed in front of the escape passage 172 and the adjusting mechanism 180 present in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the destination of the game ball B1 after entering the passage entrance 171. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of game balls B1 that can be grasped by the player from being interrupted.

At the passage exit 173 of the escape passage 172, the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173 forward from the surface of the game board 24 and the game ball B1 flowing forward from the surface of the game board 24 are provided. An exit roof 174 is provided to prevent collisions at the exit of escape passage 172 . As a result, at the passage exit 173, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1, which was about to be ejected forward from the escape passage 172, returns to the inside of the escape passage 172 again due to collision.

When the game ball B1 is caught in the intermediate state between the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the upright wall side end surface 182 of the inlet 185, the rotating body 183 is provided with an inclination for allowing the game ball B1 to enter the rear passage entrance 171 by utilizing the rotating force. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 183 from being unable to rotate in a state where the game ball B1 is sandwiched. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a problem occurs during a game and the game is interrupted to take measures to solve the problem.

In addition, in the inlet 185, the force applied from the front surfaces 188b to 191b to the game ball B1, which is in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the standing wall side end surface 182, is directed downward. has ingredients. Therefore, the game ball B1 in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the upright wall side end surface 182 is prevented from being ejected upward, and the game ball B1 in the inlet 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is prevented from being ejected. Disturbance of the flow can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls B1 cannot be taken in and the periodical supply of the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 is hindered.

The housing portion 181 of the adjustment mechanism 180 is formed with a discharge projection portion 181e for discharging the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the same game ball B1 continues to spin because the game ball B1 conveyed downward with the rotation of the rotating body 183 is not successfully discharged. A player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 can be maintained by preventing the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and the frequency with which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 from decreasing.

Moreover, by reliably discharging the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the pace at which new game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from dropping. By preventing the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from decreasing, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 180 is diminished.

Since the game ball B1 is paid out when the game ball B1 enters one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, the player can A game is played while expecting that the game ball B1 will enter one of them. In this configuration, the entry of the game ball B1 into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering portion) When a ball is generated, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 . As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls B1 entering each history target ball entering portion or the frequency of entering the ball, and the managed information is used. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entry of the game ball B1 into each history target entry ball section. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information.

All the ball-entering units that discharge the game ball B1 from the game area PA are subject to execution of history information storage processing and are subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball-entering frequency for any history-targeted ball-entering club using the history information. In addition, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls B1 entering each history target ball entering portion to the number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball B1 entered the history target ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Thus, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the ball entry history of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry portion.

The history memory 117 stores not only history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry portion, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. History information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened are stored. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball B1 enters the history target ball entering section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device, which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, it is possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the manner of entry of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry portion using the read history information.

A reading terminal 102 is provided in the MPU 62 , and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Either the program or the history information is specified as the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 , and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102 . As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the information to be externally output is either the program or the history information. is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 102 is also used, only necessary information can be read.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration regarding the selection of information to be externally output.

An MPU 62 having a main-side ROM 64 storing programs in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to concentrate the signal paths for the reading terminal 102 within the MPU 62 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102 difficult.

A main that executes processing for paying out a game ball B1 based on entry of the game ball B1 into any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from the side CPU 63 , and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in a history memory 117 . As a result, it is possible to manage the manner of entry of the game ball B1 into each history object entry portion while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from excessively increasing.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62 . This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

The main side CPU 63 stores the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a in each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, the respective signal paths), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to

The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened. are transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each situation corresponds to each buffer 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), thereby simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112. becomes possible.

The master side CPU 63 transmits to the management side CPU 112 correspondence relation information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history-targeted ball-entered portion, the management IC 66 can identify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history-targeted ball-entered portion. It is possible to make it

Using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the history target ball entry portion, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116 , and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116 . As a result, every time the main side CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. no longer need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main side CPU 63. FIG.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is As a result, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball-entering club corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target ball entry portion by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (1st to 8th, 11th to 18th , 21-26 parameters) are calculated. As a result, it is possible to externally output various parameters that are results of calculation using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is being opened. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to each of the conditions of the open/close execution mode and the condition of the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117 . As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and held is erased by overwriting. can be made difficult to occur.

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102 , history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, when various parameters are read out to analyze the ball entry state of the game ball B1 in the game area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that is the basis for calculating the various parameters. .

The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 transmits output instruction information, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters. , and various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operating power is started, and the reading device is electrically connected. is specified, information of an output instruction is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where the main CPU 63 or the like is executing a process for starting supply of operating power, that is, in a situation before the main CPU 63 starts a normal process for advancing the game, various The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history target ball entry portion, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is reduced. can be reduced.

History information is stored in the memory 117 for history in the configuration in which the external output corresponding to the entry of the game ball B1 into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is performed through the external terminal plate 97. be. As a result, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal plate 97, while simply grasping the number and frequency of entry of the game balls B1 into the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, By using the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls B1 entering the history target ball entering portion and the frequency of entering the ball.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
· In the above-described first embodiment, instead of updating the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4, it may be configured to change the driving mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 at a predetermined timing. When the initial value of the general electric role release counter C4 is not updated, the winning target period always occurs in a 1 sec cycle. On the other hand, for example, the adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotor 183 at a first rotation speed in a first rotation mode, rotates the rotor 183 at a second rotation speed, and rotates the rotor 183 in a second rotation mode. and a third rotation mode in which the is rotated at a third rotation speed. Here, the first rotation speed is the rotation speed for supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 0.8 sec, and the second rotation speed is the rotation speed to supply the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. This is the rotation speed supplied at a cycle of 1 sec. The third rotation speed is the rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1.2 sec.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same structure as the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) instead of the opening initial value counter C5. When the first through gate 35 is won in the low-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 uses the numerical information updated by the random number counter for switching as the general electricity reservation information in one of the electricity reservation areas HA1 to HA1. Store in HA4. The main CPU 63 executes switching determination processing to determine whether or not the numerical information acquired from the random number counter for switching is the numerical information to be switched stored in the main ROM 64 , so that the adjustment drive unit 184 determines the switching timing of the rotation mode.

The switching determination process is executed when a winning to the first through gate 35 occurs in the low-frequency support mode. By using the switching determination process, the timing at which the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched can be set at random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 sequentially switches the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 in such a manner as the first rotation mode→the second rotation mode→the third rotation mode→the first rotation mode each time the switching timing comes. .

Every time the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched, the relationship between the winning timing to the first through gate 35 and the winning target period changes. For example, in the first rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 0.8 sec, if the winning timing of the cycle of 0.8 sec does not overlap with the winning target period of the cycle of 1 sec, the electric power is opened. Consecutive losing results in the lottery. In addition, in the first rotation mode, when the winning timing of 0.8 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of 1 sec cycle, electric power open winning is performed at intervals of once every five times. Since the length of the cycle of the winable timing is different from the length of the cycle of the winning target period, the electric power open winning occurs at a cycle of 4 sec, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

In the second rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 in a cycle of 1 sec, if the winning timing of the cycle of 1 sec does not overlap with the winning target period of the cycle of 1 sec, it has already been described in the first embodiment. In addition, when the winable timing of 1 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of 1 sec cycle, it becomes the winning continuation period already explained in the first embodiment.

In the third rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 with a 1.2 sec cycle, if the winning timing of the 1.2 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, in the general electric open lottery Consecutive outliers. Also, in the third rotation mode, if the winning timing of the 1.2 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, the electric power open winning is performed once every five times. Since the length of the cycle of the winable timing is different from the length of the cycle of the winning target period, the common electric open winning occurs at a 6 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

Since the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 can be visually recognized from the outside, the player can confirm the rotating speed of the rotating body 183 during the game and know the timing when the rotation mode is switched. In a configuration in which the player is not notified of the timing at which the winning continuation period occurs, by making it possible to grasp the switching timing of the rotation mode, the player's expectation for the winning continuation period is increased every time the rotation mode is switched, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of

In addition, in addition to the winning continuous period in which the general electric open winning occurs at a 1 sec cycle in each ordinary electric open lottery, there is a period in which the electric open winning occurs at intervals of 5 times and at a 4 sec cycle, and at intervals of 5 times. In addition, it is possible to generate a period in which the general electric open election occurs at a 6 sec cycle. By increasing the variation of the generation mode of the general electric open winning, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

- In the above-described first embodiment, instead of updating the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of winning determination value tables in the general electric open lottery are prepared. For example, in the main-side ROM 64, in addition to the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 in which the winning target period of 24 msec starts at a cycle of 1 sec, the first winning determination table in which the winning target period of 24 msec starts at a cycle of 0.8 sec. A value table and a second winning determination value table in which a winning target period of 24 msec starts at a cycle of 1.2 sec may be stored in advance. The winning judgment value is set to (200×n−5) to (200×n) in the first exchange table, and the winning judgment value is set to (300×n−5) to (300) in the second exchange table. xn). Here, the variable n in the first replacement table is a natural number of 1-327, and the variable n in the second replacement table is a natural number of 1-218.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same structure as the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) instead of the opening initial value counter C5. The main CPU 63 acquires numerical information updated by the switching random number counter when a prize is won in the first through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode, and uses the numerical information to perform the switching determination process described above. to run. By the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used for the ordinary electric open lottery is determined.

By using the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used in the electric power open lottery can be set to random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 performs the winning determination value table for low frequency T1→first winning determination value table→second winning determination value table→low frequency winning determination value table T1 at each switching timing. , switch the winning determination value table used for the common electric open lottery.

Every time the winning determination value table used for the general electric open lottery is switched, the relationship between the winning timing to the first through gate 35 and the winning target period changes. For example, when the first winning determination value table is used for the general electric open lottery and the winning target period occurs at a cycle of 0.8 sec, the winning timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 0.8 sec cycle. , there will be a series of losing results in the general electric open lottery. In addition, when the first winning determination value table is used, if the winning timing of 1 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of 0.8 sec cycle, electric power open winning occurs once every 5 times. Since the length of the cycle of the winable timing is different from the length of the cycle of the winning target period, the electric power open winning occurs at a cycle of 4 sec, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

In the case where the winning determination value table T1 for low frequency is used for the electric power open lottery and the winning target period occurs in a 1 sec cycle, if the winning timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, the above In addition to the continuous non-winning period already explained in the first embodiment, when the winning timing of 1 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of 1 sec cycle, the winning continuous period already explained in the first embodiment. Become.

When the second winning judgment value table is used for the general electric open lottery and the winning target period occurs at a cycle of 1.2 sec, if the winning timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1.2 sec cycle , Losing results are continuous in the electric power open lottery. Further, when the second winning determination value table is used, if the winning timing of 1 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of 1.2 sec cycle, electric power open winning occurs once every 5 times. Since the length of the cycle of the winable timing is different from the length of the cycle of the winning target period, the electric power open winning occurs at a 6 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

In addition to the winning continuation period in which a general electric open winning occurs at a 1 sec cycle in each public electric open lottery, a period in which a common electric open winning occurs at intervals of 5 times and at a cycle of 4 seconds, and a period of 6 seconds at intervals of 5 times It is possible to generate a period in which the electric power open election occurs in a cycle. By increasing the variation of the occurrence mode of the general electric open winning, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, for example, the main ROM 64 stores a third exchange table in which the winning judgment value is set to (250×n−105) to (250×n−100) and a winning judgment value of (250×n−100). 205) to (250×n−200) are stored in advance. Every time the numerical information in the general electric utility item opening counter C4 is updated once, the low frequency winning determination value table T1 → the third exchange table → the fourth exchange table is used in the order of the general electric open lottery. The winning determination value table is switched. As a result, the winning continuation period and the non-winning continuation period can be created by shifting the winning target period without changing the initial value of the universal electronic accessory release counter C4.

・In the above-described first embodiment, the frequency of the power supply open state per unit time in the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode is higher than the frequency of the power supply open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode. A low configuration is also possible. Then, in the low-frequency support mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning continuation periods may be increased. For example, in a series of opening and closing operations of the general electric accessory 34a executed by the general electric open winning in the winning continuous period, the total time of the open state may be reduced. Specifically, in a series of opening and closing operations, a method of reducing the number of times of opening, a method of shortening the time of one opening, and a method of lengthening the closed state during a series of opening and closing operations are used alone or in combination. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of the electric power open state per unit time during the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode.

In addition, if the general electric open winning occurs continuously in the winning continuous period, after a series of opening and closing operations based on one general electric open winning is performed, a series of opening and closing operations based on the next general electric open winning will be performed. By using the method of lengthening the time until it is performed, it is possible to reduce the frequency of the general power supply open state per unit time in the continuous winning period of the low frequency support mode.

Further, for example, by increasing the frequency of updating the initial value of the general electrical role item release counter C4, the frequency of occurrence of consecutive winning periods in the low-frequency support mode can be increased. Specifically, the frequency of occurrence of the winning target period can be increased by setting the configuration in which the initial value is updated at the timing when the general electric accessory release counter C4 makes a half cycle. When the winning target period comes, the frequency of occurrence of the winning target period can be reduced without changing the length of the winning target period by skipping the renewal of the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 three times. can be increased.

It is possible to reduce the frequency of the electric power open state per unit time in one continuous winning period, and increase the frequency of occurrence of the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period, the winning continuous period can easily occur without changing the frequency of the electric power open state per unit time. The impression can be given to the player. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the winning continuation period that the winning continuation period may occur.

・In the above-described first embodiment, the relationship between the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode is that the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode is longer than the high-frequency support mode. It is not limited to the relationship that winning a prize is likely to occur. In the low-frequency support mode winning streak period, the public power open winning occurs continuously in the public power open lottery. occurs. In the high-frequency support mode, a series of opening and closing operations are repeated five times in which the common electric accessory 34a is open for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec, triggered by one common electric open winning. On the other hand, for example, in the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode, the general electric accessory 34a is configured to be in an open state for 0.8 sec and a closed state for 1 sec. A series of opening and closing operations are repeated three times. , the possibility of winning the second operation port 34 in the high-frequency support mode can be made higher than the possibility of winning the second operation port 34 in the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode. can. As a result, while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, it is expected that the expectations for winning the second operation port 34 in the low-frequency support mode will be extremely low. can be avoided.

Further, for example, in the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the general electric accessory 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 sec. A series of opening and closing operations are repeated three times, so that the high frequency support mode The possibility of winning the second operation opening 34 in the low frequency support mode can be set to the same level as the possibility of winning the second operation opening 34 in the low frequency support mode. As a result, the player shoots the game ball B1 while expecting that the second operating port 34 will win prizes to the same degree as in the high-frequency support mode even in the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode. operation can be performed.

In addition, the relationship between the possibility of winning the second operation port 34 in the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode and the possibility of winning the second operation port 34 in the high-frequency support mode Parameters to be adjusted are not limited to the open time and the number of times the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state. For example, as the parameters, the probability of winning a general electric open lottery in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a general electric open lottery in the high frequency support mode, and the like may be adjusted.

· In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration may be such that there is only one type of support mode in which the general electric accessory 34a supports the winning of the game ball B1 into the second operation opening 34. Specifically, the main-side ROM 64 stores only one winning judgment value table in which winning judgment values to be targeted for general electric open winning in the general electric open lottery are set. In the winning judgment value table, (250×n−9) to (250×n) are set as the winning judgment values to be targeted for the general electric open winning. Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 262. In this configuration, the probability of winning the general electric open lottery is approximately 1/25. The winning target period in which the winning determination value for the open-electricity winning continues occurs at a cycle of 1 sec and continues for 40 msec. In this configuration, there is a continuous non-winning period in which the public power open winning is not won in the public power open lottery, and a state in which the public power open winning occurs continuously in the public power open lottery in the continuous winning period. It can take two states. With respect to the support by the general electric accessory 34a, by limiting the period advantageous for the player only to the winning continuation period that occurs without warning, the player's expectation for the winning continuation period is increased and the player can always enjoy the winning continuation period. can be made aware of As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

- In the above-described first embodiment, a discharge guard portion surrounding the outer edge of the rotating body 183 may also be formed in the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 . In addition, a configuration may be provided in which an escape passage for ejection is provided to escape the game ball B1 caught when the adjustment mechanism 180 is ejected to the rear of the game board 24.例文帳に追加Specifically, a discharge port through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed in the discharge guard portion formed along the outer edge of the rotating body 183 in the lower portion of the adjustment mechanism 180 . The game ball B1 taken into the concave portions 183b to 183e at the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 180 is discharged from the outlet of the discharge guard portion at the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180.

The game board 24 has a game ball B1 sandwiched between the side surface of the discharge port and one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 when discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 behind the front surface of the game board 24. Equipped with an evacuation passage for escape. Further, on the surface of the game board 24 in the vicinity of the discharge port, a discharge passage entrance is formed as an opening that allows the game ball B1 sandwiched during discharge to enter the discharge escape passage.

The evacuation passageway communicates with the escape passageway 172 . The end face on the left side of the discharge port in the discharge guard portion is inclined leftward toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is ejected from the ejection port and is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the ejection guard portion, the rotating body 183 rotates so that the sandwiched game ball B1 pushed backwards. The pushed game ball B1 passes through the discharge passage entrance and enters the discharge escape passage. The game ball B1 passes through the escape passage 172 and is discharged from the passage exit 173. - 特許庁

By adopting a configuration that utilizes the escape passage for discharge, even if the guard part for discharge is provided in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the situation in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the guard part for discharge and does not move is avoided. can do. By adopting a configuration in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard portion, the game ball B1 can be directed toward the first through gate 35 and discharged.

・In the above-described first embodiment, a gap is provided between the rotating body 183 and the standing walls 181c and 181d so that the game ball B1 cannot enter, and the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 is visually recognized from the gap. It may be possible. In this case, it is possible to use an opaque material for the rotor 183 and the standing walls 181c and 181d. By increasing the degree of freedom in material selection, it becomes possible to select materials that match cost and design.

- In the above-described first embodiment, the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4 may be updated even during the continuous winning period in the same manner as during the continuous non-winning period. Specifically, in the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, even if the electric power open winning occurs three times in a row, the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1". Therefore, at the initial value update timing that comes first after entering the winning continuation period, the initial value of the general electrical role release counter C4 is updated, and the winning continuation period ends. By setting the winning continuation period to be shorter than the configuration of not updating the initial value of the general electrical role item opening counter C4 in the winning continuation period, the feeling of expectation for winning to the second operation port 34 in the low frequency support mode. can be maintained while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

- In the above-described first embodiment, when the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", the update of the initial value of the general electric utility item open counter C4 is not limited to one time. When the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", the update of the initial value of the universal electrical role release counter C4 may be skipped multiple times. When the continuous winning period comes, a big win is won by lottery, and the possibility of shifting to a big winning state can be increased, so that the player's interest in the continuous winning period can be increased.

When the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", a jackpot result is obtained in the lottery, and the initial value update of the general electric accessory release counter C4 may be postponed until the jackpot state is entered. In the low-frequency support mode, the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" when the general electric open winning occurs three times in succession, and the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0" when shifting to the jackpot state. . As a result, the player can be sure of transition to the big winning state when the continuous winning period comes. By making the winning continuation period attractive to the player, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to the big win state even in the low-frequency support mode, and to improve the interest in the game.

When the total number of wins to the first operation port 33 and the number of wins to the second operation port 34 is counted during the period in which the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", and the total number of times exceeds the reference value Alternatively, the send-off flag 65d may be cleared to "0". As a result, when the continuous winning period comes, the winning of the operation ports 33, 34 is ensured for the number of times equal to or greater than the reference number. To make the winning continuation period attractive to a player by avoiding the end of the winning continuation period with a small number of wins to operation ports 33, 34 despite the fact that the winning continuation period has come. can be done.

Based on the fact that the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", the number of times the update of the initial value of the universal electrical role release counter C4 is postponed may be random. For example, when the timing for updating the initial value is reached while the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the continuous winning period should be continued. By making the player aware of the possibility that the winning continuation period will continue for a long time, the interest of the player in the winning continuation period can be enhanced.

・In the above-described first embodiment, when the first through gate 35 wins once during the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 detects that the continuous winning period has started. It is good also as a structure which grasps|ascertains. As already explained in the first embodiment, during the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, the winning of the first through gate 35 does not cause the open winning of the general electric power. On the other hand, the probability of winning the general electric open lottery based on winning the second through gate 39 is approximately 1/42. When the first gate detection sensor 49a detects the winning of the first through gate 35 during the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 sets the send-off flag 65d based on the single winning. is set to "1", and the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1" when the winning to the second through gate 39 is detected by the second gate detection sensor 50a. Therefore, even if the second through gate 39 is accidentally won consecutively, it is possible to avoid setting the send-off flag 65d to "1" based on the winning.

・In the above-described first embodiment, there are cases in which an instruction is given to operate the game ball shooting device aiming at the first through gate 35, and to operate the game ball shooting device aiming at the second through gate 39. may be configured to indicate. For example, in the low-frequency support mode, when the second gate detection sensor 50a detects the winning of the second through gate 39, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the left-handed support command, the sound emission control device 81 sends a command to the display control device 82 to prompt the player to aim at the first through gate 35 and operate the game ball launching device. It is displayed on the display surface 41 a of the display device 41 . In addition, the sound emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to output a sound prompting the player to operate the game ball shooting device aiming at the first through gate 35 .

When the first gate detection sensor 49 a detects the winning of the first through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode, a right-handed instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . The sound emission control device 81, which has received the right-handed support command, sends a command to the display control device 82, thereby urging the player to aim at the second through gate 39 and operate the game ball launching device. It is displayed on the display surface 41 a of the display device 41 . In addition, the sound emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to output a sound prompting the player to operate the game ball shooting device aiming at the second through gate 39 .

When the main side CPU 63 shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is shot aiming at the second through gate 39 by transmitting the above-described right-handed instruction command to the sound emission control device 81. When the player is urged to operate the device and the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode, the above-described left-handed support command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, thereby causing the first through gate. The player is urged to aim at 35 and operate the game ball launcher. In this way, by notifying the player of the operation mode of the game ball shooting device that is advantageous to the player, even if an inexperienced player operates the game ball shooting device, the winning continuous period, the high frequency support mode, etc. It is possible to have a configuration in which the content of the game can be enjoyed.

- In the above-described first embodiment, when the main CPU 63 grasps the continuous winning period, it may be configured to notify the player of the continuous winning period. As already explained in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 detects that the continuous winning period has come when the electric power open winning has occurred three times in a row in the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode. grasp. In this case, the main CPU 63 transmits a continuous notification command to the sound emission control device 81 . The sound emission control device 81, which has received the continuous notification command, controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and transmits the command to the display control device 82, so that the winning continuous period is reached for the player. to notify. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a direct notification is made by indicating that the continuous winning period has come and prompting the user to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35 . Alternatively, the background of the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 may be changed to provide an indirect notification.

In addition, the main CPU 63 transmits a continuous effect command to the sound emission control device 81 when the consecutive winning period is reached, so that the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that it is the continuous winning period. may be The main CPU 63 transmits a continuous end command to the sound emission control device 81 when the winning continuous period ends. When receiving the continuous end command, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that the winning continuous period has ended. When the sound emission control device 81 receives a variation command and a type command from the main side CPU 63 during the period from receiving the continuous effect command to receiving the continuous end command, the game round effect is won. Change to one for continuous period.

In this way, not only the movement of the general electric accessory 34a but also the notification or effect using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the pattern display device 41 appeals the winning continuation period, and the winning continuation period is played. can impress people. By making the player aware of the winning continuation period in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored in the low-frequency support mode and improve the amusement of the game.

In the above-described first embodiment, the winning lottery triggered by winning the second operating port 34 is more advantageous to the player than the winning lottery triggered by winning the first operating port 33. may be Further, it may be configured such that the pending information acquired by winning the second operating port 34 is preferentially digested rather than the pending information acquired by winning the first operating port 33 . The configuration will be specifically described below.

When a prize is won in the first operation port 33, a combination of each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the first lottery reserved information for use in the first winning lottery. is obtained. Also, when a prize is won in the second operation port 34, the combination of each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved for the second lottery in order to be used for the second winning lottery. Acquired as information. In the reservation storage area 65a, the second lottery reservation information is stored in an area different from the first lottery reservation information. When one or more pieces of the first lottery reservation information and the second lottery reservation information are both stored at the execution timing of the winning lottery, the second winning lottery based on the second lottery reservation information is executed as the first lottery. It is executed with priority over the one-per-lottery. When winning is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operation opening 33, the operation shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning to the special electric winning device 32 is possible. Similarly, when winning is won in a winning lottery based on winning to the second operation opening 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning to the special electric winning device 32 is possible. The kind of big winning result set in the distribution table used for the second winning lottery is more advantageous to the player than the kind of big winning result set in the distribution table used for the first winning lottery. It has become.

In this configuration, as already explained in the first embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, and in the low-frequency support mode, the continuous non-winning period or the continuous winning period Become. Possibility of winning at operating ports 33, 34 in the low-frequency support mode combining the continuous non-winning period and continuous winning period means the possibility of winning at the operating ports 33, 34 in the high-frequency support mode. , the player's expectation for the occurrence of a winning to the operation ports 33, 34 is also low. However, during the winning continuous period, the support by the universal electrical accessory 34a is more likely to be executed, so the possibility of winning the second operation opening 34 increases. In this configuration, the winning to the second operating port 34 is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the winning to the first operating port 33 . Therefore, even in the low-frequency support mode, the player may enjoy a large profit due to the continuous winning period. By increasing the player's expectation for the continuous winning period, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the winning in the second operation port 34 in the low-frequency support mode can be increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. can.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 210 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board 210 showing the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 41, in the game board 210 of the present embodiment, an adjusting mechanism 220 is provided above the first through gate 35 instead of the adjusting mechanism 180 of the first embodiment. The adjusting mechanism 220 adjusts the timing when the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 41, the adjusting mechanism 220 includes a rotating body 230 that conveys the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 from the top to the bottom of the adjusting mechanism 220, and the rotating body 230 that rotates. The drive unit 184 for adjustment, which has already been described in the first embodiment, and the game ball B1, which accommodates the rotating body 230 and is transported to the discharge position by the rotating body 230, rotates. and a housing 250 for preventing it from being ejected outwardly before reaching the ejection position due to the centrifugal force of .

The adjusting mechanism 220 discharges the game ball B1 taken in at the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35 located below the adjusting mechanism 220 . As shown in FIG. 41, the distance from the lower end of the adjusting mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 220 is provided at a distance approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the first through gate 35 and the game ball B1. Some of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 are prevented from entering the first through gate 35 along the course of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35. A sorting nail 271 is provided for this purpose.

The sorting nail 271 is provided so as to protrude 6 mm forward from the front surface of the game board 210 . Therefore, of the game balls B1 having a diameter of 11 mm flowing down the game area PA (FIG. 3) having a length dimension of 18 mm in the front-rear direction, the game balls B1 flowing down near the game board 24 collide with the dividing nails 271. As a result, the game ball B1 flowing down near the window panel 52 enters the first through gate 35 without colliding with the sorting nail 271.例文帳に追加

A configuration of the adjusting mechanism 220 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41 , the housing 250 has a plate-like base body 251 used to fix the housing 250 to the game board 210 . FIG. 42(a) is a plan view of the housing 250 cut just above the adjusting mechanism 220. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the game board 210 has a fixing recess 211 capable of accommodating the base body 251 without any gap. The adjusting mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210 by nailing the four corners of the base body 251, as shown in FIG. When the adjusting mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210 , the front surface of the base body 251 and the front surface of the game board 210 are on the same plane.

As shown in FIG. 41, housing 250 has an accommodation space for accommodating rotating body 230, and rotating body 230 is arranged in the center of the accommodating space. Behind the base body 251, the adjustment drive section 184 already described in the first embodiment is arranged. The output shaft 184 a of the adjustment drive section 184 extends forward from the front surface of the adjustment drive section 184 in a direction orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 210 .

A through hole (not shown) for inserting the output shaft 184a is formed in the base body 251 . The rotating body 230 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body 230 is aligned with the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive section 184. As shown in FIG. When the adjustment drive unit 184 is driven, the rotor 230 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° per second.

In the adjusting mechanism 220, the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 in the upper part of the accommodation space is transported to the lower part of the accommodation space by rotating the rotating body 230. - 特許庁The adjustment mechanism 220 is in a state in which one game ball B1 can be discharged each time the rotating body 230 rotates 1/4. That is, the adjusting mechanism 220 can supply the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1 sec, like the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first embodiment.

By generating the winning timing already described in the first embodiment at a cycle of 1 sec, it is possible to generate a non-winning continuous period when the winning timing does not overlap with the winning target period of the general electric open lottery. , when the winning possible timing overlaps with the winning target period, a continuous winning period can be generated.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 has upright walls 252, 253, 261 for partitioning the accommodation space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated. A plurality of standing walls 252 , 253 , 261 are formed on the base body 251 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 251 . As shown in FIG. 42( a ), the standing walls 252 , 253 , 261 extend from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 . The standing walls 252 , 253 , 261 are formed in a manner surrounding the rotating body 230 with a space from the outside of the peripheral surface of the rotating body 230 . The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the standing walls 252, 253, 261 is constant, and the housing space is circularly partitioned by the standing walls 252, 253, 261. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 43 is a front view of a single rotor 230 separated from the adjusting mechanism 220. FIG. As shown in FIG. 43 , the rotating body 230 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member, and the peripheral surface of the rotating body 230 has four stepped portions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. Here, the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the four stepped portions are arranged in order of the first stepped surface 241a→second stepped surface 242a→third stepped surface 243a→fourth stepped surface 244a in the rotation direction of the rotating body 230. are lined up like this. The four stepped surfaces 241a-244a protrude in the radial direction of the rotating body 230, and the projecting dimension of the four stepped surfaces 241a-244a is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 43, the rotating body 230 has an inner side of the first stepped surface 241a (the side closer to the center of the rotating body 230) and an outer side of the second stepped surface 242a (the side farther from the center of the rotating body 230). and a second support surface 242 connecting the inner side of the second stepped surface 242a and the outer side of the third stepped surface 243a. It has Further, the rotating body 230 includes a third support surface 243 that connects the inner side of the third stepped surface 243a and the outer side of the fourth stepped surface 244a, and the inner side of the fourth stepped surface 244a. A fourth support surface 244 connecting the edge and the outer edge of the first support surface 241 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 43, each of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is a curved surface that bulges outward. In each of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the support surfaces 241 to 244 is gradually shortened from the front side to the rear side in the rotational direction (clockwise). For example, taking the first support surface 241 as an example, as shown in FIG. side, and gradually becomes shorter toward the first stepped surface 241a, which is the rear side in the rotation direction.

As shown in FIG. 41, one of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230, the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a positioned at the rear ends of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotating direction, and the rotating body 230 are accommodated. The space defined by the upright walls 252, 253, 261 defining the accommodation space has a shape and size capable of accommodating the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 41 , the left side of the circular storage space is defined by a left upright wall 261 , and the lower right side of the storage space is defined by a lower right upright wall 253 . The left upright wall 261 and the lower right upright wall 253 are integrally formed with the base body 251 . The lower right upright wall 253 has a pivot shaft 254 at the upper end of the lower right upright wall. The rotating shaft 254 extends forward in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the base body 251 . The upper right portion of the accommodation space is defined by an upper right standing wall 252 that is an independent member that is not fixed to the base body 251 . The upper right upright wall 252 is connected to the lower right upright wall 253 so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft 254 up to a certain angle.

FIG. 42(b) is a front view of the housing 250 showing an enlarged view of the rotation shaft 254. FIG. As shown in FIG. 42(b), in the portion where the lower right upright wall 253 and the upper right upright wall 252 are connected, the upper right upright wall 252 rotates about the rotation shaft 254 on the right side of the rotation shaft 254. A gap is provided to allow clockwise rotation. Therefore, when a rightward force is applied to the upper right upright wall 252 from the outside, the upper right upright wall 252 can rotate clockwise about the rotation shaft 254 . On the other hand, on the left side of the pivot shaft 254, there is no gap that allows the upper right upright wall 252 to rotate counterclockwise about the pivot shaft 254. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the initial state is a state in which the upper right upright wall 252 cannot rotate counterclockwise (to the left in FIG. 42(b)). The upper right upright wall 252 rotates clockwise with an upper limit of about 15° to the displaced position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. As the upper right upright wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the displaced position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper right upright wall 252 increases.

The upper right upright wall 252 is located at the initial position when no force is applied from the outside, and rotates about the rotation shaft 254 to the displaced position when a force is applied to the right from the outside. The upper right upright wall 252, which has been rotated to the deformed position by an external force, rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 254 by its own weight and returns to the initial position when the external force is removed.

As shown in FIG. 41, the upper side of the accommodation space is defined by a left upright wall 261 and an upper right upright wall 252 . Right above the rotor 230, the left standing wall 261 and the upper right standing wall 252 are separated, and between the two standing walls 252, 261 is an intake port 262 for taking in the game ball B1 into the housing space. It has become. The horizontal width of the intake port 262 is set slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 so that the game balls B1 flowing down from above can be taken in one by one.

Since the upper right upright wall 252 defining the right end of the inlet 262 can rotate about the pivot shaft 254 from the initial position to the displaced position, the inlet 262 can be deformed as necessary. The adjustment mechanism 220 can make it easy to take in the game ball B1. A mode in which the adjusting mechanism 220 takes in the game ball B1 from the inlet 262 will be described later.

The game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 is transported from the top to the bottom of the adjusting mechanism 220 while contacting one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. FIG. The support surfaces 241-244 of the rotating body 230 are described below.

As shown in FIG. 43, the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are inclined forward toward the axis. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed in contact with any one of these three support surfaces 241 to 243 is positioned on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA (FIG. 3). On the other hand, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined rearward toward the axis. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed while contacting the fourth support surface 244 is positioned behind the game area PA (the side of the base body 251).

In this way, the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 is changed by varying the position of the game ball B1 being transported in the front-rear direction according to the contact support surfaces 241 to 244 in the adjustment mechanism 220. The position of B1 in the front-rear direction can be different. As already explained, the distance from the lower end of the adjusting mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and the distance from the adjusting mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is approximately 2.5 times. In the middle, a sorting nail 271 protruding to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the game area PA is provided.

A game ball B1 that is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262, moves in the rotational direction while contacting the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 (FIG. 41) and is discharged. flows down toward the first through gate 35 in front of the game area PA.

44(a) and 44(c) are lateral cross-sectional views of the window panel 52 and the game board 210 when cut directly above the dividing nail 271 on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 210, and FIG. 44(b). ) and (d) are front views of the game board 210 showing an enlarged periphery of the adjustment mechanism 220. FIG. As shown in FIG. 44( a ), the game ball B<b>1 flowing down in front of the game area PA flows down in front of the dividing nail 271 without colliding with the dividing nail 271 . Then, the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 as shown in FIG. 44(b).

On the other hand, as already described with reference to FIG. 41, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined downward toward the rear when the fourth support surface 244 is positioned upward. It has an inclination to the plane where it is. Therefore, the game ball B1, which is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262, moves in the rotational direction while being in contact with the fourth support surface 244, and is discharged, moves toward the first through gate 35 on the far side of the game area PA. flow down toward As shown in FIG. 44(c), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the right side of the dividing nail 271. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 44(d), the game ball B1 is rebounded to the right by the sorting nail 271, so it does not enter the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG.

The probability that the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 262 is transported to the discharge passage 264 while contacting the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 is 3/4, The probability that the captured game ball B1 is transported to the discharge passage 264 while contacting the fourth support surface 244 is 1/4. Therefore, the game ball B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 220 enters the first through gate 35 with a probability of approximately 3/4, and collides with the sorting nail 271 with a probability of approximately 1/4 to enter the first through. It leaves the gate 35.

Next, the configuration around the inlet 262 in the adjustment mechanism 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45(a) to (d). 45(a) to (d) are front views of the game board 210 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 220 and its periphery. As shown in FIG. 45(a), the left standing wall 261 extends to the upper left of the rotor 230 and has an end surface 261a at its upper end. The end surface 261a has a gentle downward slope toward the left, and the right end of the end surface 261a enters the intake port 262 and contacts one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. It is positioned below the upper end of the game ball B1 that is in the ball position.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the game board 210, a plurality of left guide nails 291 and right guide nails 292 are provided above the adjustment mechanism 220 to guide the game ball B1 to the inlet 262. there is Here, the left guide nail 291 and the right guide nail 292 are the same members as the nails 24b (FIG. 3) provided in the game board 210 in large numbers.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the game board 210, the left side guide nails 291 are arranged in a line above the left standing wall 261, and the line direction of the line is downward to the right. Inclined. The row of left guide nails 291 guides the game ball B1 flowing down from above the left standing wall 261 toward the inlet 262 . Right guide nails 292 are arranged in a row above the upper right upright wall 252, and the direction in which the rows are arranged is inclined downward to the left. The row of the right guide nails 292 guides the game ball B1 flowing down from above the upper right standing wall 252 toward the inlet 262 .

As already described, the upper right upright wall 252 is configured to rotate rightward from the initial position to the displaced position when a rightward force is applied from the outside. In this configuration, the row of right guide pegs 292 arranged above the upper right standing wall 252 prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from above from colliding with the upper right standing wall 252 . Therefore, the turning state of the upper right standing wall 252 does not change when the game ball B1 falling from above collides with the upper right standing wall 252 in the displaced position.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the distance from the right guide nail 292 positioned at the lower end of the row of right guide nails 292 to the upper right upright wall 252 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 does not enter the gap between the row of the right guide nails 292 and the upper right upright wall 252.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the distance from the left guide nail 291 positioned at the lower end of the row of left guide nails 291 to the left standing wall 261 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is guided leftward by the row of the right guide nails 292 and is not taken into the inlet 262 is placed in the space existing between the row of the left guide nails 291 and the left upright wall 261. , and escape to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220 .

In addition, the game ball B1, which was guided rightward by the row of the left guide nail 291 and was not taken into the inlet 262, collided with the right guide nail 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 and bounced leftward. After that, it passes through the space existing between the row of left guide nails 291 and the left upright wall 261 and escapes to the left of the adjusting mechanism 220 . In this way, the game ball B1, which was guided to the vicinity of the inlet 262 but was not taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 through the inlet 262, is released to the left of the adjusting mechanism 220. It is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from remaining in the vicinity of the inlet 262. - 特許庁

A game ball B1 flows down into the intake port 262 of the adjustment mechanism 220 regardless of the rotation state of the rotating body 230. - 特許庁Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the intake port 262 will contact the front side position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 located above, and the possibility of contacting the rear side position of the support surfaces 241 to 244. I have both. Here, the front positions of the support surfaces 241 to 244 refer to the front portions of the support surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotational direction, and the rear positions of the support surfaces 241 to 244 refer to the rotation directions of the support surfaces 241 to 244. It is the rear part of the direction.

The behavior of the game ball B1 in the inlet 262 is common regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 with which the game ball B1 contacts. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball B1 flowing down to the intake port 262 and coming into contact with the first support surface 241 will be described below as an example.

First, the case where the game ball B1 flowing down to the inlet 262 contacts the rear side position of the first support surface 241 positioned above will be described with reference to FIG. 45(b). As shown in FIG. 45(b), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rear side position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is is shorter than the distance from the center of the upright walls 252, 253, 261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is pushed by the first stepped surface 241a present at the rear end of the contacting first support surface 241 and conveyed toward the lower part of the housing space.

Next, referring to FIGS. 45(b) and 45(c), the case where the game ball B1 flowing down to the intake port 262 contacts the front side position of the first support surface 241 positioned above. explain. As shown in FIG. 45(c), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the front side position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is It is longer than the distance from the center to the standing walls 252,253,261. Therefore, in the inlet 262 , the game ball B<b>1 trying to move rightward in response to the rotation of the rotating body 230 contacts the upper right upright wall 252 .

When the rotating body 230 rotates in a state where the rightward movement of the game ball B1 is blocked by the upper right standing wall 252, the game ball B1 cannot move rightward from the inlet 262. The contact point with the support surface 241 moves from the front side to the rear side of the first support surface 241 .

As already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 gradually decreases from the front position to the rear position of the first support surface 241 . Therefore, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is gradually shortened. In this case, the game ball B1 that continues to contact the first support surface 241 gradually sinks downward as the rotating body 230 rotates.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the game ball B1 is positioned behind the first support surface 241. Then, as shown in FIG. As already explained, in the state existing at the rear side position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is as follows: shorter than the distance to 261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is pushed by the first stepped surface 241a present at the rear end of the first support surface 241 and conveyed toward the lower part of the housing space.

Here, when the rotating body 230 rotates from the state where the game ball B1 exists at the front side position of the first support surface 241 to the state where it exists at the rear side position, the game ball B1 and the first The distance to the point of contact with the support surface 241 decreases continuously. Therefore, even when the game ball B1 is in a state of waiting at the inlet 262, it is not in a state of staying in one place, but in a state of always moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the game area PA (FIG. 3), a space is provided to the left of the left standing wall 261 in which the game ball B1 can flow downward. No nail 24b is arranged in the space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 at the take-in port 262 can pass through the space and proceed downstream of the game area PA.

The game ball B1 flowing down to a position deviated to the left side of the inlet 262 contacts the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261. - 特許庁As already explained, the end surface 261a is inclined downward toward the left. Therefore, the game ball B1 is guided by the end face 261a of the left standing wall 261 and flows down the space provided on the left side of the left standing wall 261. - 特許庁

The game ball B1 flowing down to a position deviated to the right side of the inlet 262 is guided by the right guide nail 292 and moves toward the inlet 262.例文帳に追加Since the game ball B1 does not collide with the upper right standing wall 252 from above, the upper right standing wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the displacement position or rotates from the displacement position to the initial position by the game ball B1 flowing down from above. It never moves.

As shown in FIG. 45(c), when the first game ball B1 enters the inlet 262 and is in contact with one of the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230, the second When the game ball B1 tries to enter the inlet 262, the game ball B1 comes into contact with the first game ball B1. Since the right guide nail 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 are present on the right side of the second game ball B1, the game ball B1 does not move rightward but moves leftward.

As already explained, the right end of the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261 is located below the second game ball B1, and the end surface 261a is inclined downward toward the left. On the left side of the left standing wall 261, there is a space through which the game ball B1 can pass. Therefore, the second game ball B1 not taken into the intake port 262 flows down the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220. - 特許庁

Since the game ball B1 not taken into the intake port 262 stays and does not stay in the vicinity of the intake port 262, it is possible to maintain a state in which the game ball B1 is smoothly taken in the intake port 262.例文帳に追加

Next, the manner in which the game ball B1 taken in from the take-in port 262 is conveyed to the lower part of the accommodation space as the rotating body 230 rotates will be described with reference to FIG. 45(d). As already explained, the game ball B1 conveyed in contact with any one of the first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 exists on the front side in the front-rear direction (the window panel 52 side). , The game ball B1 conveyed while contacting the fourth support surface 244 exists on the rear side in the front-rear direction (the side of the base body 251).

The movement of the game ball B1 during transport is common regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 with which the game ball B1 is in contact during transport, except for the existing position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the case where the game ball B1 is transported while contacting the first support surface 241 will be described below as an example.

As shown in FIG. 45(d), the game ball B1 is conveyed while contacting the first support surface 241 and the first step surface 241a. The game ball B1 being transported is in a state where force is applied in the rotational direction from the first stepped surface 241a protruding in the radial direction of the rotating body 230. As shown in FIG.

As already explained, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is longer on the front side in the rotational direction (clockwise) of each of the support surfaces 241 to 244, and gradually increases toward the rear side in the rotational direction. Shorten. Further, as already explained, the distances from the center of the rotating body 230 to the standing walls 252, 253, 261 that divide the housing space of the rotating body 230 are constant.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(d), the distance from any one of the support surfaces 241 to 244 to the standing walls 252, 253, 261 is short on the front side in the rotation direction of the support surfaces 241 to 244, and gradually becomes longer as it progresses to the rear side. Specifically, the width of the space sandwiched between any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 and the standing walls 252, 253, 261 is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 on the front side in the rotation direction of the support surfaces 241 to 244. is also narrow, and gradually widens toward the rear side in the direction of rotation. The width of the space located in the rear half of the space is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Also, the distance from the front surface of the base body 251 to the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 45(d), in the space sandwiched between the first support surface 241 and the upper right standing wall 252, the space on the rear side in the rotation direction has a shape and size that can accommodate the game ball B1. The space on the front side in the rotation direction is a space of a size that cannot accommodate the game ball B1. In the state where the game ball B1 is conveyed while contacting the first support surface 241, the space having the width in which the game ball B1 can exist is limited to the rear side position of the first support surface 241.例文帳に追加

When there is a wide space in which the game ball B1 can exist during transportation, the game ball B1 can exist in different positions even if the rotating state of the rotor 230 is the same. In this case, even if the rotation speed of the rotating body 230 is constant and any one of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a is present at the ejection position each time the ejection timing comes, the position of the game ball B1 at the ejection timing is changed every time. As a result, the winning timing to the first through gate 35 is shifted.

On the other hand, the space having a size in which the game ball B1 can exist during transportation is limited, and at the ejection timing when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a transporting the game ball B1 reach the ejection position, the game By configuring the ball B1 to be conveyed to a predetermined position each time, it is possible to prevent deviation of the winning timing to the first through gate 35.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the game ball B1 is positioned behind one of the support surfaces 241 to 244, a space larger than the size of the game ball B1 exists around the game ball B1. For this reason, while the game ball B1 is in contact with the first step surface 241a, the first support surface 241, and one of the standing walls 252 and 253 located on the right side, the game ball B1 touches the first step surface 241a. It is not transported while being pushed and dragged.

Next, the configuration for the adjustment mechanism 220 to discharge the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 is continuous with the accommodation space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated, and the game ball B1 conveyed to the bottom of the accommodation space is positioned below the adjustment mechanism 220. A discharge passage 264 is formed for discharging toward the 1 through gate 35 . The discharge passage 264 has a passage cross-section through which the game balls B1 can pass one by one, and has a discharge port 256 at the lower end of the discharge passage 264 . The discharge passage 264 guides the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 so that the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 flows down toward the first through gate 35. - 特許庁As shown in FIG. 44(b), the discharge passage 264 shifts the position of the game ball B1 to the left in the upstream, and directs the discharge direction of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 downward in the downstream.

The discharge passage 264 is connected to the right of the center of the accommodation space. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed from the upper part of the housing space to the lower part in the clockwise direction advances to the discharge passage 264 before the game ball B1 makes a half turn around the rotating body 230. - 特許庁

The game ball B1 conveyed by the rotating body 230 has a downward velocity component until it makes a half turn after it is taken in the upper part of the accommodation space, and has an upward velocity component after making a half turn. It will happen. At the timing before the game ball B1 being conveyed changes from having a downward velocity component to having an upward velocity component, the game ball B1 is advanced to the discharge passage 264. By adopting such a structure, the movement of the game ball B1 from the storage space to the discharge passage 264 can be made smooth.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes discharge upstanding walls 263 and 266 that define a discharge passage 264 . The discharge standing walls 263 and 266 are formed on both left and right sides of the discharge passage 264 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Of these, the right discharge erecting wall 266 defining the right passage shape of the discharge passage 264 is continuous with the lower right erecting wall 253 and extends obliquely downward to the left. As shown in FIG. 41, the passage wall surface of the discharge passage 264 defined by the right discharge standing wall 266 is a curved line that bulges obliquely upward to the left.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left discharge upright wall 263 that defines the left side passage shape of the discharge passage 264 is for right discharge so that the passage width of the discharge passage 264 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. It is formed apart from the standing wall 266 . The passage width of the discharge passage 264 is set to be slightly narrowed from upstream to downstream, and is approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball B1 downstream.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 is guided by the right discharge standing wall 266, and moves leftward while proceeding downward. Specifically, the game ball B1 is guided mainly leftward upstream of the discharge passage 264 and guided downward mainly toward the first through gate 35 downstream of the discharge passage 264 . This prevents the discharge direction of the game ball B<b>1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 from deviating from the first through gate 35 .

As shown in FIG. 41, the left discharge standing wall 263 has, at its upper end, a discharge protruding end 263a that protrudes into the accommodation space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the discharge protruding end 263a is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the outer ends of the step surfaces 241a to 244a, and the difference between the two distances is greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. is also short. That is, when the step surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 come closest to each other, the distance from the ejection protrusion 263a to the step surfaces 241a to 244a becomes shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. It protrudes to position.

Here, the projecting dimension of the ejecting protruding end 263a is such that the ejecting protruding end 263a does not come into contact with the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a even when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a are closest to each other. Therefore, the rotation of the rotating body 230 is not hindered by the contact of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a with the ejecting projecting end 263a.

The discharge protruding end 263 a guides the game ball B1 toward the discharge passage 264 by contacting the upper part of the game ball B1 conveyed to the lower part of the housing space by the rotating body 230 . As shown in FIG. 44(b), the game ball B1 conveyed to the lower part of the housing space is subjected to gravity to cause it to fall downward. A space slightly larger than the game ball B1 exists in the lower part of the accommodation space. Therefore, the game ball B1 moves downward from the state of contact with the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotor 230 due to its own weight.

As already explained, the discharge passage 264 is connected to the right of the center in the lower part of the housing space. Therefore, when the game ball B1 moves from the storage space to the discharge passage 264, the game ball B1 has a leftward velocity component and a downward velocity component. Then, the game ball B1 tries to move downward by its own weight and to move leftward by being pushed by the contacting stepped surfaces 241a to 244a.

In the lower part of the accommodation space, when the downward velocity component of the game ball B1 is sufficiently larger than the leftward velocity component, the game ball B1 moves to the discharge passage 264 along the right discharge standing wall 266 . On the other hand, when the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 is large in the lower part of the accommodation space, the game ball B1 moves away from the right discharge standing wall 266 and moves leftward.

On the other hand, as already explained, the ejection protruding end 263a of the left ejection standing wall 263 protrudes into the accommodation space. Then, the distance from the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a pushing the game ball B1 leftward to the discharge projecting end 263a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, even the game ball B1 having a large velocity component in the left direction cannot move leftward from the ejecting protruding end 263a.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 44(b), even if the game ball B1 does not move downward and is in contact with the support surfaces 241 to 244, the ejection protruding end 263a and the stepped surface 241a to The projecting position of the discharge projecting end 263a is set so that the straight line connecting the 244a passes above the center of gravity of the game ball B1. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 is sandwiched in contact with the ejecting protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, the force of the clockwise rotation of the rotating body 230 is enough to eject the game ball B1. It works in the direction of pushing out towards passage 264 .

In the lower part of the accommodation space, even if the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 is large, the game ball B1 that is in contact with the discharge protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a is a rotating body. As 230 rotates, it moves toward the discharge passage 264 . The game ball B1 is strongly sandwiched between the ejection protruding end 263a and the step surfaces 241a to 244a, and the rotation of the rotating body 230 does not stop.

Next, the case where the game ball B1 comes into contact with both of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 at the inlet 262 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the upper right upright wall 252 in the initial position has an end surface 252a at the free end of the upper right upright wall 252 that slopes downward to the right. As the rotating body 230 rotates, the distance between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a located around the inlet 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 becomes longer or shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. do.

A game ball enters the intake port 262 at the timing when the interval between the step surfaces 241a to 244a located near the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 changes from a state longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state shorter. When B1 enters, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the step surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a.

The behavior of the sandwiched game ball B1 is common regardless of which of the step surfaces 241a to 244a sandwich the game ball B1. Therefore, the case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second step surface 242a and the upper right standing wall 252 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 46(a) to (c). FIGS. 46(a) to 46(c) are front views of the game board 210 showing an enlarged periphery of the adjustment mechanism 220. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second stepped surface 242a and the upper right standing wall 252, when the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise, the second stepped surface A rightward force is applied to the game ball B1 from 242a. Therefore, a rightward force is applied to the upper right standing wall 252 from the game ball B1. As already explained, the upper right upright wall 252 can be rotated around the rotation shaft 254 from the initial position to the deformed position shaded in FIG. is.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), as the upper right upright wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the deformed position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the end surface 252a of the upper right upright wall 252 is extended and sandwiched. The game ball B1 is guided by the inclination of the end surface 252a and moves downward to the right. Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the game ball B1 changes from being in contact with the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 to being in contact with the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252. Then, as shown in FIG. Here, the inner surface of the upper right upright wall 252 is the surface of the upper right upright wall 252 that faces the rotating body 230 and defines the accommodation space for the rotating body 230 .

After that, the game ball B1 moves along the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252 while being pushed by the second stepped surface 242a. As a result, the game ball B1 momentarily sandwiched by the inlet 262 can be transported to the ejection position at the same ejection timing as the game ball B1 not sandwiched by the inlet 262.例文帳に追加.

In this way, the adjustment mechanism 220 has a configuration in which, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the upper right standing wall 252, the game ball B1 is captured by eliminating the sandwiched state. have. This reduces the possibility that the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252 and the rotating body 230 cannot rotate.

By moving the game ball B1 from contacting the upper right standing wall 252 to contacting the lower right standing wall 253, the rightward force applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252 is removed. be Therefore, the upper right upright wall 252 that has been rotated to the displaced position returns to the initial position due to its own weight.

In the case of using a spring or the like to apply a force to the upper right upright wall 252 to return it to the initial position, the force required to rotate the upper right upright wall 252 from the initial position to the displaced position increases. On the other hand, by configuring the upper right standing wall 252 to return to the initial position by its own weight, the force required to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 is reduced, and the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched can be instantaneously realized. In addition, the adjustment drive unit 184 (FIG. 41) is not loaded during the process of resolving this state.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

At the intake port 262 of the adjustment mechanism 220, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 is initially rotated around the rotating shaft 254 by the upper right standing wall 252. It is configured to be incorporated into the adjustment mechanism 220 by rotating from the position to the deformed position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sandwiched game ball B1 from being repelled upward and disturbing the flow of the game ball B1 around the inlet 262. - 特許庁Moreover, compared with the structure which escapes the pinched game ball B1 to the outside of the adjustment mechanism 220, more game balls B1 can be taken in to the adjustment mechanism 220. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lack of game balls B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 . In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing of the electric power open winning is missed during the continuous winning period.

In the inlet 262, when the game ball B1 is positioned in front of the support surfaces 241 to 244 (front side in the rotation direction), the game ball B1 is positioned behind the support surfaces 241 to 244 (rear side in the rotation direction). It is configured such that the game ball B1 waits at the inlet 262 while moving downward until it reaches the positioned state. By constantly moving the game ball B1 waiting at the inlet 262, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball B1 from stopping and causing the player's interest to shift to other things. In the process of the adjusting mechanism 220 taking in the game ball B1, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player in the adjusting mechanism 220 and improve the amusement of the game by avoiding the occurrence of a state in which the player loses interest. can.

The adjustment mechanism 220 is configured to take in the game balls B1 one by one from the intake port 262 . When two game balls B1 are taken in at the same time, one game ball B1 influences the winning timing of the other game ball B1, so that the winning to the first through gate 35 occurs even during the continuous winning period. The possible timing may fall outside the winning period. On the other hand, by limiting the number of game balls B1 taken in at one time to one, the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at the timing when the electric power open winning is not achieved in the continuous winning period. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the electric power open winning in the winning continuous period. As a result, the player's expectation for the continuous winning period can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game board 210, a right guide nail 292 for guiding the game ball B1 to the inlet 262 is provided above the upper right standing wall 252, and a game ball B1 is provided above the left standing wall 261 to the left. There is a gap that allows it to move in the opposite direction. Therefore, when the game ball B1 already exists in the inlet 262, the other game ball B1 can escape to the left of the adjusting mechanism 220. - 特許庁Therefore, the number of game balls B1 that are not taken in stays near the intake port 262 or the flow of the game balls B1 upstream of the intake port 262 is disturbed and is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220. can be prevented from decreasing. In this way, by suppressing the shortage of the game balls B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35, it is possible to avoid missing the timing of the electric open winning in the continuous winning period.

The adjusting mechanism 220 is provided with a projecting end 263a for ejection, and in the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 220, the game ball B1 is prevented from rising without being ejected. As a result, the game ball B1 conveyed to the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 220 by the rotating body 230 is not successfully discharged, and the same game ball B1 continues to rotate, and the number of game balls B1 discharged toward the first through gate 35 is reduced. decrease can be prevented. It is possible to avoid the fact that the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 is diminished due to a decrease in the frequency with which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220. - 特許庁In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 is discharged within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the pace at which new game balls B1 are taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 from dropping. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 due to a decrease in the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 .

The first support surface 241, the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are provided with an inclination for discharging the game ball B1 in a manner that the game ball B1 flows downward, and the fourth support surface 244 is the game ball B1. is provided with an inclination for discharging in a manner that the back side flows down. As already explained, the distance from the lower end of the adjusting mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, only the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and flowing down the back side collides with the sorting nail 271 and comes off the first through gate 35. - 特許庁As a result, all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 enter the first through gate 35, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player pays attention only to taking in the game balls B1 in the adjusting mechanism 220 and does not pay attention to discharge. can do. By attracting the interest of the player until the moment the first through gate 35 is won, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

By changing the number and inclination of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 and entering the first through gate 35, and the game ball B1 leaving the first through gate 35, respectively. It is possible to set the frequency of occurrence at the design stage. Therefore, the probability that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 will win the first through gate 35 can be set to a high value other than 100%. As a result, the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 can be heightened, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Another form in the second embodiment>
- In the above-described second embodiment, a plurality of game balls B1 may be arranged to wait while moving downward in the inlet 262 . For example, when one nail 24b is arranged above the left end of the inlet 262 and the first game ball B1 has already entered the inlet 262, the second game ball B1 flows down. The configuration may be such that the second game ball B1 is held above the inlet 262 when it comes. The second game ball B1 waits on the first game ball B1, but since the first game ball B1 always continues to move downward until it is taken in, it contacts the first game ball B1. The second game ball B1 on standby also always continues to move downward.

In this way, by stocking the game balls B1 while moving them in the intake port 262, the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 run short, and the game balls B1 are placed in the first position even though it is the consecutive winning period. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a state in which the through gate 35 is infrequently won.

· In the above-described second embodiment, as a configuration for guiding the game ball B1 moving while being pushed by the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230, a nail may be used instead of the housing 250. When a rightward force is applied to the nail placed near the inlet 262, the compression coil spring is deformed and moves rightward from the initial position, thereby removing the force from the outside. A configuration using a movable nail that returns to the initial position by the restoring force of the compression coil spring may be used. By using the movable nail, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotary body 230 and the movable nail, the movable nail is released from the center of the rotary body 230 by utilizing the rightward movement of the movable nail. It is possible to widen the distance to and enable capture of the sandwiched game ball B1.

In this way, the nail guides the game ball B1 moving in the direction of rotation while being pushed by the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230, so that the game ball B1 is pushed into the first through gate 35 on the game board 210. can reduce the area occupied by the means for periodically supplying the As a result, on the game board 210, the options for the position of the means for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 are increased, and the degree of freedom in design can be enhanced.

- In the above-described second embodiment, the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 may be configured so as not to have an inclination in the front-rear direction. In this case, the four support surfaces 241-244 of the rotor 230 have a common shape. Therefore, the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge passage 264 in the same manner even if it is transported while contacting any of the support surfaces 241-244. The probability that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA and the probability that it is located on the rear side (game board 210 side) are the same as the game ball B1. It is constant regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 that are in contact.

For all the support surfaces 241 to 244, the case where the game ball B1 conveyed while contacting is located on the front side of the game area PA and enters the first through gate 35 without contacting the sorting nail 271, and the game area It is possible to have a configuration in which both the case where it is located on the rear side of the PA and comes into contact with the sorting nail 271 and comes out of the first through gate 35 is possible. As a result, in the vicinity of the dividing nail 271, the player's interest in the behavior of the game ball B1 can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in a configuration in which the supporting surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 do not have an inclination in the front-rear direction, the game board 210 may be configured in such a manner that the dividing nail 271 is not provided. In this case, the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 is not affected by the longitudinal position of the game ball B1. The discharged game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 with a high probability. However, the distance from the discharge passage 264 to the first through gate 35 is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the passage width at the lower end of the discharge passage 264 is wider than the game ball B1 by one turn or more, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 shifts to one of the left and right directions, and there is a possibility that the first through gate 35 will not win. There is

In this way, instead of providing the sorting nail 271 on the game board 210, a structure in which the relationship with the first through gate 35 in the discharge passage 264 is adjusted is adopted so that all the discharged game balls B1 are placed in the first position. It may be configured to avoid winning the through gate 35 .

- In the above-described second embodiment, the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 220 may be configured so that the sorting nail 271 does not exist in the middle of the course toward the first through gate 35 . The first through gate 35 is provided at a location spaced apart from the outlet 256 of the adjusting mechanism 220 by a diameter of the game ball B1 or more. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 ejected from the ejection port 256 may come off the first through gate 35 depending on the ejection direction and the ejection speed of the game ball B1 from the ejection port 256 . The positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 220 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 is disengaged from the first through gate 35. The behavior of the game ball B1 can also attract the player's interest.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The configuration around the first through gate 35 in the game board 320 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a front view of the game board 320 showing the first through gate 35 and the configuration above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 47, the game board 320 has an adjustment mechanism 330 above the first through gate 35 . The adjustment mechanism 330 discharges the game ball B1 while guiding the game ball B1 so as to fall toward the first through gate 35. - 特許庁In the adjustment mechanism 330, the timing at which the game ball B1 can be ejected occurs in a cycle of 1 sec.

By generating the winning timing already described in the first embodiment at a cycle of 1 sec, it is possible to generate a non-winning continuous period when the winning timing does not overlap with the winning target period of the general electric open lottery. , when the winning possible timing overlaps with the winning target period, a continuous winning period can be generated. A detailed configuration of the adjusting mechanism 330 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the distance between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the distance between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. On the game board 320, above the left side of the first through gate 35 and below the adjusting mechanism 330, a part of the game ball B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 330 is removed from the path toward the first through gate 35. An adjustment peg 376 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 47 , the adjusting nail 376 is positioned to the left of the course of the game ball B1 that flows downward from the adjusting mechanism 330 and enters the first through gate 35 . Further, the adjusting nail 376 protrudes from the front surface of the game board 320 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). For this reason, the game ball B1 flowing down a course deviated to the left collides with the adjustment nail 376 regardless of the position in the front-rear direction in the game area PA (FIG. 3).

When the ejection direction of the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 330 is directly downward, the ejected game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 without contacting the adjustment nail 376.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the ejection direction of the game ball B1 deviates to the left from the bottom, the ejected game ball B1 contacts the adjustment nail 376. - 特許庁As described above, since a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 coming into contact with the adjustment nail 376 is removed from the first through gate 35. .

To prevent the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 from becoming monotonous and a player bored by avoiding all the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 from entering the first through gate 35.例文帳に追加can be done.

The adjusting mechanism 330 takes the game ball B1 into the adjusting mechanism 330 and guides it toward the first through gate 35. located in As shown in FIG. 47, in the game board 320, upstream of the adjusting mechanism 330, a plurality of downstream guide pegs 371 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from above to the adjusting mechanism 330 are provided.

On the game board 320, downstream guide nails 371 are arranged to form a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper right side of the adjusting mechanism 330 to the catchable range of the adjusting mechanism 330, and the adjusting mechanism 330. and a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side of the control mechanism 330 to the catchable range of the adjustment mechanism 330. Here, as shown in FIG. 47, the area sandwiched between the two rows on the game board 320 is defined as a downstream guide area 371a. The downstream guide nails 371 arranged in two rows guide the game ball B1 flowing down the downstream guide area 371a toward the upper portion of the adjustment mechanism 330. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 47, an electric nail 361 that can move left and right is provided in the upper vicinity of the row of downstream guide nails 371 on the right side. Above the electric nail 361 is an upstream guide nail 372 for guiding most of the game balls B1 flowing down in the area on the left side of the center frame 57 (FIG. 3) on the game board 320 to the electric nail 361. are provided multiple times.

In the area on the left side of the center frame 57 on the game board 320, upstream guide nails 372 are arranged, so that the game ball B1 flowing down the right side of the area is located below the upper part of the area. A row for guiding toward the nail 361 and a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the area toward the electric nail 361 positioned below are provided. As shown in FIG. 47, the area sandwiched between the two rows is an upstream guide area 372a.

The width of the upstream guide area 372a is wide at the upper part of the upstream guide area 372a and gradually narrows downward, and the game balls B1 are arranged in a line at the lower part of the upstream guide area 372a (near the electric nail 361). By becoming, it is an interval that can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 47, the electric nail 361 is connected to a nail driving portion 361a, which is an electric actuator such as a solenoid, via a link mechanism (not shown). It takes a permission position that permits entry between two rows of downstream guide nails 371 and a prohibition position that prohibits game ball B1 from entering between two rows of downstream guide nails 371 . Here, the relationship between the position of the electric nail 361 and the path of the game ball B1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b).

FIG. 48(a) is a front view of the game board 320 showing an enlarged periphery of the electric nail 361 at the permission position, and FIG. 48(b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the electric nail 361 at the prohibited position. 4 is a front view of a board 320; FIG. As shown in FIG. 48(a), the electric nail 361 assumes the permission position when the driving signal of the nail driving section 361a is at the LOW level. The electric nail 361 in the permission position is located to the upper right of the downstream guide nail 371 located at the upper right end of the downstream guide region 371a, and the upstream guide nail 372 located at the lower right end of the upstream guide region 372a. is located at the bottom left of the

First, the case where the electric nail 361 is in the permission position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48(a), the right area of the downstream guide area 371a exists below the left area of the upstream guide area 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed downward from the left area of the upstream guide area 372a enters the right area of the downstream guide area 371a. In addition, the electric nail 361 in the permission position exists below the right side area of the upstream guide area 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the right side of the upstream guide area 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and enters the downstream guide area 371a.

Next, a case where the electric nail 361 is in the prohibited position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48(b), the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position exists below the left side area of the upstream guide area 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the left region of the upstream guide region 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and flows down to the right of the downstream guide nail 371.例文帳に追加In addition, the lower part of the right side area of the upstream guide area 372a hits the right side of the downstream guide area 371a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the right region of the upstream guide region 372a flows down to the right of the downstream guide region 371a.

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), the distance between the electric nail 361 at the permission position and the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a, and the electric nail 361 at the prohibition position and the upstream guide The distance between the area 372a and the upstream guide nail 372 at the left lower end is set slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not caught between the electric nail 361 and the upstream guide nail 372.例文帳に追加Also, the distance between the electric nail 361 at the permission position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide region 371a, and the distance between the electric nail 361 at the prohibition position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide region 371a. is narrow enough to prevent the game ball B1 from entering. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not caught between the electric nail 361 and the downstream guide nail 371.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 47, a nail 24b is provided above the left side of the downstream guide area 371a to prevent the game ball B1 flowing leftward from the upstream guide area 372a from entering the downstream guide area 371a. is provided. Therefore, the game ball B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a is limited to the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guide area 372a. In this way, the game ball B1 entering the downstream guide area 371a is limited to the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guide area 372a, and the electric nail 361 moves down from the upstream guide area 372a by moving to the prohibited position. It is a configuration that can guide the incoming game ball B1 to the right side of the downstream guide area 371a. As a result, the frequency at which the game ball B1 enters the downstream guide area 371a and is taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 can be controlled.

The drive signal for the nail driver 361a is a periodic signal in which the HI level is repeated for 0.2 sec at intervals of 0.8 sec. Therefore, the electric nail 361 is in the prohibited position for 0.2 sec out of 1 sec. When two or more game balls B1 that can be fired at an interval of 0.6 sec from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) try to enter the downstream guide area 371a in a row, there is a high probability that out of the two game balls B1 collides with the electric nail 361 that has moved to the prohibited position, and flows down the right side of the downstream guide region 371a. By using the electric nail 361, it is suppressed that a plurality of game balls B1 are connected to enter the downstream guide area 371a and be taken into the adjustment mechanism 330.例文帳に追加

Next, a detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 will be described below. As shown in FIG. 47, the adjusting mechanism 330 includes a rotating body 340 that conveys the game ball B1 from the top to the bottom of the adjusting mechanism 330, and rotates the rotating body 340 clockwise. The adjustment drive unit 184 and the rotating body 340, which have already been described in the embodiment, are provided on the right side, and the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 is discharged before discharge so that it goes toward the first through gate 35 and a guide member 350 that guides the direction. The adjustment drive unit 184 applies a driving force to the rotating body 340 so that the rotating body 340 rotates once every 6 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 47, the rotating body 340 includes a substantially disc-shaped rotating body main body 342 and six plate-like blade members 343 projecting radially from the outer periphery of the rotating body main body 342. ing. The rotor main body 342 and the blade member 343 are resin members. The game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 330 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 330 while being supported from below by one of the blade members 343 that constitute the rotating body 340 .

First, the configuration of the rotating body 340 in the adjusting mechanism 330 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the rotor main body 342 has six rotating shafts 344 on its outer circumference. The rotating shaft 344 is provided at an angle orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 320 . The blade member 343 is fixed to the outer circumference of the rotating body main body 342 so as to be rotatable counterclockwise about the rotating shaft 344 . The six blade members 343 are identical members having the same shape and size, and are arranged on the outer circumference of the rotating body main body 342 at regular intervals in the rotation direction.

As shown in FIG. 47 , an adjustment drive section 184 is arranged behind the rotating body main section 342 . The front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 is parallel to the front surface of the game board 320, and the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 extends forward in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184. The rotating body main body 342 is connected to the output shaft 184a such that the axis of the rotating body main body 342 is aligned with the output shaft 184a of the adjustment driving section 184. As shown in FIG. When the adjustment driving portion 184 is driven, the rotating body main portion 342 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60° per second. When the rotating body 340 is attached to the game board 320, the rotating body main part 342 extends from the vicinity of the front surface of the game board 320 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

Here, a manner of fixing the blade member 343 to the rotating body main body 342 will be described. As shown in FIG. 47 , the initial state of the blade members 343 is a state in which the blade members 343 protrude radially from the outer edge of the rotor main body 342 . A recess (not shown) is formed around the rotating shaft 344 to prevent the blade member 343 in the initial state from rotating clockwise around the rotating shaft 344 . Even if an external force acts on the blade member 343 in the initial state to rotate the blade member 343 clockwise, the blade member 343 is in contact with the wall of the recess, and thus the blade member 343 rotates. do not do.

An unillustrated biasing member (for example, a torsion coil spring) is mounted around the rotating shaft 344 . When the blade member 343 is in the initial state, the biasing member is in a natural state where it is not deformed. It becomes deformed. A restoring force of the biasing member acts on the blade member 343 in the displaced state to return to the natural state from the deformed state. The blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise and enters a displaced state when a force is applied from the outside, and rotates clockwise by a restoring force when the force is removed from the outside and returns to the initial state. return to

Next, the configuration of the guide member 350 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 has a plate-like base body 351 . In addition, on the right side of the rotating body 340 in the game board 320, a recess for fixing (not shown) is formed in which the base body 351 can be accommodated without a gap. The guide member 350 is fixed by nailing the base body 351 to the game board while the base body 351 is accommodated in the fixing recess. When the guide member 350 is attached to the game board 320 , the front surface of the base body 351 is on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 320 .

As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 has an upright wall 352 vertically protruding forward from the front surface of the base body 351 . The upright wall 352 extends to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 . The upper end of the standing wall 352 is located above the upper end of the rotating body 340 , and the lower end of the standing wall 352 is located at approximately the same height as the lower end of the rotating body main portion 342 .

As shown in FIG. 47, the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 facing the rotating body main body 342 with a gap therebetween is a gently arched curved surface that is recessed toward the right. The distance from the rotor main body 342 to the standing wall 352 is set longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. In addition, the distance from the upper end of the standing wall 352 to the blade member 343 located closest to the upper end is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 regardless of the rotation state of the rotating body 340.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the adjustment mechanism 330, the area sandwiched between the rotor main body 342 and the standing wall 352 is defined as an adjustment area 330a. In the lower area of the adjustment area 330a, the distance from the blade member 343 to the standing wall 352 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. As already explained, the blade members 343 protrude in the radial direction of the rotating body 340 from the peripheral surface of the rotating body 340 at intervals of 60°.

Therefore, one of the blade members 343 of the rotating body 340 always exists in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a. Then, the game ball B1 flowing down the adjustment area 330a always comes into contact with the blade member 343 existing in the lower area of the adjustment area 330a. By adopting a configuration to prevent the game ball B1 entering the adjustment area 330a from passing through without contacting the blade member 343, the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 enters the first through gate at a timing other than the discharge timing. 35 can be prevented from being discharged.

Here, the manner in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment area 330a will be described with reference to FIGS. 49(a) to 49(c). 49(a) to (c) are front views of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 330 and its periphery.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), in the lower area of the adjustment area 330a, the game ball B1 is supported from below by the blade members existing in the area. Then, as the rotating body 340 rotates, it is conveyed to the discharge position below. The game ball B1 is conveyed in contact with the standing wall 352, thereby guiding the course of the game ball B1 in the adjustment area 330a.

Above the first through gate 35, the game ball B1, which is in a state of being supported by the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352, rotates the rotating body 340, and as shown in FIG. When the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 supporting B1 and the lower end of the standing wall 352 becomes wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 moves downward from the gap toward the first through gate 35. to fall.

As already explained, the adjustment drive unit 184 (FIG. 47) rotates the rotating body 340 at a rotational speed of one revolution every 6 seconds. For this reason, in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 330, the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 and the lower end of the standing wall 352 changes from a state shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Timing occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. In this way, the adjustment mechanism 330 can discharge the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1 sec.

The game ball B1 entering the adjustment area 330a contacts the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 while having downward velocity. Therefore, when the game ball B1 collides with the blade member 343 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily out of contact with the blade member 343 . Further, when the game ball B1 collides with the standing wall 352 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily out of contact with the standing wall 352. - 特許庁As shown in FIG. 49(c), when the game ball B1 is not in contact with the blade member 343 or the standing wall 352 and the ejection timing is reached, the game ball B1 is ejected at a timing slightly delayed from the ejection timing. The Rukoto.

In this case, since the rotating body 340 continues to rotate even after the discharge timing is reached and before the timing when the game ball B1 is actually discharged, the course of the game ball B1 after discharge shifts to the left. As already explained, between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35, a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided. As a result, the game ball B1 flowing down a course deviated to the left collides with the upper right side of the adjusting nail 376 provided on the upper left side of the first through gate 35, and rebounds to the right side to the first through gate. It can deviate from 35.

Next, the case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50(a) to (c). 50(a) to (c) are front views of the game board 320 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 330 and its periphery.

When the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a at the timing when the distance from the free end of the blade member 343 to the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352 becomes substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B1, as shown in FIG. Then, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 50(a), even when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352, the rotating body 340 continues to rotate clockwise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(b), as the rotor 340 rotates, a force is applied to the blade member 343 to rotate the blade member 343 counterclockwise. As a result, the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 344 to be in a displaced state.

A biasing member (not shown) acts on the blade member 343 in the displaced state to restore the blade member 343 to its initial state. However, the restoring force of the biasing member acting on the blade members 343 in the displaced state is a weak force that enables the blade members 343 to return to the initial state when no external force is applied to the blade members 343 . Therefore, the force pushing the game ball B1 to the right when the blade member 343 in the displaced state tries to return to the initial state is not so strong as to completely stop the movement of the game ball B1.

As the rotation of the rotating body 340 progresses, the amount of displacement of the blade member 343 increases. During this time, the game ball B1 falls slowly downward due to its own weight. The falling speed of the game ball B1 in contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 is lower than the speed at which the blade member 343 advances in the rotational direction as the rotating body 340 rotates. Therefore, as the rotating body 340 rotates, the free end of the blade member 343 is positioned below the game ball B1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the force applied from the game ball B1 to the blade member 343 is released, and the blade member 343 returns from the displaced state to the initial state. The game ball B1 is conveyed while being supported on the upper surface of the blade member 343 which has returned to the initial state, and is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35 without deviation from the discharge timing of the 1-sec cycle. becomes possible.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The adjustment mechanism 330 directs one game ball B1 guided to the adjustment area 330a toward the first through gate 35 at the discharge timing of the 1 sec cycle regardless of the timing at which the game ball B1 is guided to the adjustment area 330a. to discharge. Therefore, in the upstream of the adjustment area 330a, the game ball B1 can be discharged at the discharge timing of the 1 sec cycle without adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a. For this reason, compared with the configuration of adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a, it is possible to generate winning consecutive periods in the low-frequency support mode while reducing the processing load on the main side CPU 63.

When the game ball B1 is captured by the adjusting mechanism 330, if the game ball B1 is caught between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the standing wall 352, the rotating body 340 is deformed and the game ball B1 is caught. It is a configuration that eliminates the state of being stuck. Therefore, a situation in which the game ball B1 is stuck between the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352 and the rotating body 340 cannot be rotated is avoided. can do. This reduces the possibility that a problem occurs during the game and that the game needs to be interrupted to solve the problem.

The deformation of the rotating body 340 that is performed to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is pinched is a configuration that is performed by rotating the rotating body 340 . For this reason, it is not necessary to previously provide a dedicated member to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is caught. As a result, an increase in the number of members forming the adjustment mechanism 330 can be suppressed, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330 can be reduced.

The deformation of the rotating body 340 performed to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is caught is automatically performed in the same state as the control of the rotating body 340 in the state in which the game ball B1 is not caught. . Therefore, the control means of the pachinko machine 10 does not need means for grasping that the game ball B1 is in the sandwiched state. As a result, when the game ball B1 is pinched, compared to the structure that changes the control state of the rotating body 340 to eliminate the pinched state of the game ball B1, the member constituting the adjustment mechanism 330 can be suppressed, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 330 can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 330 can be reduced.

Between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35, a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided. In addition, the game board 320 is provided with an adjusting nail 376 that prevents the game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35 when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 deviates from a predetermined course. It is Therefore, all the game balls B1 that have entered the adjustment area 330a enter the first through gate 35, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player pays no attention to the discharge of the game balls B1 in the adjustment mechanism 330. Thus, by attracting the interest of the player until the first through gate 35 wins, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The game board 320 has an electric nail 361 that prevents one of the game balls B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a when two game balls B1 are connected to enter the downstream guide area 371a. is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a plurality of game balls B1 are guided to the adjustment area 330a at once.

The number of game balls B1 that can be shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is one every 0.6 sec, and the number of game balls B1 that can be ejected from the adjustment mechanism 330 is one every sec. Therefore, when the number of game balls B1 entering the adjustment area 330a continues to be greater than the number of game balls B1 moving from the adjustment area 330a to the adjustment area 330a, the game balls B1 stay in the adjustment area 330a. there is a possibility. On the other hand, the electric nail 361 is used to limit the game ball B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a located upstream of the adjustment area 330a, so that the game ball B1 stays in the adjustment area 330a. Possibility can be reduced.

The electric nail 361 has a width through which one game ball B1 can pass, and is provided upstream of a downstream guide area 371a that guides the game ball B1 to the adjustment area 330a. The electric nail 361 is configured to move between a permission position that permits the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide area 371a and a prohibition position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a. is. Then, the electric nail 361 moved to the prohibited position moves the game ball B1 blocked from entering the downstream guide area 371a to the right side of the downstream guide area 371a. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 takes the prohibited position, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying around the electric nail 361.例文帳に追加Thus, by appropriately distributing the game balls B1 upstream of the adjustment area 330a, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls B1 from entering the adjustment area 330a in a row.

<Another form in the third embodiment>
- In the above-described third embodiment, the configuration for limiting the number of game balls B1 entering the downstream guide area 371a is not limited to the electric nail 361. For example, as the configuration, an adjustment rotating body having a protrusion may be used. Depending on the rotation state of the adjustment rotor, the projection of the adjustment rotor takes a permission position for permitting the entry of the game ball B1 into the downstream guide region 371a, and the entry of the game ball B1 into the downstream guide region 371a. may take a prohibited position. Therefore, it is possible to limit the number of game balls B1 that enter the downstream guide area 371a by using the adjustment rotating body that rotates at a constant speed.

- In the above-described third embodiment, the game ball B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 330 may be configured so that the adjusting nail 376 does not exist in the course toward the first through gate 35 . The first through gate 35 is provided at a location separated from the adjustment mechanism 330 by a diameter of the game ball B1 or more. Therefore, depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330, the discharged game ball B1 may come off the first through gate 35. The positional relationship between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 is displaced from the first through gate 35. The behavior of the game ball B1 can also attract the player's interest.

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the game board 420 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 430 for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 . The configuration of the adjusting mechanism 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game board 420 showing the periphery of the adjusting mechanism 430 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 51, the game board 420 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 430 above the first through gate 35 . The adjusting mechanism 430 is provided at a position separated from the first through gate 35 by a diameter of the game ball B1 or more. Specifically, the adjusting mechanism 430 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance of approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. A detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 51, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes a rotating body 440 that takes in and ejects the game ball B1, and a guide member 450 that adjusts the timing of ejection of the game ball B1 from the rotating body 440. there is Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes the adjustment driving section 184 already described in the first embodiment. The adjustment drive unit 184 in this embodiment rotates the rotating body 440 once every 6 seconds.

First, the structure of the rotor 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. FIG. 52 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the rotating body 440 and the adjusting drive section 184 when the rotating body 440 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420. FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the rotating body 440 includes a substantially disk-shaped passage forming portion 443. The passage forming portion 443 has three adjustment passages 444 each having a passage width through which the game ball B1 can pass. ~446 are formed. The rotating body 440 takes in the game ball B1 into one of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 and discharges it from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 that took in the game ball B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the rotating body 440 is behind the passage forming portion 443, and is a rotating base body that prevents the game ball B1 in the adjustment passages 444 to 446 from moving further rearward than the front surface of the game board 420. 441 is provided. The rotation base body 441 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member having a predetermined thickness, and is integrally formed with the passage forming portion 443 .

As shown in FIG. 52, the game board 420 is formed with a recess 421 that rotatably accommodates the rotation base 441 . rotatably fixed. The passage forming portion 443 extends from the front surface of the rotating base body 441 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 .

As shown in FIG. 52, behind the rotation base body 441, an adjustment drive section 184 having an output shaft 184a is arranged. The rotating body 440 is connected to the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive section 184 so that the axis of the rotating base body 441 is aligned with the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive section 184. As shown in FIG.

The axis of the rotating base 441 of the rotating body 440 is perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420, and the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60° per second by driving the adjustment drive unit 184. Rotate. The same stepping motor as the adjustment drive unit 184 in the first embodiment is used for the adjustment drive unit 184 in this embodiment. The adjustment driving unit 184 is configured such that the output shaft 184a rotates once when 500 pulses of the excitation signal are transmitted from the main controller 60, and the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step. is 0.72°.

As shown in FIG. 51, the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 is formed with three entrances 444a to 446a as openings that open outward. The three entrances 444a to 446a are formed such that the centers of the entrances 444a to 446a are equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the passage forming portion 443. As shown in FIG. The three entrances 444a to 446a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 in order of first entrance 444a→second entrance 445a→third entrance 446a.

The first entrance 444a and the second entrance 445a have a width of 14 mm, which is larger than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball B1. On the other hand, the third entrance 446a has a width of 11.5 mm, which is smaller than the first entrance 444a and the second entrance 445a and larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The first adjustment passage 444 is formed from the first inlet/outlet 444a toward the central region of the rotor 440, and the second adjustment passage 445 is formed from the second inlet/outlet 445a toward the central region of the rotor 440. . Also, the third adjustment passage 446 is formed from the third inlet/outlet 446a toward the central region of the rotating body 440. As shown in FIG.

The first adjustment passage 444 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width widens gradually toward the first entrance/exit 444a near the first entrance/exit 444a. Similarly, the second adjustment passage 445 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width widens gradually toward the second entrance 445a near the second entrance 445a. On the other hand, the third adjustment passage 446 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width is gradually narrowed near the third entrance 446a toward the third entrance 446a.

If the configuration is such that the shapes near the three entrances 444a to 446a are all the same, the movement of the game ball B1 ejected from the rotating body 440 becomes monotonous. On the other hand, by making the shape of the vicinity of the third doorway 446a different from the shape of the vicinity of the first doorway 444a and the second doorway 445a, the player's response to the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 is reduced. You can increase your attention.

As shown in FIG. 51, the first adjustment passage 444, the second adjustment passage 445, and the third adjustment passage 446 formed in the passage forming portion 443 are straight passages that open forward. As shown in FIG. 52, the rear sides of the three adjustment passages 444 to 446 are defined by the front surface of the rotary base body 441, and the front sides thereof are defined by the rear surface of the window panel 52. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 51, at the center of the passage forming portion 443, an intersection space 443a which is slightly larger than the game ball B1 is provided. The first adjustment passage 444 is a passage connecting the first entrance 444a and the intersection space 443a, and the second adjustment passage 445 is a passage connecting the second entrance 445a and the intersection space 443a. Also, the third adjustment passage 446 is a passage that connects the third entrance/exit 446a and the intersection space 443a.

The game ball B1 can move from each of the adjustment passages 444-446 to the intersection space 443a, and can also move from the intersection space 443a to each of the adjustment passages 444-446. In addition, each of the adjustment passages 444-446 has a passage length capable of accommodating two game balls B1.

As shown in FIG. 51, the passage widths of the adjustment passages 444-446 are constant except for the vicinity of the entrances 444a-446a. Here, the reference line passing through the center of the first adjustment passage 444 is referred to as a first center line 444b, and the reference line passing through the center of the second adjustment passage 445 is referred to as a second center line 445b. A reference line passing through the center of the third adjustment passage 446 is defined as a third center line 446b.

The first adjustment passage 444 extends in a direction in which the first center line 444 b intersects the inner wall of the second adjustment passage 445 , and the second adjustment passage 445 extends along the inner wall of the third adjustment passage 446 along the second center line 445 b. extends in a direction that intersects the The third adjustment passage 446 extends in the direction in which the third center line 446 b intersects the inner wall of the first adjustment passage 444 .

That is, the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists at the destination of the game ball B1 that moves along the first adjustment passage 444, and the destination of the game ball B1 that moves along the second adjustment passage 445 is the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446 . Further, the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 exists at the destination of the game ball B1 moving along the third adjustment passage 446. - 特許庁Here, as shown in FIG. 51, each of the center lines 444b to 446b passes through the vicinity of the center of the passage forming portion 443. As shown in FIG.

Next, the guide member 450 provided on the game board 420 so as to approach the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 is provided on the lower right side of the rotating body 440. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 includes a plate-shaped guide base body 451 having a predetermined thickness. Further, the game board 420 is formed with a guide recess (not shown) capable of accommodating the guide base body 451 without a gap. The guide member 450 is fixed by nailing the guide base body 451 to the game board 420 while the guide base body 451 is housed in the guide recess. In a state in which the guide member 450 is fixed to the game board 420 , the front surface of the guide base body 451 exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 420 .

Further, the guide member 450 has an upright wall 452 projecting vertically forward from the front surface of the guide base body 451 . The standing wall 452 is integrally formed with the guide base body 451 and extends to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 51 , the standing wall 452 is formed along the outer periphery of the rotating body 440 from the right side to the lower right side of the rotation center 440 a of the rotating body 440 .

For this reason, the standing wall 452 changes from a rotating state in which one of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 is open to the right to a rotation state in which the entrances 444a to 446a are open obliquely downward to the right. The entrances/exits 444a to 446a are blocked until the time becomes clear. As a result, the game balls B1 existing at the entrances 444a to 446a are prevented from falling downward.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 around the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, on the game board 420, a guide nail 472 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from above to one of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 is provided near the upper part of the rotating body 440. are provided multiple times.

A left guide nail row 473 that guides the game ball B1 flowing down above the rotating body 440 and to the left of the center of the rotating body 440 by a plurality of guide nails 472 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440; A right guide nail row 474 is formed to guide the game ball B1, which is above the body 440 and flows down to the right of the center of the rotating body 440, toward the upper center of the rotating body 440.

The space between the lowermost guide nail 472 in the left guide nail row 473 and the lowermost guide nail 472 in the right guide nail row 474 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when any one of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided by the guide nail 472 enters from the entrances 444a to 446a.

As shown in FIG. 51, the distance from the lowermost guide nail 472 in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 to the outer circumference of the rotating body 440 is set slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. In a rotating state in which none of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 is open upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper part of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 enters the entrances 444a to 446a. I can't.

In this case, a clearance through which the game ball B1 can pass is provided between the lowermost guide nail 472 in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 and the outer periphery of the rotating body 440. , the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the rotating body 440 can escape to the left and right game areas PA of the rotating body 440 through the entrances 444a to 446a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that failed to enter the upper portion of the rotating body 440 does not stay.

As shown in FIG. 51, on the game board 420, the upper left side of the rotating body 440 has a doorway in which the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the diagonally upper left side of the rotating body 440 is open toward the upper left. A left guard nail 475 is provided to prevent balls from entering from 444a to 446a, and above the right side of the rotating body 440 is a game ball B1 that has flowed down from the upper right side of the rotating body 440. A right guard nail 476 is provided to prevent a ball from entering through the entrances 444a to 446a that are open toward the outside.

By the left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476, the entrances 444a to 446a through which the game ball B1 can be taken in are limited to the entrances 444a to 446a opened upward. This prevents a plurality of game balls B1 from being taken into the rotating body 440 from a plurality of entrances 444a to 446a at once.

As shown in FIG. 51, a space wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476 and the rotating body 440. As shown in FIG. For this reason, the game ball B1 that is guided to the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 430 by the left guide nail row 473 or the right guide nail row 474 and is not taken into the space between the rotating body 440 and the left guard nail 475, or the rotating body The space between 440 and right guard nail 476 can flow downstream.

As shown in FIG. 51, on the upper right side of the first through gate 35 and on the lower right side of the adjusting mechanism 430, the game balls B1 other than the game balls B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 430 are connected to the adjusting mechanism 430 and the first through gate. A guard nail 471 is provided to prevent entry into the first through gate 35 from between the gate 35 and the first through gate 35 .

By limiting the game ball B1 that can win the first through gate 35 to the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430, the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning target timing in the continuous winning period. You can prevent winning. As a result, it is possible to have a configuration in which general/universal electric open winnings are continuously generated in the general/universal electric open lottery executed during the winning continuation period.

On the other hand, at the upper left of the first through gate 35 and the lower left of the adjusting mechanism 430, a game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 toward the lower left and missing without winning the first through gate 35 is the first through. Guard pegs 471 are provided at intervals to allow escape to the left of gate 35 .

The guard nail 471 prevents game balls B1 other than the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 from flowing down from the upper left of the first through gate 35 and entering the first through gate 35.例文帳に追加Also, the game ball B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 430 and deviated leftward from the first through gate 35 does not collide with the guard nail 471 and rebound toward the first through gate 35 again.

Next, in the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 430, the movement of the game ball B1 entered from one of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 will be described. First, the movement of the game ball B1 entered from the first entrance 444a will be described with reference to FIGS. 53(a) to 53(d). 53(a) to (d) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

FIG. 53(a) shows a rotating state in which the first entrance/exit 444a is open upward. As shown in FIG. 53(a), the game ball B1 is guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) in a rotating state in which the first entrance 444a is open upward. As a result, the ball can enter the first entrance 444a. The game ball B1 entered from the first entrance 444a moves inside the first adjustment passage 444. As shown in FIG.

In a state in which the first entrance 444a is opened upward, the first adjustment passage 444 is inclined downward, and the game ball B1 is directed from the first entrance 444a upward to the intersection space 443a downward. invite. 51, the first centerline 444b of the first adjustment passage 444 intersects the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the moving direction of the game ball B1 moving in the first adjustment passage 444 is the direction of contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 53(b) shows the movement of the game ball B1 after being guided to the intersection space 443a. As shown in FIG. 53(b), the game ball B1 entered from the first entrance 444a passes through the first adjustment passage 444 having a passage length approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1 and reaches the intersection space 443a. Meanwhile, the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise.

Even if the rotating body 440 rotates, the positional relationship that the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists on the extension line of the first adjustment passage 444 does not change. Further, as already explained, the second entrance 445a is located at a position obtained by rotating the first entrance 444a about the center of the rotating body 440 by 120°. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(b), at the timing when the game ball B1 exists in the intersecting space 443a, the second adjustment passage 445 has an inclination from the intersecting space 443a to the right obliquely downward direction.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), after entering the intersecting space 443a from the first adjustment passage 444, the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 is guided to the second adjustment passage 445 and the second Head to the doorway 445a.

FIG. 53(c) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the second entrance 445a. As shown in FIG. 53(c), at the timing when the game ball B1 is guided to the second entrance 445a by the second adjustment passage 445, at least a portion of the second entrance 445a is blocked by the standing wall 452. As shown in FIG. At this timing, there is no gap in the second entrance 445a through which the game ball B1 can pass.

Therefore, the game ball B1 moves in the direction of rotation as the rotating body 440 rotates, and waits until a gap is created through which it can pass through the second entrance 445a. As already explained, the rotation speed of the rotating body 440 is constant. Also, the position of the standing wall 452 does not change. Therefore, in the state where the game ball B1 is waiting at the second entrance 445a, the timing at which a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass through the second entrance 445a is generated periodically.

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the second doorway 445a is already blocked by the standing wall 452 when the first doorway 444a is open upward. The standing wall 452 blocks at least a part of the entrances 444a to 446a when the entrances 444a to 446a are opened rightward, thereby preventing the game ball B1 from being discharged rightward. Therefore, the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 440 is not ejected from above the standing wall 452. - 特許庁

FIG. 53(d) shows the movement of the game ball B1 after a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass has been created in the second entrance 445a. As shown in FIG. 53(d), when a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass occurs in the second entrance 445a, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward due to its own weight.

The ejection timing at which a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is generated in the second entrance 445a and the ejection position at the ejection timing are constant. The adjustment mechanism 430 is set so that the ejection position is directly above the first through gate 35 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(d), the game ball B1 ejected from the ejection position at the ejection timing from the second entrance 445a drops downward and enters the first through gate 35. FIG.

However, at the discharge timing, the distance from the second entrance 445a to the first through gate 35 is set longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 ejected from the second entrance 445a has a high probability of winning the first through gate 35, but the winning probability is not 100%.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 entered from the third entrance 446a will be described. In the state where the third doorway 446a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) moves from the third doorway 446a to the third adjusting passage 446. enter the ball.

The inclination of the third adjusting passage 446 when the third inlet/outlet 446a is open upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjusting passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53(a). For this reason, the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 exists ahead of the moving direction of the game ball B1 moving in the third adjustment passage 446 .

The positional relationship between the third adjustment passage 446 and the first adjustment passage 444 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445 already described with reference to FIG. 53(b). Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the third adjustment passage 446 and entered the intersection space 443a contacts the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 and is guided toward the first entrance 444a.

As already explained, the shape of the first entrance 444a is the same as the shape of the second entrance 445a. Therefore, the ejection timing and ejection position of the game ball B1 ejected from the first entrance 444a are the ejection timing and ejection position of the game ball B1 ejected from the second entrance 445a already described with reference to FIG. 53(d). Same as position. The game ball B1 ejected from the first entrance 444a wins the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 entered from the second entrance 445a will be described. In the state where the second entrance 445a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) enters the second adjustment passage 445 from the second entrance 445a. enter the ball.

The inclination of the second adjustment passage 445 when the second inlet/outlet 445a is open upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjustment passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53(a). The positional relationship between the second adjustment passage 445 and the third adjustment passage 446 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjustment passage 444 and the second adjustment passage 445 already described with reference to FIG. 53(b). . Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the second adjustment passage 445 and entered the intersection space 443a contacts the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446 and is guided toward the third entrance 446a.

Here, the movement of the game ball B1 ejected from the third entrance 446a will be described with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b). 54(a) and 54(b) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 enlarged.

FIG. 54(a) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the third entrance 446a. As shown in FIG. 54(a), the game ball B1 is guided by the third adjustment passage 446 to the third entrance 446a. At the timing when the game ball B1 reaches the third entrance 446a, at least a portion of the third entrance 446a is blocked by the standing wall 452. The gap through which the game ball B1 can pass does not exist in the third entrance 446a. Therefore, the game ball B1 waits at the third entrance 446a until there is a gap through which it can pass.

FIG. 54(b) shows the movement of the game ball B1 ejected from the third entrance 446a. As already explained, the third entrance 446a is narrower than the first entrance 444a and the second entrance 445a. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is ejected from the third entrance 446a, the game ball B1 is likely to be affected by the passage wall present on the rear side of the third adjustment passage 446 in the rotation direction.

As already explained, there is a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the ejection position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35. FIG. As shown in FIG. 54(b), at the ejection timing of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is pushed leftward from the passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446, so that the course of the game ball B1 after ejection is It may shift to the left and come off the first through gate 35 . Therefore, the winning probability of the game ball B1 entered from the second entrance 445a and discharged from the third entrance 446a to the first through gate 35 is is lower than the winning probability of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 and the winning probability to the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 entering from the third entrance 446a and discharged from the first entrance 444a. .

Here, when the game balls B1 flow down in a row, both the first game ball B1 and the second game ball B1 face upward at the same entrance 444a to 446a. may enter the ball. In this case, the two game balls B1 are guided to the same entrances 444a-446a and discharged from the same entrances 444a-446a. The timing and direction in which the first game ball B1 is discharged is as already explained in FIGS. The game ball B1 which is drawn enters the first through gate 35 with a high probability, and the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance 446a deviates from the first through gate 35 with a high probability.

On the other hand, the second game ball B1 is located inside the rotor 440 relative to the first game ball B1 at the timing when the first game ball B1 is discharged. Therefore, the ejection timing of the second game ball B1 is delayed from the ejection timing of the first game ball B1. In this case, the second game ball B1 is discharged in a state in which the rotation of the rotating body 440 advances from the discharge timing of the first game ball B1 and the discharge direction moves leftward. . Therefore, the second game ball B1 deviates to the left of the first through gate 35 with a high probability regardless of which of the exits 444a to 446a is the discharge source.

In this way, even if the two game balls B1 flow down in a row in the game area PA, there is no possibility that the game ball B1 will win the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning target period in the continuous winning period. set to be low. Therefore, even when the adjustment mechanism 430 of the present embodiment is used, when the continuous winning period comes, the general electric open winning occurs continuously.

The adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotating body 440 so that the timing at which the game ball B1 can be ejected from the rotating body 440 occurs once every 2 seconds. By configuring the adjustment drive unit 184 to slowly rotate the rotating body 440, the game ball B1 colliding with the entrances 444a to 446a moving in the rotation direction in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430 is strongly directed to the right. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball is bounced back and the player feels uncomfortable.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The game ball B1 is taken into one of the adjustment passages 444 to 446, and is discharged from entrances and exits 444a to 446a different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 into which the game ball B1 is taken. In the structure in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held at the entrances 444a to 446a into which the game ball B1 is taken, the game ball B1 is prevented from falling from the entrances 444a to 446a during rotation. Fall prevention means provided around the rotating body 440 is required. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 is caught between the rotating body 440 and the fall prevention means, and the rotation of the rotating body 440 is hindered.

On the other hand, the game ball B1 passes through the inside of the passage forming portion 443 and is discharged from the entrances 444a to 446a different from the entrances 444a to 446a taken in, thereby causing troubles during the game. It is possible to reduce the possibility that it will be necessary to interrupt the Also, by suppressing an increase in the number of members that configure the adjustment mechanism 430, the configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the adjustment mechanism 430 can be reduced.

The rotating body 440 is configured to eject the game ball B1 before the entrances 444a to 446a, which have taken in the game ball B1 facing upward, become the direction in which the game ball B1 can be ejected. For this reason, compared with the configuration in which the rotor 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held at the entrances 444a to 446a into which the game ball B1 is taken in, the time required from taking in the game ball B1 to discharging it can be shortened. can be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 430 will be lowered due to the player's interest moving to another place between the time when the game ball B1 is taken in and before it is discharged.

The adjustment mechanism 430 is provided with an upright wall 452 that prevents the game ball B1 from falling downward until the game ball B1 guided to the entrances 444a to 446a reaches the first through gate 35 and can win a prize. . By using the standing wall 452, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls B1 that are ejected downward at a timing earlier than the ejection timing and deviate from the first through gate 35.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the continuous winning period, the possibility that the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 out of the winning target period is reduced, and the probability of winning open when winning occurs in the continuous winning period is increased. can be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the continuous winning period and improve the interest in the game.

Since the distance between the ejection position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball B1, depending on the ejection direction and ejection speed of the game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 430 , the ejected game ball B1 is removed from the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The width of the third entrance 446a is set narrower than the width of the first entrance 444a and the width of the second entrance 445a. For this reason, the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance 446a is out of the first through gate 35 is the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance 445a is out of the first through gate 35 The possibility that the game ball B1 taken in from the entrance 446a and the game ball B1 ejected comes off the first through gate 35 is higher. As a result, all the game balls B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 430 enter the first through gate 35, and the situation in which the player pays attention only to taking in the game balls B1 in the adjusting mechanism 430 and does not pay attention to discharge is avoided. be able to. By attracting the interest of the player until the moment the first through gate 35 is won, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The game ball B1 taken into the first adjustment passage 444 from the first entrance 444a is guided to the second adjustment passage 445 and discharged from the second entrance 445a, and from the second entrance 445a to the second adjustment passage 445 The game ball B1 taken in is guided to the third adjustment passage 446 and discharged from the third entrance 446a. Also, the game ball B1 taken into the third adjustment passage 446 from the third entrance 446a is guided to the first adjustment passage 444 and discharged from the first entrance 444a. In this way, since the game ball B1 taken in from the entrances 444a to 446a moves in the shortest distance through the combination adjustment passages 444 to 446 that can discharge the game ball B1, as the rotating body 440 rotates, It is possible to avoid a situation in which the taken-in game ball B1 is not ejected easily, and the rise and fall are repeated within the adjustment passages 444 to 446. - 特許庁This can prevent the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 toward the first through gate 35 from decreasing, and can prevent the player's interest in the adjusting mechanism 430 from diminishing.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for periodically supplying the game balls B1 to the first through gate 35 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The game board 520 of this embodiment is provided with an adjusting device 540 for adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The configuration of the adjustment device 540 and the periphery of the adjustment device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board 520 showing the periphery of the first through gate 35 and the adjusting device 540 in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 55, on the game board 520, above the first through gate 35, there is an adjusting device 540, and a part of the game balls B1 ejected from the adjusting device 540 and directed toward the first through gate 35 is the first An adjustment mechanism 530 including an electric nail 560 that prevents entry into the through gate 35 is provided. Here, the electric nail 560 is the same member as the electric nail 361 already described in FIG. 47 of the third embodiment.

First, the adjustment device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 55, the adjustment device 540 is in an open state to allow the entry of the game ball B1 into the adjustment device 540, and is in a closed state to permit the entry of the game ball B1 into the adjustment device 540. an adjustment unit 546 that prohibits the adjustment, an adjustment drive unit 547 that executes the transition from the closed state to the open state in the adjustment unit 546, and the transition from the open state to the closed state, and the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment device 540 and a guide member 541 for guiding toward the first through gate 35 .

As shown in FIG. 55, the adjusting device 540 has a plate-like base body 542 having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the game board 520 is provided with a recessed portion for base (not shown) capable of accommodating the base body 542 without a gap. The adjusting device 540 is fixed by nailing the base body 542 to the game board 520 while the base body 542 is housed in the recess for base. In the state where the guide member 541 is fixed to the game board 520 , the front surface of the base body 542 and the front surface of the game board 520 are on the same plane.

As shown in FIG. 55 , the guide member 541 has a passage forming portion 543 formed in such a manner as to vertically protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 542 . The passage forming portion 543 extends from the central portion to the lower portion of the front surface of the base body 542 in the vertical direction, and extends from the front surface of the base body 542 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). there is A guide passage 545 for guiding the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 is formed in the passage forming portion 543 .

The guide passage 545 is formed by providing a through hole vertically penetrating the passage forming portion 543 in the passage forming portion 543, allowing one game ball B1 to pass therethrough. , has a passage cross-section that makes it impossible for a plurality of game balls B1 to pass through at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 55, the guide passage 545 is a straight passage toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The guide passage 545 has a passage length approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and can direct the discharged game ball B1. The distance from the lower end of the guide passage 525 to the upper end of the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. Accordingly, there are cases where the player wins the first through gate 35 and cases where the player does not win the prize.

As shown in FIG. 55 , the adjustment portion 546 is provided above the base body 542 and forward of the front surface of the base body 542 . Further, the adjustment driving portion 547 is arranged behind the adjusting portion 546 and behind the base body 542 . The adjustment section 546 is connected to an adjustment drive section 547 mounted on the back side of the game board 520, and is driven by the adjustment drive section 547 to take either a closed state or an open state. When the adjustment portion 546 is closed, the game ball B1 cannot enter the guide passage 545, and when the adjustment portion 546 is opened, the ball can enter the guide passage 545.

The adjustment driver 547 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the drive signal output from the MPU 62 is input to the adjustment driver 547 . The adjustment drive unit 547 keeps the adjustment unit 546 closed when the drive signal is in the LOW state, and opens the adjustment unit 546 when the drive signal is in the HI state.

The main CPU 63 (FIG. 12), in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) executed at a 4 msec cycle, sends the adjustment drive unit 547 to The drive signal output to the adjustment drive unit 547 is raised from the LOW state to the HI state, and the drive signal output to the adjustment drive unit 547 is changed to HI on the condition that the adjustment unit 546 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. state to LOW state.

Based on the drive signal input from the main CPU 63, the adjustment drive unit 547 repeats the opening/closing operation of the adjustment unit 546, closing the adjustment unit 546 for 0.95 sec and opening the adjustment unit 546 for 0.05 sec. Therefore, the guide path 545 becomes capable of taking in the game ball B1 in a cycle of 1 sec, and can discharge the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 in a cycle of approximately 1 sec.

Here, the closed state and open state of the adjusting portion 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56(a) and (b). 56(a) is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the closed state, and FIG. 56(b) is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 56( a ), the adjusting portion 546 is positioned on the upper left of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542 , and has a left rotating shaft 548 extending in the front-rear direction and a left rotating shaft 548 that and a substantially rectangular left adjustment member 549 fixed in a rotatable manner. The left adjustment member 549 extends from the front surface of the game board 520 (FIG. 55) to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the left adjustment member 549 has a right side 549a located inside the adjustment portion 546 in the closed state and a left side 549b located outside. In the adjustment portion 546 in the closed state, the right side surface 549a and the left side surface 549b are inclined downward and leftward.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), the left adjustment member 549 rotates counterclockwise around the left rotation shaft 548 when the adjustment portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. In the open state of the adjusting portion 546, the left side adjusting member 549 has a right side 549a inclined downward to the right, and a left side 549b inclined downward to the right. state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the adjusting portion 546 is positioned on the upper right side of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and includes a right rotating shaft 551 extending in the front-rear direction and a right rotating shaft 551 extending in the front-rear direction. and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped right adjustment member 552 that is rotatably fixed to 551 . The right adjustment member 552 extends from the front surface of the game board 520 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 .

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the right adjustment member 552 has a left side 552a positioned inside the adjustment portion 546 in the closed state and a right side 552b positioned outside. In the adjustment portion 546 in the closed state, the left side 552a and the right side 552b are inclined downward to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), the right adjustment member 552 rotates clockwise around the right rotation shaft 551 when the adjustment portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. In the open state of the adjusting portion 546, the right side 552a of the right side adjusting member 552 is tilted downward to the left, and the right side 552b is tilted downward to the left. state.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the closed state adjusting portion 546, the distance between the upper end of the left adjusting member 549 and the upper end of the right adjusting member 552 is such that the game ball B1 cannot fit into the gap. narrow to some extent. And, as already explained, in the closed state of the adjusting part 546, the left side 549b of the left side adjusting member 549 is inclined downward to the left, and the game ball B1 in contact with the left side 549b is tilted downward to the left. escape. In addition, the right side 552b of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward to the right, and releases the game ball B1 coming into contact with the right side 552b to the lower right.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the adjustment portion 546 in the open state, the distance between the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. A wide space spreads out. As already explained, in the open state of the adjusting portion 546, the right side surface 549a of the left side adjusting member 549 is inclined downward to the right, and the game ball B1 in contact with the right side surface 549a is tilted downward to the right. The ball bounces back and enters the guide passage 545. - 特許庁In addition, the left side 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward to the left, and the game ball B1 coming into contact with the left side 552a is bounced downward to the left to enter the guide passage 545.

In addition, the distance between the upper end of the left adjusting member 549 and the upper end of the right adjusting member 552 gradually narrows in the process in which the adjusting portion 546 shifts from the open state to the closed state. The adjustment part 546 is configured such that the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 is directed downward to the left at the timing before the distance between the upper end of the left adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right adjustment member 552 becomes narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. In addition, the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is tilted downward to the right.

As shown in FIG. 55, the electric nail 560 is connected to the nail driving portion 560a, contacts the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525, changes the course of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 A prohibition position that prevents entry into the first through gate 35, and a permission position that allows the game ball B1 to enter the first through gate 35 by deviating from the path of the game ball B1 ejected from the guide passage 525. and take.

A nail driving signal output from the output port of the MPU 62 is input to the nail driving section 560a. The nail drive unit 560a keeps the electric nail 560 at the prohibition position when the nail drive signal is in the LOW state, and moves the electric nail 560 to the permission position when the nail drive signal is in the HI state. Switching of the electric nail 560 between the prohibition position and the permission position in the nail drive section 560a is performed in conjunction with switching between the closed state and the open state of the adjustment section 546 in the adjustment drive section 547. FIG.

Specifically, in the main CPU 63, the driving signal for nails is raised from the LOW state to the HI state in synchronization with the raising of the driving signal from the LOW state to the HI state. Therefore, the electric nail 560 moves from the prohibited position to the permitted position in synchronization with the timing when the adjusting portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. The electric nail 560 always takes the permission position while the adjusting portion 546 is in the open state. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting device 540 can enter the first through gate 35 during the period when the adjusting unit 546 is open.

In the main CPU 63, the driving signal for nails is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state at a timing later than the timing at which the driving signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. Therefore, the electric nail 560 returns from the permission position to the prohibition position with a slight delay from the timing at which the adjusting portion 546 returns from the open state to the closed state. When the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position, the game ball B1 entering the guide passage 525 within 0.04 sec from the start timing of the open state is permitted in the open state of the adjustment unit 546 that continues for 0.05 sec. This is the timing at which it is possible to pass through the left side of the electric nail 560 in position and enter the first through gate 35 .

In addition, the timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is such that the electric nail 560 is temporarily sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 before returning to the closed state, and then is introduced into the guide passage 525. This is the timing to prevent the game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35.

Here, the situation in which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment device 540 is prevented from entering the first through gate 35 by the electric nail 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57(a) to (d). 57(a) to (d) are front views of the game board 520 showing an enlarged view of the adjustment mechanism 530 and its periphery.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), when the game ball B1 enters the adjustment portion 546 in the intermediate state that shifts from the open state to the closed state, the game ball B1 moves between the right side 549a of the left side adjustment member 549 and the right side adjustment member. 552 and the left side 552a. In this state, the right side surface 549a of the left adjustment member 549 is inclined downward to the left, and the left side surface 552a of the right adjustment member 552 is inclined downward to the right; When the condition that the contact position with the adjustment portion 546 is above the center of gravity of the game ball B1 is satisfied, the pinched game ball B1 is pushed downward by the force of the adjustment portion 546 returning to the closed state. It is pushed into the guide passage 525 .

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 passes through the position of the electric nail 560. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 in the intermediate state collides with the electric nail 560 returning to the prohibition position downstream of the guide passage 525, and comes off to the left of the first through gate 35.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the shortest shooting interval of the game ball B1 in the game ball shooting mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 sec. The game balls B1 may flow down toward the adjusting section 546 of the adjusting device 540 in a state in which a plurality of balls are linked. As already explained, the duration of the open state of the adjusting section 546 is set to 0.05 sec. For this reason, when two game balls B1 are consecutively about to enter the adjustment section 546 for 0.05 sec, the first game ball B1 is pushed to the adjustment section 546 as shown in FIG. After entering the guide passage 525 in the open state, there is a possibility that the second game ball B1 is sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 that try to return from the open state to the closed state.

In this case, when the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting parts 546 enters the guide passage 525, the electric nail 560 reaches the position of the electric nail 560. in the permitting position in timing. Therefore, the first game ball B1 can pass through the left side of the electric nail 560 and enter the first through gate 35 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 reaches the position of the electric nail 560. Therefore, the second game ball B1 collides with the electric nail 560. - 特許庁In this way, the electric nail 560 prevents the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 from entering the first through gate 35. FIG. As a result, in the continuous winning period, the winning of the second game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is generated at a timing shifted from the winning target period, and it is avoided that the electric power open lottery is lost. can be done.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The adjustment mechanism 530 is configured so as not to allow the game ball B1 to enter the guide passage 525 when the adjustment portion 546 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at the timing when the general electric open winning is not achieved in the winning continuation period. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the electric power open winning during the continuous winning period. In this way, by heightening the player's expectations for the continuous winning period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The distance between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. An electric nail 560 is provided that moves between a prohibition position that blocks the path and a permission position that allows passage through the path. This configuration prevents the game ball B1 entering the guide passage 525 from entering the first through gate 35.

If all the game balls B1 taken into the guide passage 525 win the first through gate 35, the player may pay attention only to the game balls B1 taken in by the adjusting mechanism 530 and not to the discharge. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which some of the game balls B1 taken into the guide passage 525 are prevented from entering the first through gate 35, the player can make adjustments until the moment the first through gate 35 enters the prize. It is possible to maintain interest in the periphery of the mechanism 530 and improve the interest in the game.

After the first game ball B1 is taken into the guide passage 525 in the open state of the adjustment part 546, the adjustment mechanism 530 moves the second game ball B1 connected to the first game ball B1. When it is in a state of being sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 in the intermediate state, the electric nail 560 in the prohibition position prevents the second game ball B1 from entering the first through gate 35 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at the timing when the general electric open winning is not achieved in the winning continuation period. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the electric power open winning during the continuous winning period. In this way, by heightening the expectation of the player for the continuous winning period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Another Form in the Fifth Embodiment>
- In the above-described fifth embodiment, the adjustment drive unit 547 may not be provided, and the adjustment unit 546 may remain open and remain stationary. In this case, since the adjustment portion 546 does not take the closed state, the game ball B1 can enter the guide passage 525 at all times. The game ball B1 ejected from the guide passage 525 collides with the electric nail 560 when the electric nail 560 is in the prohibited position, and thus deviates from the course toward the first through gate 35. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric nail 560 is in the permission position, it is possible to pass the left side of the electric nail 560 and enter the first through gate 35 . For example, by setting the electric nail 560 to repeat the prohibited position for 0.95 sec and the permitted position for 0.05 sec by the nail drive unit 560 a , the adjustment mechanism 530 can move the first through gate 35 . It is possible to provide the game balls B1 at a cycle of 1 sec.

- In the above-described fifth embodiment, an escape path may be formed behind the game board 520 so that the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 can escape to the rear of the game board 520. - 特許庁Specifically, in the area of the game board 520 located behind the adjusting portion 546, a passage entrance is formed as an opening directed forward. The game board 520 has an escape passage for guiding downward the game balls B1 taken in from the passage entrance, and a passage exit for discharging the game balls B1 guided by the escape passage to the front of the game board 520.例文帳に追加

In the state where the adjusting portion 546 sandwiches the game ball B1, the right side surface of the left side adjusting member 549 is tilted rearward to the left, and the left side surface of the right side adjusting member 552 is tilted rearward to the right. It is tilted to the side. Therefore, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjustment portions 546 is guided to the passage entrance formed behind the adjustment portion 546 as the adjustment portion 546 shifts to the closed state. A game ball B1 entering the escape passage from the passage entrance is guided downward by the escape passage. The game ball B1 is ejected from the passage exit and positioned in front of the game board 520 again.

In the fifth embodiment described above, by adjusting the relationship between the guide path 525 and the first through gate 35, the case where the game ball B1 discharged from the guide path 525 wins the first through gate 35 and the winning prize It is good also as a structure which produces the case where it does not carry out. Specifically, the guide passage 525 is provided diagonally to the upper left of the first through gate 35, and a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35. ing. In this case, even if the electric nail 560 does not exist between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, the discharged game ball B1 is discharged from the guide passage 525 according to the speed at which the game ball B1 is discharged. A case where the ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 and a case where it does not win can be generated. By leaving the possibility that the game ball B1 ejected from the guide passage 525 may come off the first through gate 35, the behavior of the game ball B1 after ejection can also attract the attention of the player.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a second operation opening 582 is provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, and a distribution winning device 583 is provided below the second operation opening 582 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 580 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board 580. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located on the right side of the variable display unit 36. , and a lower area PA4 positioned below the variable display unit .

As described in the first embodiment, the first through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2, and the adjusting mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. The winning timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 can win the first through gate 35 occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. In addition, a win target period in which a general electric open winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first through gate 35 as a trigger also occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. Therefore, when the possible winning timing overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes a continuous winning period, and when the possible winning timing does not overlap with the target period, it becomes a non-winning continuous period.

As shown in FIG. 58, the game board 580 includes a passage entrance 171, an escape passage 172, a passage exit 173, and an exit roof 174 around the adjustment mechanism 180, like the game board 24 in the first embodiment. ing. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down toward the adjusting mechanism 180 but has not been taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage inlet 171 . Then, the game ball B1 is guided to the passage exit 173 by the escape passage 172, and discharged from the passage exit 173 toward the front of the game board 580. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 58, a first operating port 581 is provided in the lower area PA4. The first operating port 581 does not have a member for opening and closing the first operating port 581, and is open upward. As shown in FIG. 58, the variable display unit 36 has a stage 36a through which the game ball B1 can pass and through which the game ball B1 can be ejected. The variable display unit 36 is formed with a guide passage for causing the game ball B1 to flow into the stage 36a. A game ball B1 that flows onto the stage 36a and is discharged from the center of the stage 36a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 falls from directly above the first operating port 581 toward the first operating port 581.例文帳に追加Therefore, the game ball B1 ejected from the center of the stage 36a easily enters the first operation opening 581. As shown in FIG.

By providing the first operation port 581 in the lower area PA4, when the shooting operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and the right area PA3 In any case where the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down, the game ball B1 can enter the first operating port 581. However, when the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 36a is provided for the left side area PA2 and is not provided for the right side area PA3, the flow down the left side area PA2 leads to the flow down the right side area PA3. Winning to the first operation opening 581 is likely to occur as compared with . Also, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 24b in the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3 is such that the winning to the first operation opening 581 is more likely to occur when flowing down the left side area PA2 than when flowing down the right side area PA3. is set to The game ball B1 that has flowed down the right area PA3 hardly enters the first operation opening 581.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 58, a second actuation opening 582 is provided in the right area PA3. The second actuation port 582 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, and the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. It is provided so that a prize can be won when the shooting operation device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the second operating port 582 will be described with reference to FIG. 59(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second operating port 582. FIG. The second operation port 582 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 582a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The general electric accessory 582a is connected to the general electric drive unit 582b mounted on the back side of the game board 580, and is driven by the general electric drive unit 582b to enter the closed state shown in FIG. 59(a). and the open state shown in FIG. 59(b). In the closed state of the general electrical role 582a, the game ball B1 cannot enter the second operation port 582, and the general electrical role 582a is in the open state, thereby enabling the winning of the second operation port 582.例文帳に追加By the way, when it becomes an open state, the universal electric accessory 582a protrudes to the game area PA side, and guides the winning to the second operation opening 582. - 特許庁The second operating port 582 is provided with a detection sensor 582c for detecting the game ball B1 that has entered the second operating port 582 . The detection sensor 582c is connected to the input port of the MPU 62 (Fig. 12), and the main CPU 63 (Fig. 12) detects the winning of the second operation opening 582 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 582c. .

As shown in FIG. 58, a second through gate 39 is provided above the second operating port 582 in the right area PA3. The second through gate 39 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, and the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. It is provided at a position where a prize can be won when the shooting operation device 28 is operated. The second through gate 39 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has entered the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after winning. Thereby, it is possible for the game ball B1 that has entered the second through gate 39 to enter the second operation opening 582 . The second through gate 39 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 that has entered the second through gate 39 . The detection sensor is connected to the input port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) detects winning to the second through gate 39 based on the detection information from the detection sensor.

As already explained in the first embodiment, when the game ball B1 wins into either the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39, the electric open lottery is executed. Then, when the general electric open lottery wins, the general electric accessory 582a of the second operating port 582 is switched from the closed state to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special figure display portion 584 and a second special figure display portion 585 are provided at the bottom right of the game board 580 . In the first special figure display unit 584, the winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operation port 581 as a trigger, and the pattern is displayed in a variable display or a predetermined display, and the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. will be In addition, in the second special figure display unit 585, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of a prize to the second operation opening 582 as a trigger, so that the fluctuation display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed, and the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. is done.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special figure reservation display portion 586 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display portion 584, and a second special figure display portion 585 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display portion 585. A special figure reservation display unit 587 is provided. In the first special figure reservation display part 586, the number of game balls B1 that have won the first operation opening 581 is displayed with a maximum of four, and in the second special figure reservation display part 587, the second operation opening 582 Up to four winning game balls B1 are reserved and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the lower area PA4, the special electric prize winning device 32 already described in the first embodiment is provided at a position below the first operation port 581 and above the out port 24a. It is The special electric prize winning device 32 is operated when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, and when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible in any of the cases.

As shown in FIG. 58, a distribution winning device 583 is provided below the second operation opening 582 in the right area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, the distribution prize winning device 583 does not win a prize, and the shooting operation device makes the game ball B1 flow down the right side area PA3. 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

A winning lottery is executed when a prize is won in either the first operation port 581 or the second operation port 582 . If the winning lottery results in a big win, the opening/closing execution mode already described in the first embodiment is entered. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state, and the winning of the game ball B1 to the special electric prize winning device 32 becomes possible. In addition to the big win result, the small win result is also provided in the winning lottery that is executed when the second operation opening 582 is won. When a small winning result is obtained in the winning lottery executed with the winning to the second operation port 582 as a trigger, the game shifts to a branch execution mode in which winning to the distribution winning device 583 is possible.

Here, the distribution winning device 583 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b). 60(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the distribution winning device 583 viewed from the side, and FIG. 60(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the distribution winning device 583 viewed from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the distribution winning device 583 is formed with a distribution entrance 591 having a size that allows the game ball B1 to pass through, and the game ball B1 passes through the distribution entrance 591. A distribution side opening/closing member 592 is provided for switching between a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot pass and an open state in which the game ball B1 can pass. The opening/closing member 592 on the sorting side is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the drive unit 593 for the sorting entrance. The distribution entrance 591 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 594, and the game ball B1 flowing in from the distribution entrance 591 flows down the guide passage 594 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), the guide passage 594 is bifurcated from its midway position, and constitutes one of an upstream region 595 forming the upstream side of the branching position and a downstream region of the branching position. and a discharge area 597 that constitutes the other on the downstream side of the branch position. In addition, at the branch position, a shutter 598 is provided as a distribution means for distributing the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position from the upstream area 595 to either the V winning area 596 or the discharge area 597 . When the shutter 598 is not driven by the shutter drive section 599, the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 597, and the shutter 598 is driven by the shutter drive section 599. Then, the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 596. FIG.

A detection sensor 595a for counting is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball B1 that has flowed into the upstream area 595 always passes. When the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor 595a for counting, the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the winning to the distribution prize winning device 583 is executed. A detection sensor 596a for V winning is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball B1 that has flowed into the V winning area 596 always passes. When the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor 596a for V winning, the special electric winning device 32 is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, a detection sensor 597a for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball B1 that has flowed into the area 597 for ejection always passes. Based on the detection results from the ejection detection sensor 597a and the V winning detection sensor 596a, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 remains in the distribution winning device 583.

Incidentally, the driving timing of the drive unit 599 for the shutter is set so that the game ball B1 that has won the distribution prize device 583 is guided to the V prize area 596 with a probability of 80%. is arbitrary, and a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of being guided to the discharge area 597 is higher. However, in order to increase the advantage of winning in the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the second operating port 582, the probability of shifting to the branch execution mode based on the winning to the second operating port 582 and the distribution winning device The shutter 598 is shaken so that the product of the probability that the game ball B1 winning 583 flows into the V winning area 596 is higher than the probability of winning in the big hit lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 581. It is preferable that the minute probability is set. For example, the probability of being guided to the V winning area 596 is preferably set higher, and it is more preferable to be guided to the V winning area 596 with a probability of 75% or more and less than 100%.

Further, the distribution winning device 583 is preferably formed so that it is possible to visually recognize from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to which of the V winning area 596 and the ejection area 597 the winning game ball B1 is distributed. More specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the distribution winning device 583 is formed transparently or colorlessly.

In the branch execution mode, when the game ball B1 enters the distribution winning device 583, flows into the V winning area 596, and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 597a, V winning occurs. On the other hand, in the branch execution mode, when the game ball B1 is not detected by the detection sensor 597a for V winning, V winning does not occur.

Next, the winning lottery in this embodiment will be described. First, an electrical configuration for performing a winning lottery by the main side CPU 63 (FIG. 13) will be described.

The pending storage area 65a (FIG. 13) of this embodiment comprises a first pending area and a second pending area. In the first reservation area, each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 (FIG. 13), the jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 13), and the reach random number counter C3 (FIG. 13) according to the winning history to the first operation port 581 combination is stored as the reservation information, and the second reservation area is the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 according to the winning history to the second operation port 582. This is an area where a combination of information is stored as pending information.

Up to four winning histories are reserved and stored in each of the first reservation area and the second reservation area. Each numerical information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area is moved to the execution area AE (FIG. 13). At the start of one game cycle, the main CPU 63 executes a winning lottery based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Next, various tables used for winning lottery will be described. The main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a low-frequency left table, a regular right table, and a non-regular right table as tables used in the winning lottery.

In each winning lottery table, the probability of a big winning result is set to be the same. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the high probability mode and the low probability mode described in the first embodiment are not set, and the main ROM 64 has a low frequency left table, a regular right table, and One type of right side table for non-regular use is stored.

First, the low frequency left side table will be described. When the support mode of the second operating port 582 is the low frequency support mode, the holding information stored in the first holding area when the winning to the first operating port 581 occurs as low frequency left holding information do. The low-frequency left side hold information includes information indicating that it is the hold information stored during the low-frequency support mode and that it is the hold information stored based on the winning of the first operation port 581. there is The low frequency left side table is a table read when the pending information stored in the execution area AE is the low frequency left side pending information.

Only the big win result is set in the low frequency left table, and the small win result is not set. In the low-frequency left table, a high-frequency result of the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode and a low-frequency result of the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode are set as the jackpot results.

In the low-frequency support mode, when a prize is won in the first operation port 581 and a jackpot result is obtained in a winning lottery based on the prize, the jackpot result this time is a high-frequency result and the above first implementation When "1" is not set to the high frequency flag described in the form, "1" is set to the high frequency flag. Further, when the current jackpot result is a low-frequency result and the high-frequency flag is set to "1", the high-frequency flag is cleared to "0". When the winning lottery results in a big win, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, when the high frequency flag is set to "1", the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the high frequency support mode, and the value of the high frequency flag is set to "0". , the support mode of the second operating port 582 is the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the regular right table will be described. The hold information stored in the second hold area when a prize is won in the second operation port 582 in the high-frequency support mode is defined as regular right-hand hold information. The right-hand reserved information for regular use includes information indicating that the reserved information is stored based on the winning to the second operating port 582 and that the winning to the second operating port 582 has occurred due to the regular flow. include. The regular right reserved information is also stored in the second reserved area when a prize is won in the second operation port 582 during the consecutive winning period of the low-frequency support mode. The regular right table is a table that is read when the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the regular right hold information.

Here, the regular flow means that the game ball B1 is shot toward the right area PA3 when either the high-frequency support mode or the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode is reached. It is the game flow in which the operations are performed. On the other hand, the flow of the game in which the operation of shooting the game ball B1 toward the right area PA3 is performed in the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode is defined as the irregular flow.

The right side table for regular is set with a big win result and a small win result. The above-described high-frequency results and low-frequency results are set as the jackpot results in the regular right table.

In the regular right table, the probability of occurrence of a small winning result is set so that a small winning result is obtained with a probability of approximately 100% when a big winning result is not obtained. It should be noted that the probability of occurrence of a small winning result when a big winning result is not achieved may be set to 100%. A high frequency small winning result and a low frequency small winning result, which will be described later, are set in the regular right table as small winning results.

Winning to the second operation port 582 occurs in either the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and in the case of a jackpot result in the winning lottery based on the winning, this jackpot result is a high frequency result and the high frequency flag is not set to "1", the high frequency flag is set to "1". In addition, when the big win result of this time is a low frequency result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". When the winning lottery results in a big win, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Also, in the case of a small hit result in this winning lottery, if the result of this small hit is a high frequency small hit result and the high frequency flag is not set to "1", the high frequency "1" is set in the flag. Further, when the current small winning result is a low frequency small winning result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". When a small winning result is obtained in the winning lottery, the above-described branch execution mode is entered, and when V winning occurs in the branch execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, when the high frequency flag is set to "1", the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the high frequency support mode, and the value of the high frequency flag is set to "0". , the support mode of the second operating port 582 is the low-frequency support mode. Further, when the branch execution mode ends without any V winning, the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". Therefore, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode after the branch execution mode.

As already explained, by entering the winning continuation period in the low-frequency support mode, it becomes a state in which the electric power open winning with the second operation port 582 in the open state occurs continuously. In this case, the winning lottery triggered by winning the second operating port 582 is the same as the winning lottery triggered by winning the second operating port 582 in the high-frequency support mode.

As already explained, the probability of a big win result in a winning lottery using the low frequency left table is the same as the probability of a big win result in a winning lottery using the regular right table. In addition, if the winning lottery using the left table for low frequency does not result in a big win, the result is a losing result, whereas if the winning lottery using the right table for regular use does not result in a big win, about 100 % probability to switch to branch execution mode. Therefore, the low-frequency support mode is a support mode more disadvantageous to the player than the high-frequency support mode.

Even in the low frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high frequency support mode, the same winning lottery as in the high frequency support mode is executed when the winning continuous period comes. As already explained in the first embodiment, the player is not notified of the timing of occurrence of the continuous winning period. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the player may be in an advantageous state at an unexpected timing. In this way, in the low-frequency support mode, by making the player feel a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of the continuous winning period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, the non-regular right side table will be described. The holding information stored in the second holding area triggered by the winning of the second operation port 582 in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode is the non-regular right holding information. The non-regular right side reserved information indicates that the reserved information is stored with the winning of the second operation port 582 as a trigger, and that the winning of the second operation port 582 has occurred due to the non-regular flow. Contains information. The non-regular right side table is a table that is read when the pending information stored in the execution area AE is non-regular right side pending information.

A big win result and a small win result are set in the irregular right table. The jackpot results set in the irregular right table are the low frequency results described above, and the small hit results set in the irregular right table are the low frequency small winning results described above. In the irregular right table, the probability of occurrence of a small winning result is set so that a small winning result is obtained with a probability of approximately 100% when a big winning result is not obtained. It should be noted that the probability of occurrence of a small winning result when a big winning result is not achieved may be set to 100%.

If a prize is won in the second operating port 582 during the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, a winning lottery is performed. When the winning lottery results in a big win, or when a small win results, and when the mode is shifted to the branch execution mode and a V prize is generated, the high frequency flag value is kept at "0" and opened and closed. Go to run mode. Therefore, the support mode of the second operation port 582 becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode. Further, even when the branch execution mode ends without the occurrence of the V winning, the value of the high frequency flag is maintained at "0", and the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

A player who does not have an accurate grasp of the game flow may unintentionally execute the irregular flow described above. As already described in the first embodiment, the possibility of winning the general power open lottery in the low-frequency support mode is the public power open lottery in the high-frequency support mode. set lower than possible. Therefore, a situation in which a game is played in an irregular flow is more disadvantageous to a player than a situation in which a game is played in a regular flow, and a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game suffers a loss. becomes.

On the other hand, during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, even if the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3, the winning to the second operation opening 582 occurs. In such a case, it is possible to give relief measures to a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game by adopting a configuration in which the mode is shifted to the branch execution mode with a high probability. However, the low-frequency support mode is always set after the open/close execution mode executed in an irregular flow. As a result, it is possible to realize a configuration in which playing a game in an irregular flow after grasping the flow of the game does not lead to advantageous results for the player.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A winning lottery that is triggered by winning the second operation port 582 in the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, and a winning lottery that is triggered by winning the second operation port 582 in the high-frequency support mode A lottery is executed based on a common regular right table. In the low-frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high-frequency support mode, a state advantageous to the player is generated at a timing unexpected by the player, so that the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing are performed. It is possible to make the player have expectations for the high-frequency support mode after the execution mode.

In the situation of the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode, operating the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2 is better so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. This configuration is more advantageous for the player than when the shooting operation device 28 is operated. In the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, even when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3, when the winning to the second operation opening 582 occurs, This configuration is such that the opening/closing execution mode is entered with a high probability. For this reason, it is possible to give relief measures to inexperienced players who do not accurately grasp the flow of the game.

In the winning continuation period of the low-frequency support mode, there is a possibility of a high-frequency big win result and a high-frequency small win result in the winning lottery triggered by winning the second operation port 582 . In the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, rather than the winning lottery that is triggered by winning the second operation port 582, the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode is performed with the winning of the second operation port 582 as a trigger. A winning lottery to be won tends to result in an advantageous result for the player. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by making the winning continuation period attractive. In addition, when a player who understands the normal game flow dares to play the game in an irregular flow, the irregular flow is suppressed from leading to an advantageous result for the player.

<Another form in the sixth embodiment>
- In the sixth embodiment described above, when the branch execution mode ends without the occurrence of the V winning, the support mode of the second operation port 582 may not change before and after the branch execution mode. When a winning to the second operating port 582 occurs and a small winning result is obtained in a winning lottery based on the winning, the mode is shifted to the branch execution mode while maintaining the value of the high frequency flag. Then, when the V prize does not occur in the branch execution mode, the current value of the high frequency flag is maintained as it is.

In the high-frequency support mode, when the winning to the second operation port 582 occurs, the high-frequency flag is set to "1" at the time of the winning. The value of the high-frequency flag becomes a small winning result in the winning lottery, and is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without the occurrence of the V prize. In this case, the support mode of the second operating port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode.

Further, in the low frequency support mode, when the winning to the second operation port 582 occurs, the value of the high frequency flag is "0" at the time of the winning. The value of the high-frequency flag becomes a small winning result in the winning lottery, and is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without the occurrence of the V prize. In this case, the support mode of the second operating port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode.

As described above, when the branch execution mode ends without any V winning, the support mode before transitioning to the branch execution mode is maintained even after the branch execution mode. The continuous winning period in the frequency support mode can be made more advantageous to the player than the continuous non-winning period in the low frequency support mode and more disadvantageous to the player than in the high frequency support mode. While maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to set the winning continuation period as a state advantageous to the player in the low-frequency support mode.

・In the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode in the sixth embodiment described above, the winning lottery with the same content as the non-regular right side table is won in the winning lottery that is executed when the second operation port 582 is won. A configuration using a continuation table may be employed. The big win results set in the winning continuation table are only low frequency results, and the small winning results set in the winning continuation table are only low frequency small winning results. Therefore, even if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a winning lottery based on the winning succession table, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode does not become the high-frequency support mode.

The winning lottery that is triggered by winning the second operation port 582 in the winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode is the winning lottery that is executed when the second operation port 582 is won in the high-frequency support mode. , the winning lottery is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode can be maintained.

In the low frequency support mode, when the game is played in a regular flow, it can be expected that the opening and closing execution mode will be shifted to the opening and closing execution mode with the winning of the first operation port 581 as an opportunity, and when the winning continuous period is reached, the second It can be expected that the opening/closing execution mode will be triggered by the winning of the second operation opening 582 . On the other hand, when the game is played in an irregular flow, it can only be expected that the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the winning of the second operation opening 582 . In addition, the probability of occurrence of the electric power open winning, which is the condition for winning the prize to the second operation port 582, is low. For this reason, in the low frequency support mode, the superiority of playing the game in the regular flow over playing the game in the non-regular flow is maintained, and a player who understands the flow of the game intentionally Possibility of playing the game in a regular flow is reduced.

- In the above-described sixth embodiment, if a prize is won in the second through gate 39 in an irregular flow, the player may be warned to play the game in a regular flow. . A warning to the player is given when winning to the second through gate 39 occurs during the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, when the main CPU 63 detects that the second through gate 39 has won a prize, the main CPU 63 confirms that the value of the winning streak flag, which has already been described in the first embodiment, is "0", On condition that the value of the flag is "0", processing for transmitting a warning command to the sound emission control device 81 is executed. Upon receiving the warning command, the sound emission control device 81 sends a command to the display control device 82 to warn the player to operate the game ball shooting device aiming at the first through gate 35. It is displayed on the display surface 41 a of the pattern display device 41 . In addition, the sound emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to output a sound warning the player to operate the game ball shooting device aiming at the first through gate 35 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game will win a prize in the second operating port 582 in an irregular flow. Here, as already explained in the first embodiment, when the continuous non-winning period transitions to the continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, the consecutive winning flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the operation mode of the game ball shooting device is switched so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 with the arrival of the continuous winning period as a trigger, the player is not warned.

・In the above-described sixth embodiment, the opening state of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode performed in the irregular flow is different from the opening state of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode performed in the normal flow. may be The main side CPU 63, when the winning to the second operation opening 582 occurs, on the condition that the value of the winning continuation flag is "0" and the value of the high frequency flag is "0", this time '1' is set to the non-regular flag indicating that the winning is a non-regular winning. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the non-regular flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 executes the opening/closing operation of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the non-regular mode, and sets the non-regular flag to "1". is not set, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed in the regular mode. In the irregular mode, compared to the regular mode, the closing time from the end of the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32 to the next open state is set to be longer. Therefore, in the non-regular mode, the amount of game balls B1 consumed during the opening/closing execution mode is greater than in the regular mode. A shooting operation is performed so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, and the game ball B1 is discharged so as to flow down the right side area PA3 when the winning continuous period comes. The regular flow of switching the operation is more advantageous for the player than the irregular flow of performing the shooting operation so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3 in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player who knows the flow of the game from intentionally playing the game in an irregular flow.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for discharging the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 and the inclination of the opening of the first through gate 35 in the game board 610. FIG. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the adjusting mechanism 620 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The adjusting mechanism 620 periodically supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 . FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board 610 showing the first through gate 35 and the structure above the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610 of the present embodiment, an adjusting mechanism 620 is provided above the first through gate 35 in place of the adjusting mechanism 180 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the adjustment mechanism 620 of the present embodiment, the housing portion 181 includes the left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d described in the first embodiment, and accommodates the rotating body 183. It divides the storage space to be used.

The left upright wall 181h and the right upright wall 181d protrude forward from the front surface of the base body 181a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 61, the left upright wall 181h and the right upright wall 181d are spaced apart, so that the intake port 185 described in the first embodiment exists above the adjustment mechanism 620. , a discharge port 621 exists at the lower right portion of the adjustment mechanism 620 . As shown in FIG. 61, the outlet 621 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 61, the adjustment mechanism 620 includes the adjustment drive section 184 described in the first embodiment behind the rotating body 183 . The adjustment driver 184 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12). In the present embodiment, the adjustment drive unit 184 is supplied with a drive signal and enters a drive state, thereby slowly rotating the rotor 183 clockwise at an angular velocity of 90° for 5 seconds.

When one of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is opened upward at the intake port 185 located at the top of the adjusting mechanism 620, the adjusting mechanism 620 can take in the game ball B1. In addition, when any one of the recesses 183b to 183e is opened to the lower right at the ejection port 621 located at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 620, the adjustment mechanism 620 can eject the game ball B1. state.

The duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in at the intake port 185 and the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged from the discharge port 621 are determined depending on the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 . When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is slow, the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the intake port 185 and the discharge port 621 are open to the outside for a long time. Thereby, the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in and the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged is extended.

In this embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotating body 183 is set sufficiently slow so that the discharge port 621 can continue to discharge the game ball B1 until the discharge of the game ball B1 is completed. The flow in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port 621 is common even when the discharged game ball B1 is taken into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e. For this reason, hereinafter, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61, the game ball B1 captured in the first recessed portion 183b and conveyed clockwise in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a is discharged from the outlet 621 and the first recessed portion 183b at the lower right portion of the adjustment mechanism 620. are overlapped with each other, and when the first recessed portion 183b is opened downward to the right, it is discharged.

Specifically, even when the rotating body 183 rotates and the first recessed portion 183b begins to overlap the discharge port 621, the width of the region opened to the outside in the first recessed portion 183b is reduced to the width of the game ball. If it is narrower than the diameter of B1, the game ball B1 inside the first recessed portion 183b will not be discharged to the outside. In this state, the game ball B1 in the first recessed portion 183b is supported by the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b and the right standing wall 181d to prevent it from falling downward.

As the rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b supporting the game ball B1 and the right standing wall 181d becomes longer, so that the first recessed portion 183b is open to the outside. Wider area. When the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b and the right standing wall 181d becomes longer than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward.

When the rotation of the rotating body 183 is fast, in the discharge port 621, after the first recessed portion 183b is opened toward the outside, the rotating body As the rotation of the game ball 183 progresses, the game ball B1 being ejected is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the left standing wall 181h, or the first recessed portion 183b is opened to the outside before the game ball B1 is ejected. It may end. In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set sufficiently low. Therefore, the game ball B1 is ejected from the state in which the first recessed portion 183b is opened toward the outside until the state is terminated.

As already described in the first embodiment, the intake port 185 is an intake port capable of capturing the game ball B1 when one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is open upward. Allowed state. When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the duration of one intake-permitting state at the intake port 185 becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the capture permission state ends without the game ball B1 being captured in the concave portions 183b to 183e that are open upward. As a result, when the adjustment mechanism 620 reaches the ejection timing, it is possible to reduce the frequency in which there is no game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 620 toward the first through gate 35 .

As already explained in the first embodiment, the number of game balls B1 that can be taken into any one of the concave portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 during one take-in permission state is limited to one. . When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the frequency with which the adjustment mechanism 620 enters the take-in permission state per unit time decreases, so the number of game balls B1 that the adjustment mechanism 620 can take in per unit time also decreases. It will happen.

On the other hand, as already explained in the first embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 620 moves the game ball B1 that has flowed down near the inlet 185 between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181h, Alternatively, it can be discharged from between the nail 24b and the right upright wall 181d to the left and right spaces of the adjusting mechanism 180, and discharged toward the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171 provided behind the intake port 185. be able to. For this reason, even if the number of game balls B1 flowing down to the vicinity of the intake port 185 and not taken into the intake port 185 increases, the game balls B1 can be prevented from remaining near the intake port 185. - 特許庁

Also, as already explained, the discharge port 621 exists in the lower right part of the adjusting mechanism 620, and the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620 rotates 180° around the center of the rotating body 183. It is discharged to the outside at an earlier timing. The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620 never rotates around the center of the rotating body 183 by 180° or more. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has reached the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 620 will not rise again due to the rotation of the rotating body 183.

As shown in FIG. 61, the left upright wall 181h has an end surface 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 falling downward from the outlet 621. As shown in FIG. The end face 181i is inclined downward to the right, contacts the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621, and guides the game ball B1 to the lower right.

As already explained, the width of the discharge port 621 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, and is set relatively narrow. Therefore, it is possible to suppress variations in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 at the discharge port 621 to be small. In addition, since variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 is small, most of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 can be brought into contact with the end face 181i of the left upright wall 261. FIG. As a result, it is possible to suppress variations in the ejection direction of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 61 , on the game board 610 , the first through gate 35 is positioned below the discharge port 621 . The distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is set slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Due to the presence of a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 will come off the first through gate 35. There is For example, when the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 deviates to either the left or the right and the game ball B1 collides with the edge of the first through gate 35, the winning of the first through gate 35 occurs. may not.

By avoiding the configuration in which all the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enter the first through gate 35, the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 620 is avoided to be limited only to the capture of the game balls B1. can. In addition, by setting the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 short, the influence of the discharge speed of the game ball B1 on the timing when the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 wins the first through gate 35 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 61, the first through gate 35 of the present embodiment facilitates entry of a game ball B1 that is guided by the end surface 181i of the left upright wall 181h and falls toward the lower right at the discharge port 621. In order to do so, it is provided on the game board 610 in a manner inclined downward toward the left.

As shown in FIG. 61, at the outlet 621, the game ball B1 guided by the end face 181i of the left upright wall 181h and discharged downward to the right gradually corrects its course downward under the influence of attractive force. while falling. The inclination angle of the first through gate 35 is set so as to be substantially perpendicular to the course of the game ball B1 ejected from the ejection port 621 at the height position of the first through gate 35 . This increases the possibility that the game ball B1 will win smoothly without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35.例文帳に追加By preventing the game ball B1 from contacting the edge of the first through gate 35 just before winning the first through gate 35, the winning timing of the game ball B1 coming into contact with the edge of the first through gate 35 is shifted, The possibility that the game ball B1 will come off the first through gate 35 can be reduced.

As already explained, since the variation in the ejection start position and the variation in the ejection direction of the game ball B1 at the ejection port 621 is kept small, most of the game ball B1 ejected from the ejection port 621 is transferred to the first through gate 35. can be awarded smoothly.

Next, the winning determination value table for low frequency in this embodiment will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the low-frequency winning determination value table stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) includes the general electric open winning lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode. Winning determination value for the target is recorded. In the low-frequency winning determination value table of the present embodiment, the winning determination value set in the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 described with reference to FIG. are set to different values.

In the low-frequency win determination value table of the present embodiment, the win determination values for the general electric open lottery are set to (1250×n−5) to (1250×n). Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. The probability of winning the general electric open lottery in the low frequency support mode is approximately 1/210.

Winning determination values for public electric open winning are serial numbers in units of six. In addition, the update period of the random number for opening in the general electric role item opening counter C4 (FIG. 13) is 4 msec. Therefore, in the general electric accessory opening counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for opening becomes the winning determination value of the general electric open winning target in the general electric open lottery in the low frequency support mode continues over 24 msec.

In the low-frequency support mode, the winning target period in which the winning judgment value for the general electric open winning continues for 24 msec occurs at a cycle of 5 sec. As described above, the period at which the winning timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enters the first through gate 35 occurs is 5 seconds, which is the same as the period in which the winning target period occurs in the low-frequency support mode. be.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, when the winning timing overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes a winning continuation period in which the general electric open winning occurs continuously. The winning continuation period continues until the timing of occurrence of the winning target period is shifted due to the update of the initial value of the universal electronic accessory release counter C4. When the timing of occurrence of the winning target period is shifted, it becomes a non-winning continuous period in which the losing result continues in the general electric open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode until the winning target period and the winning timing overlap again.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The discharge port 621 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 taken in at the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 620 reaches before it rotates 180° around the center of the rotating body 183 . Also, in the discharge port 621, when the game ball B1 can be discharged from the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the adjustment drive unit 184 is set so that the state does not end before the discharge of the game ball B1 is completed. Drive controlled. As a result, the game ball B1 conveyed downward from the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 620 is prevented from rotating 180° or more around the center of the rotating body 183 and rising again.

The left standing wall 181h has an end face 181i that contacts the game ball B1 about to drop downward from the outlet 621 due to its own weight and guides the game ball B1 downward to the right. Also, the width of the discharge port 621 is set slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the width of the discharge port 621 is set to be relatively narrow, the variation in the discharge start position of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 is small, and most of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 are raised to the left. It can be brought into contact with the end surface 181i of the wall 261 and guided downward to the right. Therefore, it is possible to reduce variations in the ejection direction of the game ball B1 ejected from the ejection port 621. FIG.

The game ball B1 ejected from the adjustment mechanism 620 has a small variation in the ejection start position and a small variation in the ejection direction. Therefore, when the game ball B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 620 falls to the height position of the first through gate 35, variation in the moving direction is also small. The first through gate 35 is ejected from the adjustment mechanism 620 and downwardly directed to the left so that it becomes an opening perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the height position of the first through gate 35. Inclined. Therefore, the game ball B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 620 can be smoothly taken in without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35.例文帳に追加This prevents the game ball B1 from colliding with the edge of the first through-gate 35 immediately before entering the first through-gate 35, causing the winning timing to be deviated, and the game ball B1 to escape from the first through-gate 35.例文帳に追加

The distance from the discharge port 621 of the adjusting mechanism 620 to the first through gate 35 is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since there is a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35, all the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 enter the first through gate 35. can avoid becoming In addition, since the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is relatively short, even if the game ball B1 is discharged at different discharge speeds each time, the difference in the discharge speed is the winning timing to the first through gate 35. can be configured so as not to have a large effect on As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the prize winning timing to the first through gate 35 is shifted due to the difference in the ejection speed during the consecutive winning period, resulting in a situation in which the electric power open winning is not achieved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Also, the configuration of processing executed by the main CPU 63 to allow the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, these signals are input to different buffers. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as the high-frequency support mode signal. , the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

The thirteenth buffer 122m receives an open/close execution mode signal, the fourteenth buffer 122n receives a high-frequency support mode signal, the fifteenth buffer 122o receives a door open signal, and the The input of the output instruction signal to the 16 buffers 122p is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 can be configured to input these 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each is input to. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l whose signal types are to be recognized, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1701). After that, output processing of an identification start signal is executed (step S1702). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the output frequency information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output frequency information is set in the output frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( step S1703). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is output by the main CPU 63 .

In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball-entering section corresponding to the types of signals is determined. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l are grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry portion corresponding to the types of the signals.

In step S1703, if the value of the output counter for recognition is one of "12", "11" and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the output count counter. . Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a corresponding to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out. is set to "0". Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball-entering portion does not exist and is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0".

After that, output processing of a start opportunity signal is executed (step S1704). In the output process, by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level, the output of the start trigger signal is started. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1705: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output counter in step S1703, The process advances to step S1706. In step S1706, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the type identification signal is started to be output by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1707), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1708). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S1708: NO), the process returns to step S1706.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S1709). In the output process, by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level, the output of the termination trigger signal is started. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1710), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1711). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1711: NO), the process returns to step S1703 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S1711: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S1712). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is finished (step S1801: YES), the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES), the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 . If the type identification signal has been received (step S1804: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1805). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63 by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the value of the reception counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803.

When a negative determination is made in step S1804, or when the process of step S1805 is executed, it is determined whether or not a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1806). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1806: NO), the process returns to step S1804, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S1806: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1807). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception counter. Stores the value that is specified. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set with "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set with is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the area 123f. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence area 123g to 123l. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S1808).

When a negative determination is made in step S1803, or when the process of step S1808 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1809). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S1809: NO), the process returns to step S1803, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S1803: YES), the processes after step S1804 are executed. Run. If the identification end signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1809: YES), the history setting process in step S1810 and the external output process in step S1811 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 65 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 65(a) shows the period during which the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(b) shows the period during which the output state of the second signal is at HI level, and FIG. ) shows the period during which the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 65(d) shows the period during which the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 65(f) shows the period during which the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 65(g) shows the timing for adding 1 to the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114, and FIG. The timing at which the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S1807) is shown.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. , the open/close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, output of an identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. After that, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1801 of the management processing (FIG. 64), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 65(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65(a) from timing t3 to timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65(b) from timing t5 to timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t6, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 as shown in FIG. 65(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 65(c) from timing t8 to timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t9, as shown in FIG. 65(h), the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process. Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ” information.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at HI level as shown in FIG. 65(a) from timing t11 to timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the second timing is shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level as shown in FIG. 65(c) from timing t25 to timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t26, as shown in FIG. 65(h), the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process. Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information "10 ” information.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 65(c), 65(d), and 65(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW. level to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1809 of the management process (FIG. 64), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 65(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the entering ball section that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are a plurality of types of ball-entering parts with the same number of winning balls, the history information cannot distinguish between the ball-entering parts. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one for each of the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 . This makes it possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information even with the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the eighth embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, "15" is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to confirmation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door As for the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to this information without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. It's becoming In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a is the information that requires the main side CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a-118g to the management side CPU 112. Become. When the management side CPU 112 recognizes the correspondence information, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the trigger for executing various parameter calculations using history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 66 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 631 in addition to the above. In this embodiment, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time when a calculation trigger occurs, as will be described in detail later. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 631 . Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

Calculation triggers for various parameters occur before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to differentiate the timing of calculating various parameters from the timing of externally outputting them to the reading device, making it possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, since the calculation result memory 631 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also various parameters for multiple calculation triggers can be stored together. It is possible to store. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and a ninth buffer is input. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main side CPU 63 to provide the management side CPU 112 with a trigger for calculating various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, similarly to the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the signals. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for executing calculation of various parameters by the management CPU 112 in response to occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing power failure information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1901: YES), output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1902). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level. Thereafter, after the power failure processing is executed in step S1903, an infinite loop is entered and the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The power failure handling process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 34). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S1006: YES), history setting process, the external output process in step S1008, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 is HI level (step S2001: YES), in steps S2002 to S2006, the external output in the first embodiment Similarly to steps S1602 to S1606 of the processing (FIG. 40), the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . Further, in step S2007, similarly to step S1607 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated while the front door frame 14 is open. In step S2008, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1608 of the process for external output (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1609 of the process (FIG. 40). Then, information on the calculation result of step S2008 and information on the calculation result of step S2009 are written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2010). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S2011, similarly to step S1611 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of various types of balls entered during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S2012, the first Similar to step S1612 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S2013, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1613 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S2014 is written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2014). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631 . Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, in step S2015, similarly to step S1615 of the external output processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of hit balls in the high-frequency support mode is calculated, and in step S2016, the above-described Similar to step S1616 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in Embodiment 1, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S2017, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1617 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S2017 is written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2018). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631 . Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds. After that, an infinite loop is established, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the external output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2101: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S2102). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . In this case, if only the various computation results corresponding to one occurrence of the computation trigger are stored in the computation result memory 631, only the various computation results corresponding to the one occurrence of the computation trigger will be read by the reading device. When the memory 631 for operation result is read and various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of the operation opportunity are stored in the operation result memory 631, the various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of the operation opportunity are read by the reading device. .

Thereafter, history information output processing is executed (step S2103). In the output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it is possible for the operator using the reader to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clear processing is executed (step S2104). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, in the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 631 are cleared to "0". As a result, the computation result memory 631 is initialized.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written to the calculation result memory 631 . As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read by a reading device, the various parameters can be collectively read out for a plurality of business days.

When various parameters are written into the computation result memory 631, information that enables identification of when the various parameters were computed is written into the computation result memory 631 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters were calculated.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the trigger are written in the calculation result memory 631 . This makes it difficult for new history information to be written into history memory 117 when the maximum number of history information that can be stored has already been stored in history memory 117 .

Further, the information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be externally output. . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information to be output to the outside.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment in the processing configuration of the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration different from that of the ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management side CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2201: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2202). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S2002 to S2009, steps S2011 to S2013, and steps S2015 to S2017 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2202 is within the reference range (step S2203). in particular,
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) are set as parameters to be determined as to whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is judged that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2203.

Note that the predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as predetermined parameters. for example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number K2 of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, it may be determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range. Alternatively, only predetermined parameters to be determined in step S2203 may be calculated in various calculation processes in step S2202.

If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2203: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2202 are written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2204). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S2203: YES), the process of step S2204 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters are written to the calculation result memory 631 when the predetermined parameters are not within the reference range. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to keep the history thereof in the calculation result memory 631 while suppressing the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 631 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, or if the process of step S2204 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2205). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After the processing of step S2205 is executed, an infinite loop is entered and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 631. written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 631 can be reduced, and the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 631 can be reduced.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described ninth embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. The configuration different from that of the ninth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S2301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, addition processing of the entering ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2302). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is management output process (FIG. 36), based on the number of times step S1305 is executed. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2303). If it is "500" or more (step S2303: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2304). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2305). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

FIG. 72(b) is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the calculation process is a process executed instead of the power failure handling process in the ninth embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 34). The history setting process, the external output process in step S1208, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2401: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2402). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described eleventh embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. The configuration that is different from the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S2501). When a negative determination is made in step S2501, 1 is added to the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2502). The continuation counter counts the period during which a game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying in .

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2503: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2504). When the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2503. The stop reference value is set as follows. The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main CPU 63 should measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2505).

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, if the process of step S2504 is executed, or if the process of step S2505 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" ( Step S2506: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2507). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the operation instruction signal to HI level.

It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the instruction reference value (step S2508). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2508 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2509), and an operation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2510). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it becomes possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being executed from the calculation target of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive the various parameters in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Note that the RTC 115 may be used to measure whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed, instead of using the measurement counter.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that in the above-described first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. It is performed independently by the management side CPU 112 instead of . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the arithmetic processing is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1412 in the history setting processing (FIG. 37).

Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be processed is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, addition processing of the incoming ball counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2602). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is is specified based on the number of times the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball's entry is stored in the history setting process. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2603). If it is "500" or more (step S2603: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2605). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2002 to S2018 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless computation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number. In other words, the management side CPU 112 independently determines the calculation timing of various parameters. As a result, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced because it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the processing for determining the trigger for calculating various parameters.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the ninth embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 631 (see FIG. 66). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation results into the calculation result memory 631 . Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, and a high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating completion, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . sent to.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2701). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that it corresponds to one of the ball-entering sections. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode, and the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14. , information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13th correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2701, "13" is set to the check target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2702). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2703). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2704). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2703 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. FIG. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S2705). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and 1 is added to the numerical information. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2706).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2706: YES), various arithmetic processing is executed (step S2707). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2708). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 631, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, state information handover processing is executed (step S2709). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is the open/close execution mode, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. It is determined whether or not. Then, the status information is written in the management side RAM 114 .

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2710). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, after executing the clearing process, the status information written in the management side RAM 114 in step S2709 is read. Then, if the state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored, the history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. While writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. Also, when the state information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is on is stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is on is written. 125 and adds 1 to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written.

When a negative determination is made in step S2702, when a negative determination is made in step S2706, or when the process of step S2710 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2712). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2712: NO), the process after step S2702 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of pieces of history information that can be stored in the history memory 117 is exceeded and the various parameters cannot be calculated accurately.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information, which has already been the object of computation of various parameters, from becoming the object of computation of various parameters again.

Moreover, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the status information transfer process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 641 , a first status area 642 , a second status area 643 and a third status area 644 . These areas 641 to 644 are provided with first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o, respectively. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first counters 641a to 644a of the areas 641 to 644, respectively. The second counters 641b to 644b of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 641c to 644c of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 641d to 644d of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 641e to 644e of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 641f to 644f of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 641g to 644g of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 641h to 644h of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the ninth counters 641i to 644i of the areas 641 to 644, respectively. Tenth counters 641j to 644j in areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from LOW level to HI level. The eleventh counters 641k to 644k of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 641l to 644l of the areas 641 to 644, respectively. The thirteenth counters 641m to 644m of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourteenth counters 641n to 644n of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth counters 641o to 644o of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o are the outlet 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the results of ball entry into either the port 33 or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, eighth to eighth signals corresponding to state information such as whether the open/close execution mode is on, whether the high-frequency support mode is on, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2801). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counters are buffers to which status information signals are input (step S2802). Specifically, information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, status information setting processing is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal switches from HI level to LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the second state information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 111 . , and when the output state of the ninth signal switches from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and the third state information is erased from the management-side RAM 114 when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the data is stored in a buffer corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and to which a signal of information different from the status information is input. By confirming whether or not the numerical information stored has been changed from "0" to "1", whether the output state of the input signal from the main side CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2804). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2805). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth total counters 641 a to 641 o in the total area 641 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 641e is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 641a is subject to addition. .

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2806). If it is in the first state (step S2806: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S2807). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 642a to 642o for the first state in the first state area 642 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 642e for the first state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 642a for the first state is Subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the status information of the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second status, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2808). If it is in the second state (step S2808: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2809). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 643a to 643o for the second state in the second state area 643 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 643e for the second state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 643a for the second state is Subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2810). If it is in the third state (step S2810: YES), addition processing of the corresponding counter for the third state is executed (step S2811). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 644a to 644o for the third state in the third state area 644 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 644e for the third state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 644a for the third state is Subject to addition.

If the process of step S2803 is executed, if the determination is negative in step S2804, if the determination is negative in step S2810, or if the process of step S2811 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2812). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2813). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2813: NO), the process after step S2802 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of the game ball to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this way, the information on the number of times the game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored. A process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the game balls, a process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1604, and a process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 such as step S1605. The calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34, such as step S1606, are not required. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31, such as step S1603, the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c are all general winning holes. 31, it is necessary to perform a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c. Further, the number of balls that occur in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls that occur in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1612 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment. Similarly, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls that occurred in the high-frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 being opened from the number of balls that occurred in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1616 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 40) in this embodiment.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the storage means for storing history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117 unlike the first embodiment. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 631 as in the twelfth embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main side RAM65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I/F 111, and when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the entry history, and Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 631 . When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, while various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 631, the entry history stored in the main side RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process in this embodiment executed by the main side CPU 63 . The ball-entering detection process is executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2901: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2902). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 as a history of winning balls. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter will be stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 (step S2903).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects 1. It is determined that game balls have been detected (step S2904: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2905). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 (step S2906).

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state where the information "0" is stored to the state where the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2907: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2908). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2909).

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, one game is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S2910: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electric winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S2911). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2912). The special electric prize counter is a counter for storing the number of winning balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 as a history of winning balls. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special electric prize counter is stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main side RAM 65 (step S2913).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored for the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2914: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2915). Also, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2916). The first actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first actuation opening 33 as the entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is is stored. Then, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S2917).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2918: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2919). Also, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2920). The second actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second actuation opening 34 as the entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter is is stored. After that, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S2921).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 changes from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the outlet detection sensor 48a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2922: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2923). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as a history of entered balls. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. retained.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the first gate detection sensor 49a detects one game ball is detected (step S2924: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2925).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the eighth bit D8 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one bit is detected by the second gate detection sensor 50a. game ball is detected (step S2926: YES). In this case, the second gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2927).

By executing the ball-entering detection process as described above, the ball-entering history to the out-port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is It is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No output is required. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

In this embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads out the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main side RAM 65, read out the number of balls entered, read out the number of balls entered into the first working port 33 from the first operation counter of the main side RAM 65, read out the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 from the second operation counter of the main side RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read out from the out counter of the main side RAM 65 . Then, the first to eighth parameters described in the first embodiment are calculated using the read numbers of entering balls. However, the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured separately. Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated while including the number of balls that occur when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, since the number of hit balls in the open/close execution mode and the number of hit balls in the high-frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first to eighteenth and twenty-first parameters described in the first embodiment are to the 26th parameter are not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 631 . Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written in the calculation result memory 631 at that time are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 631 is cleared to "0".

Instead of the management IC 66 independently accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of hits stored as the history of hits in the main RAM 65 is transmitted to the management IC 66 under transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entry history to each ball entry section. ing. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 80 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. In addition to the MPU 62 , the main control board 61 is also provided with a notification light emitting section 651 . The notification light emitting unit 651 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63 . The main side CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and uses the information on the history of ball entry to each ball entry section read out from the history memory 117 to calculate various parameters. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The notification light emitting portion 651 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control device 60. The board box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting portion 651 can be seen from the outside of the board box 60a. A notification light emitting unit 651 is provided so that visual confirmation can be made from the outside. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 can be visually checked, so that the notification light emitting unit 651 can be operated without opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the.

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signals are input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121 . In other words, no signals related to ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 outputs to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o. The first buffer counter 652a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second buffer counter 652b. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the third buffer counter 652c. The fourth buffer counter 652d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the fifth buffer counter 652e. The sixth buffer counter 652f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh buffer counter 652g. The eighth buffer counter 652h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 652i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 652j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 652k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 652l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 652m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 652n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 652o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o are any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of hitting a ball into one are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing history setting processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level (step S3002). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first buffer 122a is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the corresponding buffer counters 652a to 652o are added (step S3003). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652 a to 652 o of the history memory 117 . For example, if the check target counter value is "5", the fifth buffer counter 652e is added, and if the check target counter value is "1", the first buffer counter 652a is added.

When a negative determination is made in step S3002, or when the process of step S3003 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3004). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3005). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S3005: NO), the process from step S3002 onwards is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of the game ball to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S3101: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 114 store the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652a. Among 652o, the management side CPU 112 sets the number of counters for which the frequency information is to be output (step S3102). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, so in step S3102, "7" is set to the output target counter. .

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read out (step S3103). Of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o in the memory 117, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value is read out (step S3104). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a-123o becomes the object of reading the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counter 652a-652o reads the number of times information. Be eligible. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the target for reading the correspondence information, and the fifth buffer counter 652e becomes the target for reading the frequency information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 652a becomes the target for reading the frequency information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S3105). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read out in step S3103 and the number of times information read out in step S3104 is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number-of-times information about the correspondence information to be output this time.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3106). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output object counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3107). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3107: NO), the process after step S3103 is executed for the output target corresponding to the new value of the output target counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S221 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, it is determined whether or not there is an opportunity to calculate various parameters (step S3201). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the output port 24a, the general winning port 31, and the special electric winning as in the eleventh embodiment. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, various parameters can be calculated by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 off once and then on again. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when the affirmative determination is made in step S3201, as will be described later, notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA by generating a calculation trigger each time the total number of game balls entering the game ball reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. becomes.

When the calculation trigger occurs (step S3201: YES), the entry history is read out from the entry history storage target counter among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o of the history memory 117. FIG. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 652a to 652g is read. In this case, the main side CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 652a to 652o from which the entry history is to be read by the programs and data stored in the main side ROM 64. FIG.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S3203). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S3202 and information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to store the ball entry history read out in step S3202 as the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the first operation port 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two operating ports 34 corresponds, and it is possible to specify information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each entry history read in step S3202.

Specifically, various parameters calculated in step S3203 are:
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the first range (step S3204). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are within the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3204. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, setting processing of the first notification state is executed (step S3205). In the setting process, light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 is performed so as to set the first notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 651 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3204, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the second range (step S3206). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters 2 range, an affirmative determination is made in step S3206. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S3207). In the setting process, light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 is performed so as to bring about the second notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 651 emits yellow light.

A negative determination in step S3206 means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S3208). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting portion 651 is in a red light emitting state.

The light emission state set in step S3205, step S3207, or step S3208 is until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 651, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 651 is stopped. continue until Since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is stored in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit 651 is turned off. 651 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main side RAM 65 is set. Light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 is executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The entry history of the game ball to the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 651 is provided for notifying contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 . As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself. It is possible to grasp the manner of entering the ball.

The main control board 61 accommodated in the board box 60a is provided with the MPU 62 and a notification light emitting section 651. As shown in FIG. As a result, unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 651 can be made difficult.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 are executed by the main CPU 63 instead of the management CPU 112 . This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the content of notification by the notification light emitting unit 651 .

When the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the first range, it becomes the first notification state, and when the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the second range, it becomes the second notification state, and the calculation result of various parameters becomes The third notification state occurs when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. In other words, instead of notifying the various parameters as they are, the content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is notified. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting portion 651 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting portion 651 .

Even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 651 is continued, and immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the ball entry state of the game ball in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 651. .

Further, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 651 is turned off, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Alternatively, the notification light emitting unit 651 may be controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 651 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball entered the previous business day.

The informing means for informing the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration in which the informing light emitting section 651 is used. may be Further, a configuration may be adopted in which signals corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal plate 97 .

The special figure display section 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the general figure display section 38a of the general figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting section 651. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or other range as in the above embodiment , Immediately after the start of supply of operating power, it may be configured to perform notification corresponding to the calculation result in the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the normal figure display unit 38a is satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which the process is temporarily interrupted when the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it is possible to double use the special figure display section 37a or the normal figure display section 38a as the notification means for notifying the entry state of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting part 651 may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 651 may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 from the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 . In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the operation to open the game machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 .

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration for providing the management IC 66 with information on each ball entry result. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main side CPU 63 and management IC 66. FIG.

The detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Also, the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Also, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation opening detection sensor 46a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching from the middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching from the middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main side CPU 63. FIG. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Since there is no need to do this, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and the branch routes SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the ejection adjusting means for periodically ejecting the captured game ball B1 is provided above the first through gate 35, but the arrangement of the ejection adjusting means is not limited to this. Here, the discharge adjusting means means the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first and sixth embodiments, the adjusting mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. , the adjusting mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjusting mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. For example, instead of the second through gate 39 in each of the above embodiments, there is an opening into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening that is open upward and switching between an open state and a closed state. In a game board provided with a second opening, which is an opening provided with a possible opening/closing means, the discharge adjusting means may be arranged above the first opening and the second opening.

Specifically, the first opening and the second opening are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board. The ejection adjusting means is located above the first opening, and only game balls ejected from the ejection adjusting means can enter the first opening. The opening/closing means for the second opening prohibits the game ball from entering the second opening in the closed state. A game ball is taken into the discharge adjusting means, and when the game ball is discharged from the discharge adjusting means and enters the first opening, the opening/closing means is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball is released. 2 It becomes possible to enter the ball into the opening. The opening state of the opening/closing means is continued for a predetermined period, and when the game ball enters the second opening a predetermined number of times during the predetermined period, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

In order to shift the opening/closing means from the closed state to the open state, the player needs to shoot the game ball aiming at the ejection adjusting means. In addition, in order for the game ball to enter the second opening a predetermined number of times, the player needs to shoot the game ball aiming at the second opening. In this way, the player aims and shoots the game ball, and when a predetermined result is achieved, the player is given a privilege advantageous to the player, thereby enhancing the player's sense of participation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, by restricting the ball entry timing of the game ball into the first opening using the discharge adjustment means, it is possible to avoid the situation where the opening/closing means is frequently opened. That is, by using the discharge adjusting means, it is possible to appropriately manage the interval at which the opening/closing means shifts to the open state.

(2) The discharge adjustment means in each of the above embodiments may be provided above the first operating port 33, and only one type of lottery mode may be provided by the win/fail lottery means. Here, the discharge adjusting means means the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first and sixth embodiments, the adjusting mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. , the adjusting mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjusting mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, the main side CPU 63 drives and controls the discharge adjustment means so that the discharged game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first operation opening 33 in the discharge adjustment means so that the dischargeable period occurs at a cycle of 1 sec. . The main-side ROM 64 stores a success/failure determination table in which determination values for winning a big hit are set in the success/failure determination process. As already explained, the success or failure determination process is a process of determining whether or not the pending information corresponds to the jackpot winning, and is executed in the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). It is a process that (1250×n−5) to (1250×n) are set in the success/failure determination table as determination values for winning the jackpot. Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. The probability of winning the jackpot after the success/failure determination process is executed is approximately 1/210. In the first operation port 33, the jackpot target period in which the reservation information acquired by winning the game ball B1 is the target of jackpot winning occurs at a cycle of 5 sec and continues over 24 msec. If the dischargeable period in the discharge adjustment means does not correspond to the jackpot target period, the jackpot result is not obtained in the win/fail determination process. In this case, by updating the initial value of the winning random number counter C1 (FIG. 13), there is a possibility that the dischargeable period corresponds to the jackpot target period. When the dischargeable period corresponds to the jackpot target period, the probability of winning the jackpot is high in the success/failure determination process. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge adjustment means toward the first operation port 33 without fail at a cycle of 1 sec, the winning to the first operation port 33 is performed at a rate of once every five times. Eligible for the jackpot. In this way, the ejection adjustment means creates a situation in which a jackpot winning is likely to occur and a situation in which it does not occur in the winning/failure determination process. It is possible to attract interest and improve the amusement of the game.

(3) The configuration for preventing the game ball B1 from rising and staying as described in the above embodiments may be applied to the member for allocating the game ball B1 to one of the two passages.

Specifically, the game board is provided with a distribution winning device. A winning lottery is executed when a prize is won in either the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 . Of these, when a small winning lottery is won in a winning lottery executed with the winning of a prize to the second operation port 34 as a trigger, the mode shifts to the allocation execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, when a V prize is generated, the special electric prize winning device 32 becomes an opening/closing execution mode in which it is in an open state.

The distribution winning device has an upstream passage, and the upstream passage branches into a V winning passage and a discharge passage in a branch space. The upstream passage, the V winning passage, and the discharge passage have a passage cross-section that allows one game ball B1 to pass through and prevents a plurality of game balls B1 from passing at the same time. there is Around the branch space, the upstream passage is formed in a straight line downward. In addition, the inlet of the discharge passage is provided in the vicinity of the branch space just below the outlet of the upstream passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 that has flowed straight down the upstream passage in the vicinity of the branch space moves downward as it is, it enters the discharge passage.

In the branch space, a switching member is provided below the upstream passage and above the discharge passage. The switching member includes a rotating shaft, a plate-like switching piece that rotates about the rotating shaft from an initial position to a displaced position, and a switching piece that switches from the initial position to the displaced position based on a signal from the main side CPU 63. and a switching drive unit for switching from the displacement position to the initial position. When the switching piece is in the initial position, the switching piece is in the first state extending downward. In the first state, the discharge passage is open upward. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down the upstream passage enters the discharge passage.

On the other hand, when the switching piece is at the displaced position, the switching piece is in the second state extending obliquely forward left. In the second state, since the switching piece exists above the discharge passage, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage comes into contact with the switching piece. In the second state, the contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined forward and downward. Therefore, the course of the game ball B1 that contacts the switching piece moves forward. The V winning path is formed in front of the discharge path in such a manner that the game ball B1 in contact with the switching piece in the second state enters. Therefore, when the switching drive section switches the switching piece to the displaced position, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream path is guided to the V winning path. The distribution winning device has a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 flowing down the V winning path, and when the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor, the V winning is achieved.

The V winning path is separated from the discharge path by a plate-like partition member. The displacement position of the switching piece is set so that the distance from the free end of the switching piece at the displacement position to the upper end of the partition member is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. This prevents the game ball B1 from entering the discharge passage through the gap between the switching piece and the partition member in the second state where the switching piece is in the displaced position. In this configuration, an intermediate state occurs in which the distance from the free end of the switching piece to the upper end of the partition member is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B1 while the switching piece is switching from the initial position to the displaced position. In the intermediate state, if the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage enters the gap between the rotating switching piece and the partition member, the game ball B1 may be caught between the switching piece and the partition member and stay there. There is

The configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, the distribution winning device includes an escape passage adjacent to the discharge passage on the left side of the discharge passage. The entrance of the escape passage is provided at a position lower than the upper end of the partition member. The contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is slanted leftward and rearward, and the wall surface on the side of the discharge passage in the vicinity of the upper end of the partition member is slanted forward and leftward. In other words, the two surfaces that come into contact with the game ball B1 in the intermediate state both have an inclination for pushing the game ball B1 toward the escape passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 is pushed out to the escape passage as the switching piece moves to the displaced state. As a result, the game ball B1 can be prevented from being caught without causing the game ball B1 to rise or stay in the distribution winning device. The escape passage joins the discharge passage at a midpoint of the discharge passage. In the intermediate state where the switching piece is switched, when the game ball B1 is pushed out toward the escape passage, the game ball B1 flows down the escape passage and is guided to a position in the middle of the discharge passage. The game ball B1 guided to the escape passage is not detected by the detection sensor provided in the V winning passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pushed out to the escape passage in the intermediate state, the V prize does not occur as in the case where the game ball B1 flows down the discharge passage.

The configuration described in the third embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 comes into contact with the blade member 343 and the standing wall 352, the blade member 343 rotates around the rotation shaft 344 as the rotating body 340 rotates, and the blade A configuration can be applied in which the pinching of the game ball B1 is avoided by the member 343 taking the displacement position. Specifically, the plate-like switching piece includes a fixed portion on the fixed end side and a rotatable portion on the free end side. A rotation shaft is provided on the free end side of the plate-shaped fixed portion, and the plate-shaped rotatable portion is connected to the fixed portion in a manner capable of rotating around the rotation shaft. When no external force is applied, the surface of the fixed portion of the switching piece is flush with the surface of the rotatable portion. The rotatable portion rotates downward when pushed downward from the outside, and returns to its original state by the restoring force of the urging member when the force from the outside is removed. When the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the rotatable portion rotates downward as the switching piece moves to the displaced position. The restoring force of the biasing member is not strong enough to prevent the game ball B1 in contact with the partition member and the rotatable portion from falling downward due to its own weight. Therefore, the game ball B1, which is temporarily in contact with the partition member and the rotatable portion, moves downward by its own weight and enters the discharge passage without being caught and stopped. In the switching piece at the displaced position, the length of protrusion of the fixed portion upward of the discharge passage is a length that allows the fixed portion alone to guide the game ball B1 to the V winning passage. When the game ball B1 falling from above collides with the rotatable portion while the switching piece is in the displaced position, the rotatable portion rotates downward. However, the distance from the free end of the rotatable movable portion to the upper end of the partition member is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 in both the non-rotating state and the rotating state of the rotatably movable portion. Therefore, when the switching piece is completely moved to the displaced position, the game ball B1 does not enter the gap between the free end of the rotatable portion and the upper end of the partition plate and enter the discharge passage. . As described above, the switching piece has a fixed portion, a rotating shaft, and a rotatable portion, and the rotatable portion is configured to be rotatable around the rotating shaft. It is possible to enter the ball into the passage for discharge without rising and stopping.

(4) In a game machine in which the second operating opening 34 is opened when a game ball B1 entering the trigger generating device is detected, the game ball B1 described in each of the above embodiments is applied to the trigger generating device. You may apply the structure for preventing a rise and stagnation of .

Specifically, the game area PA is composed of an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 of the variable display unit . A first actuation opening 33 is provided in the lower area PA4, and a trigger generator and a special opening apparatus are provided in the right area PA3.

In the right area PA3, the special opening device is arranged below the trigger generator. The trigger generating device includes a rotating body, an accommodating portion that accommodates the rotating body, a trigger generating driving portion that rotates the rotating body based on a signal from the main side CPU 63, and a game ball in the trigger generating region in the trigger generating device. and a trigger occurrence detection sensor that detects B1. The accommodation part has an upright wall for partitioning the accommodation space. In the upper part of the housing portion, the left standing wall and the right standing wall are separated, and the gap between the left standing wall and the right standing wall serves as the entrance of the trigger generating device. The entrance of the trigger generator is an opening that opens upward, and the width of the entrance is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The game ball B1 can enter the trigger generating device from the entrance. As the rotating body rotates, a state in which the game ball B1 can enter and a state in which the game ball B1 cannot enter occur at the entrance of the trigger generating device. The special opening device includes a special opening that opens upward, an opening/closing member that can open and close the special opening, A special drive section is provided for opening or closing the special opening by driving the opening/closing member based on a signal.

The main CPU 63 executes a jackpot lottery when a prize is won in the first operation port 33 . Triggered by a jackpot result in a jackpot lottery, the rights are generated. In the right generation state, when the game ball B1 enters the opportunity generation device and the game ball B1 is detected by the opportunity generation detection sensor, the opening/closing period of the special opening device is started. Then, the game ball B1 is put out when the ball enters the special opening that is in the open state. When a preset reference time elapses while the opening and closing operation of the special opening device is executed, and when the number of times the ball enters the special opening reaches the reference number of times, the opening and closing of the special opening device period ends. Of these, when a preset reference time elapses while the opening/closing operation of the special opening device is being performed, the second opening/closing operation is performed by the special opening device.

In this configuration, when a rotating body having one or more recesses capable of accommodating the game ball B1 is used as the rotating body of the trigger generating device, the rotating body and the rotating body stand up when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generating device. It may get stuck in the wall. On the other hand, the configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration.

Specifically, on the surface of the game board, a passage entrance is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the trigger generator. In addition, the game board is formed with an escape passage for escaping the game ball B1 entered from the passage entrance backward and downward. The rotating body is disc-shaped, and the peripheral surface of the rotating body, excluding the recessed portion, is inclined rearward in the axial direction. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the recessed portion in the upper portion of the trigger generating device is guided to the entrance of the passage along the inclination of the peripheral surface of the rotating body. In the upper part of the trigger generating device, the contact surface of the standing wall with the game ball B1 is inclined rearward and rightward. Also, the rotating body rotates clockwise. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pressed against the standing wall from the rotating body in the upper part of the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 is guided along the inclination of the standing wall and escapes toward the rear entrance of the passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body and the standing wall above the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance as the rotating body rotates. In this way, by applying the configuration for avoiding the pinching of the game ball B1 to the upper part of the trigger generating device, the game ball B1 rises or stops when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generating device. is avoided. The trigger generation detection sensor is provided inside the trigger generator, and can detect only the game ball B1 taken into the trigger generator. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance, the entry does not trigger the opening/closing operation of the special opening device.

The configuration described in the second embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252, the upper right standing wall 252 rotates around the rotation shaft 254 to take in the game ball B1. Any configuration that allows for this can be applied. Specifically, the standing wall includes a rotation shaft and a movable standing wall rotatable about the rotation shaft. A movable standing wall is located on top of the trigger generator and defines the right edge of the entrance to the trigger generator. The rotating body rotates clockwise. There is a possibility that the game ball B1 about to enter the opportunity generating device is in contact with the rotating body and the movable standing wall above the opportunity generating device. In this case, the game ball B1 is pushed rightward where the movable standing wall exists as the rotating body rotates. The movable standing wall can release the force of the rotating body pressing the game ball B1 against the movable standing wall by rotating around the rotating shaft. Further, the contact surface of the movable standing wall with the game ball B1 is inclined downward to the right. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pushed toward the contact surface by the rotating body, the movable standing wall rotates to the right, and the game ball B1 is guided by the inclination of the contact surface with the rotating standing wall. is captured by the trigger generator. By avoiding the game ball B1, which has temporarily come into contact with the rotating body and the movable standing wall, from being caught, it is possible to avoid the game ball B1 from rising and staying. It should be noted that when the game ball B1 taken into the trigger generation device is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor after it is in a state of temporarily contacting the rotating body and the movable standing wall, the opening and closing operation of the special opening device is performed. It will be an opportunity to start.

(5) The adjustment mechanism (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) in each of the above embodiments has a dischargeable period during which the game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 only for a certain period. is not limited to the configuration that occurs in For example, the adjustment mechanism can be used in timings other than the dischargeable period that occurs at regular intervals, within a range that does not exceed the upper limit number (4) of numerical information that can be reserved in the electric power reservation area HA (FIG. 13). A configuration in which B1 is discharged toward the first through gate 35 may be employed.

In the first embodiment, in addition to the four recessed portions 183b to 183e (FIG. 4) arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the rotor 183 may be provided with an additional fifth recessed portion. good. The fifth recessed portion has the same shape and size as the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d, and can take in one game ball B1. In this case, in the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 ejected from any one of the four recesses 183b to 183e wins in a cycle of 1 second, is taken into the fifth recess, and is discharged in a cycle of 1 sec. A game ball B1 ejected at a timing other than the possible period enters.

In the fifth embodiment, the configuration may be such that the open state of the adjusting section 546 (FIG. 55) occurs at a cycle of 0.5 sec. When the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 in the winning continuation period of the low-frequency support mode, the general electric open winning is generated in the general electric open lottery at a rate of once every two times. be able to. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the open state of the adjusting section 546 (FIG. 55) generated at a cycle of 1 sec may be continued for 0.5 sec, which is longer than in the fifth embodiment. In this case, a plurality of game balls B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 in one open state. Here, the shortest shooting interval in the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is 0.6 sec. Therefore, in one open state, the number of game balls B1 that are discharged at a timing outside the original dischargeable period and win the first through gate 35 is the upper limit of numerical information that can be reserved by the electric power reservation area HA. It can be stored in a range that does not exceed the number.

The configuration is such that the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35 within a range not exceeding the upper limit number of numerical information that can be reserved in the electric power holding area HA even at a timing other than the dischargeable period occurring in a cycle of 1 sec. Thus, it is possible to generate non-continuous single electric power open winnings even in the continuous non-winning period of the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if the continuous non-winning period in the low-frequency support mode continues for a long time, the player's expectation for the continuous winning period is heightened every time the electric power open winning occurs, and the player is not bored. can do.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, all of the out-port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are configured to store the history information (or ball-entering history). However, it is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is the object of storing the history information. It is good also as a structure which has become. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. good too. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls enter the ball-entering portion for which the history information is to be stored in a predetermined period.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the information corresponding to the game ball entry result is transmitted in association with the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. Although the signal paths 118a to 118c are set for the same type of ball-entering unit, the information corresponding to the ball-entering result for the same type of ball-entering unit is not limited to this. , and a plurality of ball-entering detection sensors corresponding thereto, or a configuration in which one type of information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 .

(8) In the first embodiment and the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, it is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, there is no need to execute processing for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence information, so the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(9) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to be performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, it is not limited to this. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main side CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, it is configured to be stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(10) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to use the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. Thereby, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(11) In the first embodiment, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, while information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63 . For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the seventeenth embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. , the master side CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound light emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are displayed using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41. The configuration may be such that the corresponding notification is executed.

(12) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the pattern display device 41, and the like. In this case, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entry state in the game area PA was normal on the business day immediately before the opening of the game hall.

(13) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. may be As a configuration that prevents the game from starting, for example, it may be configured to prohibit the shooting of game balls, or may be configured to disable the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. A configuration may be adopted in which the winning/failure determination process is not executed even if a prize is won to the 33 or the second operating opening 34 . Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erasing switch is ON, and the operation is possible when the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner.

(14) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main side CPU 63 or the management side CPU 112. may not be executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by the operator of the reading operation. A reading device may be configured to calculate various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

(15) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main side CPU 63 may be provided with the function of executing the history information storage process and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. The CPU 92 may have a configuration, or the audio emission control device 81 may have a configuration. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 has these functions, the information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control body having the functions. It will happen.

(16) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from that of the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be capable of outputting information of history information or various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

(17) The reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read the history information or various parameters by the reading device, but it is limited to this. Instead, a terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64 . In this case, the terminals used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62 or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 .

(18) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 631 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as flash memory. Any one of 116, 117 and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is reduced. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, and backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. good too.

(19) It is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and history information is not stored and held, and a game ball is detected by one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timing.

(20) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. , a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66 . Specifically, for the configuration, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main side CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main side CPU 63, the signal is received. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that point in time when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment. Further, when an external output opportunity to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters, which are the calculation results, and also outputs the history information.

(21) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, a configuration in which the occurrence of a shift to the opening/closing execution mode is stored as history information may be employed. The transition timing to the open/close execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information. The occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, by using the history information as described above, a configuration may be employed in which the probability of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, or a configuration in which the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode is calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(22) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, while the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to entering a ball into a privilege opportunity ball entering portion that triggers payout of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and the winning/failure determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball entry part with respect to the total number of discharged game balls while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball entry part. Become.

(24) A configuration may be adopted in which items other than those in each of the above embodiments are included as objects to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a has become full, the timing at which the full-tank state started, and the timing at which the full-tank state is canceled may be stored as history information. At least one of the no-ball state, the timing at which the no-ball state was started, and the timing at which the no-ball state was canceled may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 was in an abnormal state. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(25) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, it is assumed in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, it is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. may be configured. In this case, there is no need to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

(26) The number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open is stored as history information, and the number of entering balls was grasped using the history information. may be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball entry portion in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. Also, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurred, and the calculated number of balls entering is an abnormal number. In some cases, an anomaly notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with a fraudulent act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entering section.

(27) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(28) In the above-described first embodiment, etc., the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a-122o may be reversed from that in the above-described first embodiment. In this case, the order in which the master side CPU 63 executes the processing for changing the output state of each signal and the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing for the buffers 122a to 122o match.

(29) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64, the configuration may be such that one of the program and data can be selectively output. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only the data can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reader. As a configuration for selectively outputting information, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. can be considered.

(30) Different information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. may store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality, and the stored history information may be output to the outside through the reading terminal 102 .

(31) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided individually for each of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a Although the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of game balls detected by the above, it is not limited to this, for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA A passage area through which the game balls pass one by one may be provided, and an ejection detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area may be provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in this configuration, similarly to the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 By providing 42a to 47a, it becomes possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entering each ball entry portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(32) Display control based on commands sent from the main controller 60 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on commands sent from the main controller 60 The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these two control devices may be changed. may be integrated into the main controller 60 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 60 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(33) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever, the result of the lottery process executed for the winning combination is stored as history information. , and the history information may be used to calculate the actual winning probability of each combination. The information may be used to calculate the actual probability of transition to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special game state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may provide notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters.

(34) The characteristic configurations of the first to eighteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiments, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fifteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
Privilege granting means (function for executing the processing of steps S705 and S706 in the main side CPU 63) for granting a privilege under at least one condition that a game ball has entered the ball entering portion;
with
A first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) are set as control modes for the granting status of the privilege, and the second mode (high-frequency support mode) is more likely to result in the granting status of the privilege than the first mode. ,
Guiding means (adjusting mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding game balls toward the ball entry portion;
In the first mode, each guidance timing of the game ball guided by the guidance means corresponds to or corresponds to the grant timing at which the game ball guided to the ball entering portion is given the privilege. a predetermined situation generation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63) that causes a predetermined situation (continuous winning period) that makes it easier to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A1, the first mode is a configuration in which a privilege is less likely to be granted than in the second mode. Therefore, in the first mode, the player's expectation for the status of awarding the privilege is low. In this configuration, as a situation that occurs in the first mode, a predetermined situation is provided in which the guidance timing of the game ball guided by the guidance means corresponds to or is likely to correspond to the grant timing. As a result, it is possible to make the player who is performing the shooting operation of the game ball in the first mode feel the expectation that the predetermined situation may occur. In the first mode, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by suppressing the decrease in the player's sense of expectation for the awarding of the privilege.

Feature A2. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
Privilege granting means (function for executing the processing of steps S705 and S706 in the main side CPU 63) that grants a privilege under at least one condition that a gaming ball has entered the ball entry portion;
Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding game balls toward the ball entry portion;
Each guidance timing of the game ball guided to the ball-entering portion by the guiding means at a predetermined time interval is a grant timing at which the game ball guided to the ball-entering portion triggers granting of the privilege. a predetermined situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63) that generates a predetermined situation (continuous winning period) that corresponds to or is likely to correspond to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A2, all or part of the conditions for awarding the privilege are satisfied by the situation where the guidance timing corresponds to the grant timing or the predetermined situation that makes it easier to respond. The predetermined situation is a situation in which there is a possibility that a privilege will be granted each time the guidance timing comes, and it is an advantageous situation for the player. By adopting a configuration in which a predetermined situation occurs, it is possible to make the player aware of the occurrence of the predetermined situation even when the predetermined situation does not occur, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined situation generating means causes the predetermined situation by changing the grant timing.

According to the feature A3, when the grant timing is changed and the guidance timing corresponds to the grant timing, or when the situation becomes easier to deal with, a predetermined situation occurs, and the grant timing is changed. Then, when the guidance timing does not correspond to the application trigger timing, the predetermined situation ends. By allowing the predetermined situation to occur without warning, it is possible to make the player always aware of the predetermined situation. By always keeping the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of the predetermined situation high, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Feature A4. First updating means for updating and storing numerical information (common electrical role release counter C4, function for executing the process of step S202 in the main side CPU 63);
Second updating means for updating and storing numerical information for updating the initial value of the first updating means (initial value counter C5 for opening, function of executing step S113 in main CPU 63, function in main CPU 63 a function to execute the process of step S204);
with
The privilege granting means is
Based on the determination criterion information (low-frequency winning determination value table T1) in which the numerical information corresponding to the grant timing is set, predetermined processing (general electric means for executing the open lottery) (the function of executing the processing of step S705 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S717 in the main CPU 63);
Means ( A function of executing the processes of steps S410 and S411 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processes of steps S803 to S807 in the main CPU 63);
and
The game according to feature A3, wherein the predetermined situation generating means causes the predetermined situation by setting the numerical information stored in the second updating means as an initial value of the first updating means. machine.

According to feature A4, by setting the numerical value information stored in the second updating means as the initial value of the first updating means, the occurrence timing of the predetermined situation can be made irregular. By not knowing when the predetermined situation will occur, the player can always be aware of the predetermined situation. By always keeping the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of the predetermined situation high, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Feature A5. The predetermined situation generating means is
Each time a predetermined change timing is reached, a means (step S312 in the main CPU 63) for causing the predetermined situation by executing a predetermined change process for changing the temporal relationship between the guidance timing and the grant timing. and a function to execute the process of step S313);
Extending means for extending the predetermined situation (function of executing step S305 in the main CPU 63, step a function to execute the processing of S712);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A5, the execution of the predetermined change process is postponed, so that the predetermined situation advantageous to the player continues for a long time, and the predetermined situation can be made attractive. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the predetermined situation and improve the amusement of the game.

Feature A6. A starting ball entry portion (first operation openings 33, 581, second operation openings 34, 582) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Means (a function of executing the process of step S215 in the main side CPU 63) for generating an advantageous state for the player under at least one condition that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry section;
with
The starting ball-entering part is divided into a first predetermined state (a closed state of the general electric accessory 34a) in which the game ball is difficult to enter or impossible to enter, and a state from the first predetermined state. Equipped with an acceptance control means (a function of executing a general electric power control process in the main side CPU 63) that can be switched to a second predetermined state (open state of the general electric accessory 34a) in which the game ball is easy to enter ,
As a control mode for the starting ball entry section by the acceptance control means, there are a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) in which the second predetermined state is more likely to occur than in the first mode. , is set and
The privilege granting means executes a predetermined determination (general electric open lottery) with at least one condition that a game ball has entered the entering ball portion, and in the predetermined determination, a predetermined determination result (general electric open winning) and When it becomes, as the privilege, means for setting the starting ball entering section to the second predetermined state (function of executing the processing of steps S407 to S411 in the main side CPU 63),
Any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined situation generating means generates the predetermined situation on the condition that the control mode of the starting ball entry section is the first mode. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A6, in the first mode, the starting ball entering portion is less likely to be in the second predetermined state than in the second mode. Therefore, in the first mode, the player's expectation for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry portion is lower than in the second mode. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry portion in the first mode. . Since the predetermined situation occurs under the condition of being in the first mode, it is possible to soften the impression that the first mode is disadvantageous compared to the second mode.

Feature A7. The probability of occurrence of the predetermined situation is higher when the control mode in the acceptance control means is the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the probability is set to be more advantageous to the player than when .

According to the feature A7, when the second mode is compared with the entire first mode including both the predetermined situation and the non-predetermined situation, the second mode is the first mode. It is more advantageous to the player than the case. By generating a predetermined situation in the first mode while maintaining the premise that the second mode is more advantageous for the player than the first mode, the game ball is started in the first mode. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the ball from entering the ball-entering part from significantly lowering.

Feature A8. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward the game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
In the game area, as the ball-entering portion, there is a first ball-entering portion (first through portion) present at a position where a ball can enter when the player performs the shooting operation of the shooting means in the first shooting mode. Gate 35) and a second ball-entering section (second A through gate 39) is provided,
The guiding means guides the game ball toward the first ball entering section,
When the control mode of the reception control means is the first mode, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the shooting operation in the first shooting mode than to perform the shooting operation in the second shooting mode, Characteristic feature A7, characterized in that, in the case of the second mode, performing the shooting operation in the second shooting mode is more advantageous for the player than performing the shooting operation in the first shooting mode. game machine.

According to feature A8, when there is one ball entry section, the game ball is guided to the guidance means to enter the ball entry section even when the control mode in the reception control means is the second mode. need to Therefore, a game ball that is not guided by the guiding means cannot enter the ball entering section. On the other hand, by providing the second ball-entering portion different from the first ball-entering portion provided with the guiding means, in the case of the second mode, the game ball can be placed in the second mode without going through the guiding means. 2 It is possible to enter the ball into the entering ball section. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined determination is performed in the second mode.

In addition, by changing the shooting mode according to the situation, it is advantageous for the player, and compared with the configuration in which the same shooting mode is continued, the player's sense of participation is enhanced and the interest in the game is improved. can be planned.

Feature A9. When the predetermined determination results when the control mode in the acceptance control unit is the second mode, the privilege granting means performs the predetermined determination when the control mode is the first mode. Any one of the features A6 to A8, characterized in that the starting ball-entering section is set to the second predetermined state in a manner in which the game ball is more likely to enter the starting ball-entering section than when the predetermined determination result is obtained. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A9, when a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, which is inherently more disadvantageous for the player than in the second mode, the predetermined determination result is obtained in the predetermined determination every time the game ball enters the ball entry portion. Become. Therefore, in the case of the first mode and the predetermined situation, there is a possibility that the starting ball entering portion will be in the second predetermined state with a higher frequency than in the case of the second mode. On the other hand, when the predetermined determination result in the second mode results in a predetermined determination result, the starting ball-entering portion is in the second predetermined state, and when the predetermined determination result in the first mode results in a predetermined determination result. In this configuration, it is easier for the game ball to enter the starting ball-entering part than in the mode in which the starting ball-entering part is in the second predetermined situation. As a result, the frequency at which the game ball enters the start ball entry portion in the second mode and the frequency at which the game ball enters the start ball entry portion in the first mode and under a predetermined condition are determined. Balance can be achieved.

Feature A10. The guiding means are
A guiding portion (near the intake port 185, near the intake port 262, above the adjustment mechanisms 330, 430, near the adjustment unit 546) where the game ball flowing down the game area can reach,
Means for guiding the game ball that has reached the guiding section toward the ball entering section at a guidance possible timing (timing in which the capture is allowed) by the guiding means to guide the game ball toward the ball entering section (Rotating bodies 183, 230, 340, 440);
Ejecting means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of vane portions 188 to 191) for ejecting game balls that have reached the induction portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to a region different from the ball entering portion,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, comprising:

According to the characteristic A10, since the game ball that has reached the guide section can be discharged at a timing different from the guideable timing, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has not been taken in by the guide means from accumulating near the guide section. As a result, the vicinity of the guide section can be kept in a state in which the game ball that has reached the guide section at the guideable timing is easily guided toward the ball entry section.

Feature A11. Said discharging means has means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of vane portions 188 to 191) for discharging game balls that have reached said guiding portion at a timing different from said guiding possible timing to the outside of said guiding means. The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized by:

According to the characteristic A11, by discharging the game ball that has reached the guide section at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guide means by the guide section, the game ball is suppressed from staying near the guide section. be able to. As a result, in the guidance section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the guidance of the game ball to be guided to the ball entry section is hindered by the game ball that is not to be guided.

Feature A12. The ejection means is
It is a space in which a game ball can flow down, and is provided around the guide means in the game area. 220), and
provided in the game area with an interval between the guide means and the game ball that allows the game ball guided to the guide portion to flow down to the flow-down space at a timing different from the guideable timing. , ball guide means (nail 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide portion;
The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A12, the game ball guided by the guide part and not taken into the guide means flows downstream in the flow-down space, thereby reducing the possibility that the game ball stays near the guide part. can do. In addition, since the ball guiding means can guide the game balls to the guiding portion, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game balls guided by the guiding means toward the ball entering portion will run short.

Feature A13. Any of the characteristics A10 to A12, wherein the discharging means is provided with an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which the game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing can enter. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A13, by moving the game ball that has reached the guiding part at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to another place through the auxiliary passage, it reaches the guiding part and moves to another place. While avoiding the collision of the game ball on the way with other game balls flowing down the game area, the game ball reaching the guide part can be prevented from remaining around the guide part.

Feature A14. The boundary on the rear side of the game area is defined by a plate-like area defining means (game board 24, 610),
The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the auxiliary path allows a game ball to pass behind the front of the area defining means.

According to the feature A14, the member that partitions the auxiliary passage by adopting a configuration in which the game ball that reaches the guide part at a timing different from the guideable timing is discharged toward the rear from the front surface of the area defining means can be avoided from colliding with another game ball flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game ball.

Feature A15. Characteristic feature A14, characterized in that the auxiliary passage is provided with a passage exit (passage exit 173) for discharging game balls flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the game area in front of the area defining means. game machine.

According to the feature A15, in the configuration in which the game ball entering the auxiliary passage does not return to the game area, there is a possibility that the game balls flowing downstream of the guide means will run short. On the other hand, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls flowing downstream of the guide means is reduced by configuring the game balls that have flowed down the auxiliary passage to return to the game area from the passage exit.

Feature A16. In the game area, the game balls flowing down the game area from upstream of the passage exit are prevented from colliding with the game balls discharged toward the game area from the passage exit. A game machine according to feature A15, characterized in that a collision preventing means (exit roof 174) is provided for.

According to the feature A16, the game ball returning to the game area from the passage exit collides with the game ball flowing down from the upstream of the passage exit in the game area and is returned to the auxiliary passage again. can be prevented.

Feature A17. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, wherein movement of the game ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to the feature A17, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the game ball cannot be followed by the eyes as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in the structure in which the game ball returns to the game area after passing through the auxiliary passage, the player can continuously grasp the movement of the game ball, so that once it enters the auxiliary passage, it cannot be seen. It is possible to provide a configuration that does not cause a sense of incongruity that the game ball suddenly returns to the game area.

Feature A18. The guiding means are
Entry prevention means (left erected walls 181c, 181h, right erected wall 181d, upper right erected wall 252, left erected wall 261) for preventing game balls flowing down toward the guide means from entering the interior of the guide means , standing wall 352), and
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of being rotatable and capable of taking in and holding game balls in the guiding means 183,230,340,440) and
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main side CPU 63, adjustment driving section 184) for transporting the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
and
The entry blocking means is provided with a take-in opening (take-in opening 185) as an opening capable of taking in the game ball that has reached the guiding part into the inside of the guiding means,
The discharging means discharges the game ball that has come into contact with both the rotating means and the entry blocking means in the intake opening so that the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. Avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right upright wall 181d) for avoiding the game ball from being caught by The game machine according to any one of the characterizing features A13 to A17.

According to feature A18, by discharging the game ball that is in contact with the rotating means and the entry blocking means at the intake opening so that the game ball enters the auxiliary passage, A game ball can be prevented from being caught and stopped. Also, by avoiding the pinching of game balls, it is possible to reduce the burden of maintenance that the manager of the game hall has to do.

Feature A19. Said avoidance means, when said rotating means rotates with respect to a game ball that is in contact with both said rotating means and said entry blocking means at said intake opening, said auxiliary passage The gaming machine according to feature A18, characterized by applying a force directed toward the entrance.

According to feature A19, by rotating the rotating means, the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the entrance blocking means at the intake opening is eliminated. Therefore, there is no need for a dedicated configuration for avoiding the pinching of game balls. As a result, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost by avoiding the complication of the structure, and to ensure the freedom of arrangement of the guiding means by avoiding an increase in the size of the guiding means.

Feature A20. The avoidance means applies a force including a downward component to the game ball (front surface 188b 191b)).

According to feature A20, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry blocking means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball in contact with both the rotating means and the entry blocking means is ejected upward and the upstream flow of the game ball is disturbed.

Feature A21. The discharge means has a passage entrance (passage entrance 171) as an opening that allows game balls to enter the auxiliary passage,
The taking-in means has means (inclination of the inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e) for preventing the game balls taken into the guiding means by the taking-in means from moving toward the entrance for the passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20, characterized in that

According to feature A21, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken in by the take-in means is guided and enters the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls guided to the ball entry portion by the guiding means.

Feature A22. The guiding means are
An intake opening (intake opening 262) that allows the game ball flowing down toward the guide means to enter the inside of the guide means;
opening partitioning means (upper right upright wall 252, left upright wall 261) that partitions the intake opening;
Rotating means (rotating bodies 230, 340 )When,
Rotation control means (function for executing the process of step S206 in the main side CPU 63, adjustment driving section 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
It is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball comes into contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the intake opening, the game ball is deformed. Deformation means (upper right standing wall 252, blade member 343, rotating shafts 254, 344) that can release the force that tries to pinch the
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A22, by deforming the take-in permission means around the take-in opening, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball is caught between the rotation means and the opening partition means and stops.

Feature A23. The deformation means includes means (upright wall 252, rotating shaft 254) that allows the force applied to the opening partitioning means to be relieved by temporarily displacing the opening partitioning means to a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature A22, characterized in that

According to the feature A23, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and the game ball is pushed toward the opening partitioning means with the rotation of the rotating means, the opening By temporarily displacing the dividing means to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is caught and stopped.

Feature A24. The deforming means includes means (blade member 343, rotating shaft 344) capable of releasing the force applied to the rotating means by temporarily displacing a part of the rotating means to a specific position. The game machine according to feature A22 or A23, characterized in that

According to the feature A24, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening partitioning means as the rotation means rotates In addition, by temporarily displacing a part of the rotating means to a specific position to release the force that pinches the game ball, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball is pinched and stopped.

Feature A25. The guiding means are
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of being rotatable and capable of taking in and holding game balls in the guiding means 183,230,340,440) and
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main side CPU 63, adjustment driving section 184) for transporting the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
Release for releasing the game ball conveyed by the retrieving means toward the ball entering portion at a timing before the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the retrieving means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction. Means (discharge ports 256, 621);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A25, in the case of the configuration in which the game ball conveyed by the retrieving means is released at the timing when the vertical movement direction of the retrieving means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction, the game ball in the releasing means When the release timing of is delayed, there is a possibility that the game ball being transported by the take-in means starts to rise inside the guide means. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the game balls conveyed by the retrieving means are released at a timing before the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the retrieving means is switched from the downward direction to the upward direction, the game ball is released. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball rises in the guide means when the release timing of the ball is delayed.

Feature A26. The guide means prevents the game ball taken into the guide means and conveyed by the take-in means from falling downward and from being thrown out of the guide means by the rotation of the rotating means. Fall prevention means (left standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d) are provided,
The release means is a release opening (ejection port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the game ball conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guide means. 621).

According to the feature A26, the game ball is transported in contact with the fall prevention means, and is released toward the outside of the guide means when reaching the release opening. Since the position of the release opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is released from the guide means can be the same each time. Also, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature A27. The game machine according to feature A26, wherein the ejection opening has a direction in which a game ball ejected from the ejection opening is directed toward the ball entering portion at an edge of the ejection opening.

According to the feature A27, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it is released toward the ball entry portion by contacting the edge of the release opening. By fixing the position and the direction in which the game ball is released from the guiding means, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the ball entry portion.

Feature A28. The releasing means is a direction changing means (ejection protrusion 181e, A game machine according to any one of features A25 to A27, characterized by comprising a projecting end 263a) for ejection.

According to feature A28, since the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the releasing position to the moving direction for releasing the game ball, the game ball can move to the releasing position without being released from the releasing means. You can prevent passing by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball not released at the release position from rising in the guide means.

Feature A29. The direction changing means protrudes to a midway position in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner capable of contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means,
The game machine according to feature A28, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means.

According to feature A29, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without hindering the rotation of the rotating means, the direction of movement of the game ball is changed at the release position to promote the release of the game ball. be able to.

Feature A30. Characteristic A28 or characterized in that the direction changing means is provided with means (ejecting right side surface 181g) for guiding the game ball that has come into contact with the direction changing means at the release position toward the ball entry portion A gaming machine described in A29.

According to the feature A30, by directing the game ball release direction to the ball entry part at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means at the release position reaches the ball entry part. .

Feature A31. The guiding means are
Direction regulating means (guide passage 545) for regulating the release direction of the game ball toward the ball entry portion;
The direction regulating means is positioned upstream of the direction regulating means in the direction in which the game ball flows, and when the direction regulating means is opened, the game ball can enter the direction regulating means, and the direction regulating means is closed. opening and closing means (adjustment unit 546) that makes it impossible for game balls to enter,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A31, by simplifying the configuration of the guiding means, the volume of the guiding means occupying the game area can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of options for arranging the guide means in the game area and increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature A32. The guiding means releases a game ball toward the entering ball section,
At a position on the way of the game ball released from the guiding means to the ball entering portion, there are cases where the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the ball entering portion and there are cases where it is not allowed. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A31, wherein (electric nail 560) is provided.

According to the feature A32, part of the game balls released from the guiding means toward the ball entering portion is deviated from the ball entering portion. By making whether or not the game ball released from the guide means enters the ball entry part as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guide means is one of the concerns of the player. , the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the guiding means can be noticed more, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature A33. The course adjustment means is
change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
moving the change executing means so that the game balls released from the guiding means come into contact with the change executing means; a course adjustment drive means (nail drive section 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

According to the feature A33, by moving the change executing means, the volume occupied by the course adjusting means is reduced by a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow down toward the entering ball portion and a state in which it cannot flow down. can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Feature A34. The guiding means are
Means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243) for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means;
Means (fourth support surface 244) for releasing game balls so that the released game balls do not contact the course adjustment means;
The gaming machine according to feature A32 or A33, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A34, by configuring the guiding means to release the game balls in a plurality of ways, the game balls released from the guiding means and entering the ball entering portion and the game balls not entering are generated. be able to. Further, in the guidance means, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a release mode in which the released game ball contacts the course adjustment means and a release mode in which the game ball does not contact the course adjustment means to be constant, the game ball released from the guidance means enters the ball. It is possible to make the ratio of hitting the ball into the club and the ratio of not hitting the ball closer to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature A35. The guiding means releases a game ball toward the entering ball section,
Any of the features A1 to A34, wherein the ball entry portion is provided in the game area at a position separated by a diameter of the game ball or more from a position where the game ball is started to be released by the guide means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A35, the game ball can pass between the position where the game ball starts to be released by the guiding means and the ball entering portion. Therefore, there is still a possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means will not enter the ball entering portion. By making whether or not the game ball released from the guide means enters the ball entry part as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guide means is one of the concerns of the player. , the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the guiding means can be noticed more, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature A36. The guiding means causes the game ball to reach the ball entry portion by releasing the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction,
The ball-entering portion has an inclined opening that is substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball discharged from the guiding means and flowing down to the height position of the ball-entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A35.

According to feature A36, it is possible to increase the possibility that a game ball released from the guiding means and reaching the ball-entering part will enter the ball-entering part without contacting the edge of the ball-entering part. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means collides with the edge of the ball-entering portion and the ball-entering timing is shifted or the game ball is out of the ball-entering portion.

For the configuration of features A1 to A36, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group A, the following problems can be solved.

As gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, it is known that when a predetermined lottery condition is established, a lottery is conducted using numerical information, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the lottery.

For example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in a game area, numerical information is acquired from updating means for updating numerical information for lottery, and the acquired numerical information is A determination is made as to whether or not it corresponds to the winning information. Also known is a configuration in which numerical information is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a specific effect or notification is performed based on the result of a lottery performed using the numerical information.

Here, novel game contents are demanded in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A game ball that reaches the guidance portion (near intake port 185, near intake port 262, above adjustment mechanisms 330, 430, near adjustment unit 546) at the guidance possible timing (timing at which intake is permitted) is placed in a predetermined area ( first through gate 35, first operating opening 33, 581), guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620);
Ejecting means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of blades 188 to 191) for ejecting game balls that have reached the induction portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to an area different from the predetermined area;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, game balls that have reached the guidance section are discharged at a timing different from the timing at which guidance is possible, thereby preventing game balls that have not been guided from accumulating in the vicinity of the guidance section. As a result, the vicinity of the guiding portion can be kept in a state in which the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at the guiding possible timing is easily guided.

Feature B2. Said discharging means has means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of vane portions 188 to 191) for discharging game balls that have reached said guiding portion at a timing different from said guiding possible timing to the outside of said guiding means. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by:

According to the feature B2, by discharging the game ball that has reached the guide section at a timing different from the guideable timing to the outside of the guide means by the guide section, the game ball is suppressed from staying near the guide section. be able to. As a result, in the guide section, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the guidance of the game ball to be guided to the predetermined area is hindered by the game ball that is not to be guided.

Feature B3. The ejection means is
It is a space in which the game ball can flow down, and is provided on the left and right of the adjustment mechanism 180, 430, 530, 620 provided around the guide means in the game area (game area PA) space, the space provided to the left of the adjustment mechanism 220);
Between the guiding means and the guiding means, a space is provided in the game area that allows the game ball guided to the guiding portion at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to flow down to the falling space. , ball guide means (nail 24b, left guide nail 291, right guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide portion;
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B3, the game ball guided by the guide part and not taken into the guide means flows downstream in the flow-down space, thereby reducing the possibility that the game ball stays near the guide part. can do. In addition, since the ball guiding means can guide the game balls to the guiding portion, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game balls guided by the guiding means toward the predetermined area run short.

Feature B4. Any of features B1 to B3, wherein the discharging means is provided with an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding possible timing can enter. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature B4, by moving the game ball that has reached the guiding part at a timing different from the guidance possible timing to another place through the auxiliary passage, it reaches the guiding part and moves to another place. While avoiding the collision of the game ball on the way with other game balls flowing down the game area, the game ball reaching the guide part can be prevented from remaining around the guide part.

Feature B5. The boundary on the rear side of the game area (game area PA) is defined by plate-shaped area defining means (game board 24, 610),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the auxiliary path allows a game ball to pass behind the front of the area defining means.

According to the feature B5, the member that partitions the auxiliary passage by having a configuration in which the game ball that reaches the guide part at a timing different from the guidance possible timing is discharged toward the rear from the front surface of the area defining means can be avoided from colliding with another game ball flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game ball.

Feature B6. Characteristic B5, characterized in that the auxiliary passage is provided with a passage exit (passage exit 173) for discharging game balls flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the game area in front of the area defining means. game machine.

According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the game ball that entered the auxiliary passage does not return to the game area, there is a possibility that the game balls flowing downstream of the guiding means will run short. On the other hand, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls flowing downstream of the guide means is reduced by configuring the game balls that have flowed down the auxiliary passage to return to the game area from the passage exit.

Feature B7. In the game area, the game balls flowing down the game area from upstream of the passage exit are prevented from colliding with the game balls discharged toward the game area from the passage exit. A game machine according to feature B6, characterized in that a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) is provided for.

According to the feature B7, the game ball returning to the game area from the passage exit collides with the game ball flowing down from the upstream of the passage exit in the game area and is returned to the auxiliary passage again. can be prevented.

Feature B8. The game machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein movement of the game ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to the characteristic B8, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the game ball cannot be followed by the eyes as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in the structure in which the game ball returns to the game area after passing through the auxiliary passage, the player can continuously grasp the movement of the game ball, so that once it enters the auxiliary passage, it cannot be seen. It is possible to provide a configuration that does not cause a sense of incongruity that the game ball suddenly returns to the game area.

Feature B9. The guiding means are
Entry prevention means (left erected walls 181c, 181h, right erected wall 181d, upper right erected wall 252, left erected wall 261) for preventing game balls flowing down toward the guide means from entering the interior of the guide means , standing wall 352), and
Rotating means (rotating body) provided with taking-in means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of being rotatable and capable of taking in and holding game balls in the guiding means 183,230,340,440) and
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main side CPU 63, adjustment driving section 184) for transporting the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
and
The entry blocking means is provided with a take-in opening (take-in opening 185) as an opening capable of taking in the game ball that has reached the guiding part into the inside of the guiding means,
The discharging means discharges the game ball, which is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry blocking means, to an area different from the predetermined area in the intake opening. Feature B1 characterized by comprising avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right upright wall 181d) for avoiding being pinched. The game machine according to any one of B8.

According to the feature B9, the game ball is caught by ejecting the game ball that is in contact with the rotating means and the entry blocking means in the intake opening to an area different from the predetermined area. can be avoided. Also, by avoiding the pinching of game balls, it is possible to reduce the burden of maintenance that the manager of the game hall has to do.

Feature B10. The avoiding means is configured to prevent the game ball from contacting both the rotating means and the entrance blocking means at the intake opening when the rotating means rotates. applies a force directed toward a different area.

According to the feature B10, by rotating the rotating means, the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the entrance blocking means at the intake opening is eliminated. Therefore, there is no need for a dedicated configuration for avoiding the pinching of game balls. As a result, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost by avoiding the complication of the structure, and to ensure the freedom of arrangement of the guiding means by avoiding an increase in the size of the guiding means.

Feature B11. The avoidance means applies a force including a downward component to the game ball (front surface 188b 191b)).

According to feature B11, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the entry blocking means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball in contact with both the rotating means and the entry blocking means is ejected upward and the upstream flow of the game ball is disturbed.

Feature B12. The ejection means is
an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) into which a game ball that reaches the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing can enter;
a passage entrance (passage entrance 171) that is an opening that allows a game ball to enter the auxiliary passage;
and
The taking-in means has means (inclination of the inner walls of the recesses 183b to 183e) for preventing the game balls taken into the guiding means by the taking-in means from moving toward the entrance for the passage. The game machine according to any one of features B9 to B11, characterized in that

According to feature B12, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken in by the taking means is guided and enters the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the predetermined area. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls guided to the predetermined area by the guiding means.

For the configuration of features B1 to B12, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group B, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down. Various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game ball fired from the game ball launching device flows down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operation opening, etc., a predetermined number Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Equipped with guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding game balls toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operation opening 33, 581),
The guiding means are
Rotating means (rotating body 183,230,340,440) and
Rotation control means (function for executing the process of step S206 in the main side CPU 63, adjustment driving section 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
Release means for releasing the game balls transported by the capture means toward the predetermined area at a timing before the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the capture means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction. (exhaust port 256, 621);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, in the case of the configuration in which the game ball conveyed by the taking-in means is released at the timing when the vertical movement direction of the taking-in means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction, the game ball in the releasing means When the release timing of is delayed, there is a possibility that the game ball being transported by the take-in means starts to rise inside the guide means. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the game balls conveyed by the retrieving means are released at a timing before the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the retrieving means is switched from the downward direction to the upward direction, the game ball is released. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball rises in the guide means when the release timing of the ball is delayed.

Feature C2. The guide means prevents the game ball taken into the guide means and conveyed by the take-in means from falling downward and from being thrown out of the guide means by the rotation of the rotating means. Fall prevention means (left standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d) are provided,
The release means is a release opening (ejection port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the game ball conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guide means. 621).

According to the feature C2, the game ball is transported in contact with the fall prevention means, and is released toward the outside of the guide means when reaching the release opening. Since the position of the release opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is released from the guide means can be the same each time. Also, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the ejection opening is arranged such that the ejection direction of the game ball ejected from the ejection opening is the direction toward the predetermined area at the edge of the ejection opening.

According to the feature C3, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it is released toward the predetermined area by contacting the edge of the release opening. By fixing the position and the direction in which the game ball is released from the guiding means, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the predetermined area.

Feature C4. The predetermined area is provided with a ball entry portion (first through gate 35, first operation opening 33, 581) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter,
Privilege granting means (function for executing the processing of steps S705 and S706 in the main side CPU 63) that grants a privilege under at least one condition that a game ball has entered the ball entering portion;
The characteristic C3 is characterized in that the release direction is a direction that allows the game ball released from the release opening to enter the ball entry portion without colliding with the edge of the ball entry portion. The game machine described.

According to feature C4, the game ball released from the release opening collides with the edge of the ball entering portion, causing a deviation in the timing at which the game ball enters the ball entering portion, and the game ball is released from the ball entering portion. You can reduce the chances of it coming off.

Feature C5. Said releasing means is a direction changing means (ejection protrusion 181e, ejection A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that it has a protruding end 263a).

According to feature C5, since the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction for releasing the game ball, the game ball can move to the release position without being released from the releasing means. You can prevent passing by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball not released at the release position from rising in the guide means.

Feature C6. The direction changing means protrudes to a midway position in the front-rear direction of the game area (game area PA) in a manner capable of contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means,
The game machine according to feature C5, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means.

According to the feature C6, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without hindering the rotation of the rotating means, the direction of movement of the game ball is changed at the release position to promote the release of the game ball. be able to.

Feature C7. Characteristic C5 or C6, wherein the direction changing means is provided with means (ejection right side 181g) for guiding the game ball that has come into contact with the direction changing means at the release position toward the predetermined area. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature C7, by directing the direction of release of the game ball to the predetermined area at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means at the release position reaches the ball entry portion.

Feature C8. At a position where the game ball released from the guidance means is on the way to the predetermined area, there is a course adjustment means (electric A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein a nail 560) is provided.

According to the feature C8, part of the game balls released from the guiding means toward the predetermined area is out of the predetermined area. By making whether or not the game ball released from the guide means enters the predetermined area as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guide means is one of the concerns of the player. It is possible to enhance the interest in the game by increasing attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means.

Feature C9. The course adjustment means is
change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
moving the change executing means so that the game balls released from the guiding means come into contact with the change executing means; a course adjustment drive means (nail drive section 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C9, the volume occupied by the course adjustment means is reduced by a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow down toward a predetermined area and a state in which it cannot flow down by moving the change execution means. It is possible to suppress and increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature C10. The guiding means are
Means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243) for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means;
Means (fourth support surface 244) for releasing game balls so that the released game balls do not contact the course adjustment means;
The gaming machine according to feature C8 or C9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C10, the guiding means is configured to release game balls in a plurality of manners, thereby generating game balls that are released from the guiding means and enter a predetermined area and game balls that do not enter. can be done. Further, in the guidance means, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a release mode in which the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means and a release mode in which the game ball does not contact the course adjusting means, the game ball released from the guidance means is kept within a predetermined area. It is possible to make the ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of not entering the ball close to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature C11. The guiding means releases a game ball toward the predetermined area,
The predetermined area is provided at a position separated by a diameter of the game ball or more from a position where the game ball is started to be released by the guide means in the game area (game area PA). The gaming machine according to any one of C10.

According to the characteristic C11, the game ball can pass between the predetermined area and the position where the game ball starts to be released by the guiding means. Therefore, there is still the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means will not enter the predetermined area. By making whether or not the game ball released from the guide means enters the predetermined area as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guide means is one of the concerns of the player. It is possible to enhance the interest in the game by increasing attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means.

Feature C12. A game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter the predetermined area, and one of the conditions for awarding a privilege is satisfied by the game ball entering the ball entering section. (first through gate 35, first operation opening 33, 581) are provided,
The guiding means causes the game ball to reach the ball entry portion by releasing the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction,
The ball-entering portion has an inclined opening substantially perpendicular to the movement direction of the game ball released from the guiding means and flowing down to the height position of the ball-entering portion at the height position. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11.

According to the feature C12, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means and reaching the ball-entering part will enter the ball-entering part without contacting the edge of the ball-entering part. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means collides with the edge of the ball-entering portion and the ball-entering timing is shifted or the game ball is out of the ball-entering portion.

For the configuration of features C1 to C12, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down. Various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game ball fired from the game ball launching device flows down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operation opening, etc., a predetermined number Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding game balls toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operation opening 33, 581),
The guiding means are
an intake opening (intake opening 262) that allows the game ball flowing down toward the guide means to enter the inside of the guide means;
opening partitioning means (upper right upright wall 252, left upright wall 261) that partitions the intake opening;
Rotation means (rotating bodies 230, 340 )When,
Rotation control means (function for executing the processing of step S206 in the main side CPU 63, adjustment driving section 184) for transporting the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
It is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball comes into contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the intake opening, the game ball is deformed. Deformation means (upper right standing wall 252, blade member 343, rotating shafts 254, 344) that can release the force that tries to pinch the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, by deforming the deformation means around the intake opening, it is possible to guide the game ball to the predetermined area while avoiding a situation in which the game ball is stuck between the rotating means and the opening partitioning means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the game due to the pinching of the game ball or the necessity of taking measures to remove the pinched game ball.

Feature D2. The deformation means includes means (upright wall 252, rotating shaft 254) that allows the force applied to the opening partitioning means to be relieved by temporarily displacing the opening partitioning means to a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that

According to the feature D2, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and the game ball is pushed toward the opening partitioning means with the rotation of the rotating means, the opening By temporarily displacing the dividing means to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is caught and stopped.

Feature D3. The deforming means includes means (blade member 343, rotating shaft 344) capable of releasing the force applied to the rotating means by temporarily displacing a part of the rotating means to a specific position. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that

According to feature D3, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening partitioning means as the rotation means rotates. In addition, by temporarily displacing a part of the rotating means to a specific position to release the force that pinches the game ball, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball is pinched and stopped.

For the configuration of features D1 to D3, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group D, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down. Various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game ball fired from the game ball launching device flows down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operation opening, etc., a predetermined number Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
Guiding means (adjustment mechanisms 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding game balls toward the ball entry portion;
with
Said guide means has a release means (discharge port 256, 621) for releasing a game ball toward said ball entry part,
A gaming machine, wherein the ball-entering section is provided at a position spaced apart from the releasing means by at least a diameter of the game ball.

According to the feature E1, the game ball released from the releasing means needs to flow down a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball before entering the ball entry portion. Therefore, depending on the release direction and release speed of the game ball released from the release means, the game ball may or may not enter the ball entry portion. When all of the game balls released from the releasing means enter the ball-entering portion, the player may lose interest in the destination of the released game balls. On the other hand, by making whether or not the game ball released from the releasing means enters the ball entering portion as an uncertain factor, the player's attention is attracted to the direction of the game ball after release, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of

Feature E2. The guiding means are
Rotating means (rotating body 183,230,340,440) and
Rotation control means (function for executing the process of step S206 in the main side CPU 63, adjustment driving section 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guiding means by rotating the rotating means;
Drop prevention means (left side) for preventing the game ball taken into the guide means and conveyed by the take-in means from falling downward and being thrown out of the guide means by the rotation of the rotating means. upright wall 181h, right upright wall 181d),
and
The release means is a release opening (ejection port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the game ball conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guide means. 621).

According to the feature E2, the game ball is transported in contact with the fall prevention means, and is released toward the outside of the guide means when reaching the release opening. Since the position of the release opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position at which the game ball is released from the guide means can be the same each time. Also, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be the timing set at the design stage.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the ejection opening has a direction in which a game ball ejected from the ejection opening is directed toward the ball entering portion at an edge of the ejection opening.

According to the feature E3, when the game ball is released from the release opening, it is released toward the ball entry portion by contacting the edge of the release opening. By fixing the position and the direction in which the game ball is released from the guiding means, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the ball entry portion.

Feature E4. The releasing means is a direction changing means (ejection protrusion 181e, A game machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that it comprises a projecting end 263a) for ejection.

According to feature E4, since the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the release position to the moving direction for releasing the game ball, the game ball can move to the release position without being released from the releasing means. You can prevent passing by.

Feature E5. The direction changing means protrudes to a midway position in the front-rear direction of the game area in a manner capable of contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means,
The game machine according to feature E4, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the projecting direction changing means.

According to the feature E5, by contacting the game ball guided by the rotating means without hindering the rotation of the rotating means, the direction of movement of the game ball is changed at the release position to promote the release of the game ball. be able to.

Feature E6. Characteristic feature E4, wherein the direction changing means is provided with means (ejecting right side surface 181g) for guiding the game ball that has come into contact with the direction changing means at the release position toward the ball entering portion, or The gaming machine described in E5.

According to the feature E6, by directing the game ball release direction to the ball entry part at the release position, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means at the release position reaches the ball entry part. .

Feature E7. The releasing means includes a direction regulating means (guide passage 545) for regulating the direction in which the game ball is released toward the entering ball portion,
The guiding means is positioned upstream of the direction determining means in the direction in which the game ball flows, and when it is in an open state, it allows the game ball to enter the direction determining means, and is in a closed state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized by comprising an opening/closing means (adjustment unit 546) that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter.

According to the feature E7, the volume of the guiding means occupying the game area can be suppressed by using the simple guiding means composed of the direction defining means and the opening/closing means. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of options for arranging the guide means in the game area and increase the degree of freedom in design.

Feature E8. In the game area, the game ball released from the releasing means is allowed to flow down toward the ball entering portion at a position on the way to the ball entering portion, and when it is not allowed. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that a path adjusting means (electric nail 560) is provided.

According to the feature E8, part of the game ball released from the releasing means toward the ball entering portion is deviated from the ball entering portion. A game ball released from the releasing means enters the ball entering part by providing a course adjusting means for generating both cases where the game ball enters the ball entering part and where the game ball does not enter the ball entering part. Whether or not to enter the ball can be an uncertain factor.

Feature E9. The course adjusting means is
change execution means (electric nail 560) for changing the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball;
moving the change execution means so that the game balls released from the release means come into contact with the change execution means; a course adjustment drive means (nail drive section 560a) capable of moving the execution means;
The gaming machine of feature E8, comprising:

According to the feature E9, by moving the change executing means, the volume occupied by the course adjusting means is reduced by a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow toward the entering ball portion and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down. can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Feature E10. The releasing means is
Means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243) for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means;
Means (fourth support surface 244) for releasing game balls so that the released game balls do not contact the course adjusting means;
The gaming machine according to feature E8 or E9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E10, by configuring the releasing means to release the game balls in a plurality of manners, both the game balls released from the releasing means and entering the ball-entering portion and the game balls not entering the ball-entering portion can be detected. can be generated. Further, in the releasing means, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a releasing mode in which the released game ball contacts the course adjusting means and a releasing mode in which the released game ball does not contact the course adjustment means to be constant, the game ball released from the releasing means enters the ball. It is possible to make the ratio of hitting the ball into the club and the ratio of not hitting the ball closer to the ratio set in the design stage.

Feature E11. The release means releases a game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction, thereby causing the game ball to reach the ball entry portion,
The ball-entering portion has an inclined opening that is substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball released from the releasing means and flowing down to the height position of the ball-entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

According to the characteristic E11, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball released from the releasing means and reaching the ball-entering portion enters the ball-entering portion without contacting the edge of the ball-entering portion. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the releasing means collides with the edge of the ball-entering portion and the ball-entering timing is shifted or the game ball is out of the ball-entering portion.

For the configuration of features E1 to E11, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down. Various members are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game ball fired from the game ball launching device flows down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game ball enters the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operation opening, etc., a predetermined number Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the behavior of the game ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 65). function) and
Privilege for executing processing for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (function of executing the process of step S219 in the main side CPU 63, function of executing the process of step S1008 in the payout side CPU 92);
In a game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in a prescribed storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the sixteenth embodiment). Then, the main side RAM 65) executes predetermined information (the first Predetermined storage executing means (first In the fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2920 and S2923.

According to the feature F1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player. be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entering means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means, and the number of game balls entered into the prescribed ball entry means or the frequency of entry is determined. can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine is stored in the prescribed storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined information does not serve as a trigger for executing processing for giving a privilege to the player.

According to the feature F2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means by not triggering the execution of the processing for giving the privilege to the player based on the predetermined information. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature F3. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, and stores the information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. Specific information (history information in the first to 14th and 18th embodiments, in the counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to the feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball-entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Feature F4. All the ball entering means for ejecting the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball entering means, are objects to be stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the entering game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, which is a ball-entering means.

According to feature F4, all ball entry means for discharging game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in the predetermined storage means. can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entry means to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using the information stored in the prescribed storage means.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to the feature F5, the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means is included in the predetermined information. It is possible to grasp the ball entry history in detail.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entering means.

According to feature F6, since the predetermined information is the count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entering means, the amount of information of the predetermined information is suppressed, and the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means. can be managed.

Feature F7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation. In the first to thirteenth embodiments, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of steps S1404 and S1409; in the fourteenth embodiment, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of step S2704; A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2803 in the side CPU 112.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation.

Feature F8. Any one of features F1 to F7 characterized by comprising external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the game machine and analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by using the read information.

Feature F9. A program output means (function for executing the processing of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The game machine according to feature F8, wherein the external output means uses the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine.

According to the feature F9, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. A means (main A gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1502 in the side CPU 63 .

According to feature F10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be output to the outside is the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature F11. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F11, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means has the predetermined memory execution means, so that the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing the undesired operation.

Feature F12. The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature F13. A specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, thereby allowing the specific ball entering means to perform the game. Specific information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, 15th to 15th In the seventeenth embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
First transmission means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means function to output either) and
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to feature F11 or F12, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball-entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means. A second signal path is used to transmit the second information to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature F14. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the 1st to 7th, 9th to 15th, and 18th embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the 8th to 10th signals in the main CPU 63, and in the 8th embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode A gaming machine according to feature F13, characterized in that it has a function of outputting any one of a medium signal, a high-frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal.

According to the feature F14, it is possible to manage the entry state of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the entry state of the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the first information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature F15. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature F13 or F14, characterized by comprising means for transmitting identification information (function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature F15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, there is no need to store in advance the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F16. The gaming machine according to feature F15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature F16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature F17. Characteristic feature F15 or F16, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature F17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature F18. The second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means when the identification information is received. Any one of the characteristics F15 to F17, characterized in that means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) is provided. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature F18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the second control means is provided with the information that enables the second control means to specify the ball-entering means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature F19. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the 1st to 7th, 9th to 15th, and 18th embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the 8th to 10th signals in the main side CPU 63, and in the 8th embodiment, the open/close execution mode function to output either medium signal, high frequency support mode signal or door open signal),
Characteristic F15, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of F18.

According to the feature F19, it is possible to manage the entry state of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the entry state of the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F20. In the second control means, as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, there are more types of information than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The game machine according to any one of features F13 to F19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to the feature F20, the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units that is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Accordingly, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the receiving section. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F21. First external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
A second external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to determine the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the state of the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. It becomes possible to specify the manner of entering the ball. In addition, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means is externally output, and the specific information and the correspondence to the specific ball entry means Information in combination with information that makes it possible to recognize that the person is doing is output to the outside. This makes it possible to specify each ball-entering mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature F22. Information computing means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, and fourth In the fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the processing of steps S2008, S2013, and S2017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the management side in the thirteenth embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step S2605 in the side CPU 112, or a function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature F22, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature F23. The predetermined storage execution means stores information that enables identification of whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (first storage means). A function of executing the processing of steps S1404 and S1409 in the management side CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a management side in the fifteenth embodiment A function to execute the processing of step S2803 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation, and calculates the state information (first to seventh, In the eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the management side CPU 112 A function of executing the processing of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017, a function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and executing the processing of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment. a function to execute the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature F22.

According to the feature F23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game ball entry mode by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation.

Feature F24. Means (1st to 7th, 8th, 14th, 15th, 16th and 16th Feature F22 or F23 characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management side CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature F24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature F25. Characteristic feature F22 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in F23.

According to the feature F25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read out and the game ball is entered. When analyzing the mode, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature F26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The game machine according to any one of features F22 to F25, wherein the mode information is calculated.

According to the feature F26, the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped. can be managed.

Feature F27. Characteristic features F22 through F22, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when an operation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of F26.

According to the feature F27, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature F28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F27, characterized by:

According to the feature F28, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature F29. Features F22 to F28, characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature F29, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature F30. The gaming machine according to feature F29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature F30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature F31. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means; or The gaming machine described in F30.

According to feature F31, in a configuration in which a processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature F32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). , and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112).

According to the feature F32, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the manner of entering a game ball.

Feature F33. The result storage execution means is
means for determining whether or not the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management-side CPU 112);
means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management-side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature F32, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F33, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature F34. The game according to the characteristic feature F32 or F33, wherein the result storing and executing means causes the mode information to be accompanied by information for specifying the time when the mode information is calculated, and causes the calculation result storing means to store the information. machine.

According to the feature F34, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature F35. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics F22 to F34, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to the feature F35, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature F36. Provided with notification control means (function of executing the processing of steps S3205, S3207 and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features F22 to F35, characterized in that

According to the feature F36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game ball entry mode without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature F37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature F36, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature F37, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature F38. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
with
The game machine according to feature F36 or F37, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature F38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature F39. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features F36 to F38, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute a second notification.

According to the feature F39, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature F40. Characteristic features F1 to characterized by comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S220 in the main side CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of F39.

According to the feature F40, in the configuration in which the correspondence information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means is externally output, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, by using the corresponding information, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entering means and the frequency of entering the ball, while using the prescribed information stored in the prescribed storage means, It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entering the ball.

Feature F41. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature F41, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features F1 to F41, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, main side in the sixteenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is Predetermined storage execution means for storing in the storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920 and S2923 in
Information calculation means (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 15th, 16th, 18th In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management side CPU 112; The function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the processing of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment. in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature G2. The predetermined storage executing means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to thirteenth embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 and S1209 in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2803 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment. function to execute),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the mode information (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, twelfth In the fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management side CPU 112; The function of executing the processing of S2017, the function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the thirteenth embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112 in the form, and a function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. .

According to the feature G2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the game is in the predetermined situation and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature G3. Means (1st to 7th, 8th, 14th, 15th, 16th and 16th Feature G1 or G2 characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management side CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature G3, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature G4. Characteristic G1 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in G2.

According to the characteristic G4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of (1), it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature G5. Characteristic G1, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The game machine according to any one of G4.

According to the feature G5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information can be obtained on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature G6. Any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when a repetitive computation opportunity occurs in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature G6, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within the range of one business day. becomes possible.

Feature G7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized by:

According to the feature G7, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature G8. Characteristics G1 to G7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature G8, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is to be outputted to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature G9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature G10. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
Characteristic G8, wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means; or A gaming machine described in G9.

According to feature G10, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature G11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). , and in the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112).

According to the feature G11, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature G12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature G11, characterized by:

According to the feature G12, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature G13. The game according to feature G11 or G12, wherein the result storage execution means stores information that enables the specification of the time when the mode information is calculated to accompany the mode information in the calculation result storage means. machine.

According to the feature G13, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature G14. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics G1 to G13, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to feature G14, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature G15. Provided with notification control means (function of executing the processing of steps S3205, S3207 and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, characterized in that

According to the feature G15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game during a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature G16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature G16, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature G17. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature G15 or G16, characterized by comprising:

According to feature G17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature G18. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features G15 to G17, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature G18, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature G19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the memory for history 117 in the sixteenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to 14th and 18th embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments) is executed by the main side RAM 65) is stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments; in the sixteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920 and S2923 in the main CPU 63;
Information computing means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, and fourth In the fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the twelfth embodiment, the processing of steps S2008, S2013, and S2017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the management side in the thirteenth embodiment. the function of executing the processing of step S2605 in the side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage processing of the information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature G20. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic G20, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features G1 to G20, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, main side in the sixteenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to 14th and 18th embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments) is Predetermined storage execution means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the main side CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920 and S2923 in
Information calculation means (first to seventh, eighth, twelfth , in the 14th, 15th, 16th, and 18th embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management side CPU 112; and the function of executing the processing of step S2017, the function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63);
Result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). function of executing the process of (in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management-side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. . As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Also, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature H2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized by:

According to the feature H2, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature H3. The game according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the result storing and executing means causes the mode information to be accompanied by information that makes it possible to specify the timing at which the mode information is calculated, and causes the calculation result storage means to store the information. machine.

According to the feature H3, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature H4. The predetermined storage executing means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that enables specifying whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to thirteenth embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 and S1209 in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2803 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifteenth embodiment. functions to execute),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the mode information (first to seventh, eighth, tenth, and tenth In the 14th, 15th, 16th and 18th embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613 and S1617 in the management side CPU 112; The function of executing the processing of S2017, the function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management-side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the management-side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the thirteenth embodiment. any of the features H1 to H3 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment) 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature H4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the game is in the predetermined situation and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature H5. Means (1st to 7th, 8th, 14th, 15th, 16th and 16th Features H1 to H4 characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management side CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature H5, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature H6. Characteristic feature H1 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. The game machine according to any one of H5.

According to the characteristic H6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of (1), it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature H7. Characteristic feature H1, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The game machine according to any one of H6.

According to the feature H7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature H8. Any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when an operational trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature H8, mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs while operating power is being supplied to the control means. becomes possible.

Feature H9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized by:

According to feature H9, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature H10. Characteristic features H1 to H9 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature H10, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature H11. The gaming machine according to feature H10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature H11, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature H12. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
Characteristic feature H10, wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or The gaming machine described in H11.

According to feature H12, in a configuration in which a processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature H13. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics H1 to H12, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to feature H13, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature H14. Provided with notification control means (function of executing the processing of steps S3205, S3207 and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H13, characterized in that

According to the feature H14, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game during a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature H15. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature H14, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to feature H15, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature H16. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
with
The gaming machine according to feature H14 or H15, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature H16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature H17. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features H14 to H16, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute the second notification.

According to the feature H17, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature H18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the memory for history 117 in the sixteenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to 14th and 18th embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments) is executed by the main side RAM 65) is stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments; in the sixteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920 and S2923 in the main CPU 63;
Each time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs, information calculation means (first to second In the seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1608, S1613, and S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the eleventh embodiment, the management side The function of executing the processing of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and the processing of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment. in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main side CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Result storage executing means (steps S2010, S2014 and S2018 in the management side CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculating means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). function of executing the process of (in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management-side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage processing of the information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Also, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature H19. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H18, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature H19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features H1 to H19, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, main side in the sixteenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to 14th and 18th embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments) is First storage execution means (1st to 15th, 17th to 18th embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, in the 16th embodiment, the main side a function of executing the processes of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920 and S2923 in the CPU 63;
When a specific event occurs as a result of a game, specific information (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, Second storage execution means (in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the numerical information measured by the counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means A function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2902, S2905, S2908, S2912, S2916, S2920 and S2923 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment); ,
A first external output means (management side CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event function to execute external output processing in
Second external output means (management side CPU 112) for outputting the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event function to execute external output processing in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I1, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the game machine, and use the read information to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is externally output in such a manner that it is possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so that it can be recognized. As a result, even if the information is not processed by the second control means, it is possible to specify the mode of occurrence of each event using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, further comprising means for externally outputting correspondence information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event (function for executing the process of step S220 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature I2, in a configuration in which correspondence information corresponding to a predetermined event is output to the outside when a predetermined event occurs, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, while the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be easily grasped by using the corresponding information, the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be accurately determined by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It is possible to grasp the

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to the feature I3, the predetermined information is count information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times the specific event has occurred. It becomes possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event.

Feature I4. A program output means (function for executing the processing of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output unit to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

According to feature I4, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I5. A selection means ( The gaming machine according to feature I4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1502 in the main side CPU 63 .

According to feature I5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be output to the outside is the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature I6. Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection unit selects the information stored in the predetermined storage unit and the control program for information to be output from the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized by specifying which one of them.

According to feature I6, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature I7. A chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section, the first external output means and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I4 to I6.

According to feature I7, it is possible to integrate the signal paths for the information output section within the chip. This makes it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output section, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features I1 to I7, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Program output means (function for executing the processing of step S1503 in the main side CPU 63) that outputs the control program to a device outside the game machine using the information output section (reading terminal 102);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the special information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature J2. Selection means (step S1502 in the main CPU 63) for specifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and for outputting information corresponding to the specified result The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of

According to feature J2, in the configuration in which the special information is externally output using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature J3. The selection means selects, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program. The game machine according to feature J2, characterized in that it is specified.

According to feature J3, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature J4. Any one of features J1 to J3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature J4, it is possible to integrate the signal paths for the information output unit within the chip. This makes it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output section, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112) are provided,
The first control means is
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a predetermined event occurs (the function of executing the processing of step S219 in the main side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S1008 in the payout side CPU 92);
Information transmission means (function for executing management output processing in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the event occurs;
with
When receiving the predetermined event information, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and the sixteenth memory). In the embodiment, the predetermined information (1st to 14th , history information in the eighteenth embodiment, and numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) are stored in the predetermined storage means (first to fifteenth , in the 17th to 18th embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2923.

According to the feature K1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the occurrence of the predetermined event. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege provision means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means is prevented from increasing excessively. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature K2. The game machine according to feature K1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature K2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature K3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined storage execution means executes a process of storing information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the specific event is stored in the gaming machine or outside the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. and
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature K3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event are stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the predetermined event occurs, but also the manner in which the specific event occurs. Moreover, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the rate of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Also, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is sent to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature K4. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the 1st to 7th, 9th to 15th, and 18th embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the 8th to 10th signals in the main CPU 63. In the sixth embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature K3, further comprising a function of outputting any one of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal.

According to the feature K4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the first information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature K5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The game machine according to feature K3 or K4, further comprising transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature K5, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, There is no need to store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature K6, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, a predetermined event and a specific event can occur. Under certain circumstances, it is possible to allow the second control means to identify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means.

Feature K7. Characteristic feature K5 or K6, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature K7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature K8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, provides correspondence information that makes it possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. in correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in management side CPU 112). game machine.

According to feature K8, the second control means stores the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event. Thereby, the information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature K9. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the 1st to 7th, 9th to 15th, and 18th embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the 8th to 10th signals in the main CPU 63; function to output either medium signal, high frequency support mode signal or door open signal),
Characteristic feature K5 characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of K8.

According to the feature K9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature K10. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature K10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features K1 to K10, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group E, the feature group F, the feature group G, the feature group H, the feature group I, and the feature group J, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. a first control means (main side CPU 63);
a second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
with
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Identification information transmission means (master side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means a function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs, and the second signal path is used when the second event occurs. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Further, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information , need not be stored in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature L2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature L3. Characteristic feature L1 or L2, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature L3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature L4. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of features L1 to L3, characterized by comprising means for storing relationship information in correspondence storage means (memory for correspondence 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in management side CPU 112) The game machine described.

According to feature L4, the second control means stores the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means. Accordingly, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature L5. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the 1st to 7th, 9th to 15th, and 18th embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the 8th to 10th signals in the main CPU 63, and in the 10th embodiment, the open/close execution mode function to output either medium signal, high frequency support mode signal or door open signal),
Characteristic L1 characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of L4 to L4.

According to the feature L5, it is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of the first event and the mode of occurrence of the second event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature L6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is larger than the number of types of information The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein a signal path is provided.

According to the feature L6, since the number of signal paths is greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be transmitted according to the model of the game machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration of the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L7. The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature L7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features L1 to L7, features A1 to A36, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D3, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F41, features G1 to G20, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration regarding communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 24... Game board, 24a... Out mouth, 24b... Nail, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 31... General winning opening, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operation opening, 34... Second operation Mouth 34a General electrical accessories 35 First through gate 39 Second through gate 61 Main control board 62 MPU 63 Main side CPU 65 Main side RAM 92 Payout side CPU , 102...Reading terminal 112...Management side CPU 116...Correspondence memory 171...Passage entrance 172...Escape passage 173...Passage exit 174...Exit roof 180...Adjustment mechanism 181c...Left standing wall , 181d...Right side upright wall 181e...Ejection protrusion 181g...Ejection right side face 181h...Left side upright wall 183...Rotating body 183b to 183e...Recessed part 184...Adjustment driving part 185...Intake Mouth 188 to 191 Blade portion 188a to 191a Peripheral surface 188b to 191b Front surface 192 Collision avoidance groove 220 Adjusting mechanism 230 Rotating body 241 to 244 Support surface 241a to 244a Step surface 252 Upper right upright wall 254 Rotating shaft 256 Ejection port 261 Left upright wall 262 Intake port 263a Ejection end 291 Left guide nail 292 Right guide nail , 330... Adjusting mechanism, 340... Rotating body, 343... Blade member, 344... Rotating shaft, 352... Erecting wall, 371... Downstream guide nail, 430... Adjusting mechanism, 440... Rotating body, 472... Guide nail, 530... Adjustment mechanism 545 Guide passage 546 Adjustment unit 560 Electric nail 560a Nail drive unit 581 First operation port 610 Game board 620 Adjustment mechanism 621 Discharge port 631 Calculation Result memory, 651... Notification light emitting unit, PA... Game area, C4... General electrical role release counter, C5... Initial value counter for release, T1... Winning determination value table for low frequency.

Claims (1)

a game value imparting means electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executing a process for imparting a game value to a game;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means for executing a predetermined process;
In a gaming machine comprising
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the processing for imparting the game value and is information to be referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detection means to the processing execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images